Konica Minolta bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/wps/wcm/connect/2e75720c-ba69-44ae-a436-dc02ce4865da/bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf?MOD=AJPERES&CONVERT_TO=url&CACHEID=2e75720c-ba69-44ae-a436-dc02ce4865da

 

 

 

 

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12 User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12 User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link Quick Guide Swedish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 Quick Guide Turkish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 Reference Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide German ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide French ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Czech ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Danish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Dutch ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Finnish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Greek ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Polish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Russian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Swedish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Turkish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide English ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide German ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide French ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Italian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Spanish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Czech ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Danish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Dutch ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Finnish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Greek ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Polish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Russian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Swedish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Turkish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide German ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide French ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo+ 25 i1n 2012-11-14 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16 User`s Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Czech ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Danish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Greek ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides Spanish 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Hungarian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Norwegian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Polish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Portuguese ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Russian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Slovakian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Turkish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i3 2011-09-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Hungarian bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Russian bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Spanish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Polish bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Multifunktions- gerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) 17011 2005-12-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C250, C250P, C252, C252P CEM 2006 - T012B 2006-10-17 ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135 Alkategória Nyelv Megnevezés Verzió Megjelenés dátuma Link Felhasználói segédlet Czech bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Multilingual bizhub 40P Installation and Safety Guide 1.1.1 2009-03-11 Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Portugál Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet English Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Danish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Polish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Italian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Spanish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Italian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Slovakian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Dutch bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Greek Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet German bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Russian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Russian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet German Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Swedish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Danish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Polish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Spanish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Hungarian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Dutch Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Swedish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Norwegian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Turkish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet French bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Finnish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Czech Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 ISO tanúsítvány English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P Reference Guide 1.1.0 2009-03-11 Felhasználói segédlet French Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Különleges tanúsítványok English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub 40P CEM-2007-T018G 2011-09-16 Gyors segédlet Romanian poster bizhub 40P Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C352/C250 and bizhub 750/600/bizhub 500/420) 1.1.0 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C352/C351/C250) 1.0.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English FK-502 Phase 2.5 for bizhub C250/C300/C351/C352/C450 1.0.0 (Phase2.5) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126 Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase 2.5 (complete set) 1.0.0 (Phase 2.5) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English Network Fax Operations 1.1.0 2006-08-22 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 1.8) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Swedish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126 Search Results: 101 - 126 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Kopierer bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) 16721 2005-07-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for C450, C450P +Print Controller IC-402 +Fax CEM-2005 -T001C 2006-09-01 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for bizhub C451, bizhub C550, bizhub C650 CEM-2007-T015A 2007-09-07 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26 ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 Product Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link IC-202 User`s Guide French IC-202 for ineo 750/600, Phase 2 - User Manual 1.1.1 2007-01-17 IC-204 User`s Guide Czech IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Russian IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide German IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Spanish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-207_generic User`s Guide Spanish IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide French IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide Dutch IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide English IC-207 1-1-0 2008-06-24 IC-208_generic User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27 IC-208_generic User`s Guide French ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27

User’s Guide [Facsimile]x-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35. You have made an excellent choice. This User’s Guide describes operating procedures and precautions for the use of the Fax functions. Be sure to read this User’s Guide before starting any machine operations. In order to ensure correct use of the Fax functions, read this User’s Guide, and then store it where it can immediately be referred to when necessary. Trademarks KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100- 0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.x-2 Manual Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.Contents Contents x-3 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Machine Parts ................................................................................................ 1-2 Front View................................................................................................... 1-2 Rear View.................................................................................................... 1-2 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 1-3 Touch panel .................................................................................................... 1-6 Home screen............................................................................................... 1-6 Initial Fax screen......................................................................................... 1-8 Keys and icons that appear in the screens ................................................. 1-9 User authentication and account track ..................................................... 1-11 With user authentication............................................................................ 1-11 Device authentication.......................................................................... 1-11 External server authentication ............................................................ 1-11 With account track..................................................................................... 1-12 Initial settings ............................................................................................... 1-13 G3 fax settings .......................................................................................... 1-13 [Date & Time Settings] ........................................................................ 1-13 [Fax Target]......................................................................................... 1-13 [Sender Settings] ................................................................................ 1-13 [Comm. Settings] ................................................................................ 1-13x-4 Contents Internet fax settings................................................................................... 1-14 [TCP/IP Settings] ................................................................................ 1-14 [Network Fax Functions Settings] ....................................................... 1-14 [E-mail TX (SMTP)]............................................................................. 1-14 [E-mail RX (POP)]............................................................................... 1-14 [Subject] .............................................................................................. 1-14 [Text] ................................................................................................... 1-14 Useful functions ........................................................................................... 1-15 2 Fax Settings screen ....................................................................................... 2-1 [Fax Settings] (User Settings) ...................................................................... 2-2 Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-2 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) ................................................................... 2-4 Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-8 [Sender Settings]......................................................................................... 2-8 [Header/Footer Settings]............................................................................. 2-9 [Comm. Settings]....................................................................................... 2-10 [Function Settings] .................................................................................... 2-12 [Fax Function Settings] ............................................................................. 2-13 [Memory RX] ............................................................................................. 2-15 [Closed Network RX Password]................................................................ 2-15 [Forward TX Settings] ............................................................................... 2-15 [Remote RX Settings]................................................................................ 2-16 [PC-Fax RX Settings]................................................................................ 2-16 [Nighttime RX Settings]............................................................................. 2-17 [PBX Connection Settings]........................................................................ 2-17 [Fax Report] .............................................................................................. 2-18 [List Print] .................................................................................................. 2-19 [Fax Target]............................................................................................... 2-20 [Fax Factory Default]................................................................................. 2-20 [Fax Image Initialized] ............................................................................... 2-20 3 Sending faxes ................................................................................................ 3-1 General operation .......................................................................................... 3-2 Positioning the original document ............................................................... 3-4 Using the ADF............................................................................................. 3-4 Using the original glass............................................................................... 3-5 Specifying destinations ................................................................................ 3-7 Selecting from the registered destinations.................................................. 3-7 Selecting from the Favorites list............................................................ 3-7 Selecting with an index search ............................................................. 3-7 Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ......................... 3-8 Directly typing in the address...................................................................... 3-8 G3 fax ................................................................................................... 3-8 Internet fax ............................................................................................ 3-9 Selecting from the log ................................................................................. 3-9Contents x-5 Selecting with an LDAP search................................................................. 3-10 Specifying scan settings ............................................................................. 3-11 [Original Type]........................................................................................... 3-11 [Resolution] ............................................................................................... 3-11 [Separate Scan] ........................................................................................ 3-11 Procedure ........................................................................................... 3-12 [Density] .................................................................................................... 3-12 [Background Removal].............................................................................. 3-12 [Sharpness]............................................................................................... 3-12 Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) ............................................ 3-13 [ECM OFF]................................................................................................ 3-13 [V34 OFF].................................................................................................. 3-13 [Check Dest. & Send]................................................................................ 3-13 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) ..................................................... 3-14 [Timer TX] ................................................................................................. 3-14 [Password TX]........................................................................................... 3-15 [F-Code TX]............................................................................................... 3-15 Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings .................................................... 3-17 Specifying document settings .................................................................... 3-18 [Original Size]............................................................................................ 3-18 [Long Original]........................................................................................... 3-18 [Simplex/Duplex] ....................................................................................... 3-18 [Binding Position] ...................................................................................... 3-19 Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) ................. 3-20 Selecting a program destination ................................................................ 3-21 Faxing manually (G3 fax) ............................................................................ 3-22 If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) ........................... 3-23 Canceling a queued transmission ............................................................. 3-23 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification ................................... 3-24 G3 fax........................................................................................................ 3-24 Internet fax ................................................................................................ 3-24 4 Receiving faxes .............................................................................................. 4-1 Receiving G3 faxes ........................................................................................ 4-2 Automatic reception .................................................................................... 4-2 Manual reception......................................................................................... 4-3 With the control panel ........................................................................... 4-3 With an external telephone ................................................................... 4-3 DRPD.......................................................................................................... 4-4 [Ring Pattern] ........................................................................................ 4-4 Receiving Internet faxes ............................................................................... 4-5 Useful reception functions ........................................................................... 4-6 Polling reception (G3 fax)............................................................................ 4-6 Performing a polling reception .............................................................. 4-6 Memory reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) ...................................................... 4-7 Using received documents.................................................................... 4-7x-6 Contents Closed network reception (G3 fax).............................................................. 4-7 Fax forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) ........................................................... 4-8 E-mail forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) ....................................................... 4-8 Remote reception (G3 fax).......................................................................... 4-9 Giving the reception command from an external telephone ................. 4-9 Night reception (G3 fax/Internet fax)......................................................... 4-10 Printing received faxes ............................................................................... 4-11 Determining the paper size ....................................................................... 4-11 Step 1: Determining the most suitable paper size .............................. 4-11 Step 2: Determining the actual paper size used for printing ............... 4-12 Reducing and splitting............................................................................... 4-12 When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer............ 4-12 When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] .......................... 4-13 When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF]............................... 4-13 When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]................................. 4-13 Adding reception information .................................................................... 4-14 5 Sending/receiving a PC fax ........................................................................... 5-1 Sending a PC fax ........................................................................................... 5-2 Transmission operation............................................................................... 5-2 Selecting a recipient from the phone book.................................................. 5-3 Selecting a recipient from the address book............................................... 5-4 Specifying transmission conditions ............................................................. 5-4 Creating a fax cover sheet .......................................................................... 5-5 [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box................................................. 5-5 [Basic] tab ............................................................................................. 5-6 [Recipient] tab ....................................................................................... 5-6 [Sender] tab .......................................................................................... 5-7 [Image] tab ............................................................................................ 5-7 Fax driver settings ......................................................................................... 5-8 [Printing Preferences] dialog box ................................................................ 5-8 [Properties] dialog box ................................................................................ 5-8 Common Settings........................................................................................ 5-9 [FAX] tab ................................................................................................... 5-10 [Basic] tab ................................................................................................. 5-11 [Authentication/Account Track] dialog box.......................................... 5-12 [Layout] tab ............................................................................................... 5-12 [Configure] tab........................................................................................... 5-13 [Settings] tab ............................................................................................. 5-13 Saving fax driver settings.......................................................................... 5-14 Saving the settings.............................................................................. 5-14 Editing settings.................................................................................... 5-14 Using the phone book ................................................................................. 5-15 Adding recipients to a phone book............................................................ 5-15 Editing a phone book ................................................................................ 5-16 Changing personal information ........................................................... 5-16Contents x-7 Changing group membership.............................................................. 5-17 Changing a group name ..................................................................... 5-17 Creating a folder ................................................................................. 5-17 Searching for personal information ..................................................... 5-17 Receiving a PC fax ....................................................................................... 5-18 Using received documents........................................................................ 5-18 Uninstalling the fax driver ........................................................................... 5-19 6 Registering destinations ............................................................................... 6-1 Destination registration ................................................................................ 6-2 Address Book.............................................................................................. 6-2 Group .......................................................................................................... 6-2 Program ...................................................................................................... 6-2 Registering an address book destination ................................................... 6-3 G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 6-3 Settings ................................................................................................. 6-4 Internet fax .................................................................................................. 6-5 Registering a program destination .............................................................. 6-6 7 Communication management ...................................................................... 7-1 Checking a job ............................................................................................... 7-2 Checking jobs being performed .................................................................. 7-2 Transmission jobs ................................................................................. 7-2 Reception jobs ...................................................................................... 7-2 Checking the job log.................................................................................... 7-3 Transmission jobs ................................................................................. 7-3 Reception jobs ...................................................................................... 7-3 Printing reports/lists ...................................................................................... 7-4 Types of reports .......................................................................................... 7-4 Types of lists ............................................................................................... 7-5 Activity Report............................................................................................. 7-6 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-6 TX Result Report......................................................................................... 7-7 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-7 Reservation TX Report................................................................................ 7-8 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-8 Broadcast Result Report............................................................................. 7-9 Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-9 Broadcast Reservation Report.................................................................. 7-10 Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-10 PC-Fax TX Error Report............................................................................ 7-11 Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-11 I-Fax RX Error Report ............................................................................... 7-11 Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-11 Address Book List/Group List/Program List .............................................. 7-12 Fax Setup Information list ......................................................................... 7-12x-8 Contents 8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1 Problems when sending faxes ..................................................................... 8-2 G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 8-2 Internet fax .................................................................................................. 8-4 PC fax ......................................................................................................... 8-4 Problems when receiving faxes ................................................................... 8-6 G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 8-6 Internet fax .................................................................................................. 8-7 Other problems .............................................................................................. 8-8 Error messages .............................................................................................. 8-9 9 Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical specifications ...............................................................................A-2 G3 fax..........................................................................................................A-2 Internet fax ..................................................................................................A-2 PC fax (Fax driver)......................................................................................A-3 Text input ........................................................................................................A-4 Entering text................................................................................................A-4Introduction1-2 Machine Parts Machine Parts The parts of the machine referred to throughout this manual are illustrated below. Please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1: Control panel 2: Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 2-a: ADF feed cover 2-b: Document guide 2-c: Document feed tray 2-d: Document output tray 2-e: Document stopper 3: USB HOST port 4: Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) 5: Tray 2 6: Output tray 7: Scanner lock lever 8: Original glass 9: Original cover pad 10: Scanner unit Rear View 1: Power switch 2: Rear cover 3: Power connection 4: LINE (telephone line) jack 5: TEL (telephone) jack 6: 10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3) Ethernet interface port 7: USB port 4 3 2-e 2 2-c 2-d 5 1 2-a 2-b 10 9 6 7 8 1 3 2 4 6 5 7About the Control Panel 1-3 About the Control Panel No. Name Function 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 [Power Save] key/ indicator Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 3 [Fax] key/indicator Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in green. 4 [E-mail] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on the [E-mail] key lights up in green. 5 [Folder] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on the [Folder] key lights up in green. 6 [Copy] key/indicator Press to enter Copy mode. While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 191817 16 14 15 13 1211101-4 About the Control Panel 7 [Reset] key Press to clear the settings (except programmed settings) of all displayed functions. 8 [Interrupt] key/indicator Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 9 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 10 [Start (Color)] key Press to start color copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 11 [Start] indicator Lights up in blue when copying, scanning or faxing can be performed. Lights up in orange when copying, scanning or faxing cannot be performed. 12 [Start (B&W)] key Press to start black-and-white copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies, a fax number, an e-mail address or a name. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [C] (clear) key Press to erase numbers or text. 15 [Error] indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred. Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called. 16 [Data] indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is queued. 17 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen. In the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility], [Meter Count], [Address Registration], [User Settings] and [Admin Settings] screens. No. Name FunctionAbout the Control Panel 1-5 18 [Mode Memory] key Press to store the desired settings for copy, fax or scan operations. In addition, stored settings can be recalled. 19 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to log on to this machine. While logged on, press the [Access] key to log off. No. Name Function1-6 Touch panel Touch panel Home screen No. Indication Description 1 Status Displays messages about the current operating status. 2 [Fax] Press to enter Fax mode. 3 [Scan to E-mail] Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. 4 [Scan to Folder] Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. 5 [Copy] Press to enter Copy mode. For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. 6 Date/time Shows the current date and time. 7 [USB/HDD] Press to print files on a USB memory device. Press to print a print job saved on hard disk. 1 10 6 9 7 8 2 3 4 5Touch panel 1-7 8 [Status] Press to view information on consumables and devices. 9 [Job] Press to check a print, transmission, reception or storing job. 10 Toner supply indicators Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K). No. Indication Description1-8 Touch panel Initial Fax screen No. Indication Description 1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter a destination address. 3 [Others] Press to select a destination from the log. Documents saved on the machine’s memory can also be used. 4 [Off-Hook] Press to send or receive a fax manually. 5 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified destinations and settings. From this screen, specified destinations can also be deleted. 6 [Settings] Press to specify fax settings. 7 Press to return to the home screen. 7 5 6 1 2 3 4Touch panel 1-9 Keys and icons that appear in the screens Icon Description If the screen has multiple pages, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different page. If values appear between [ ] and [ ], the current page number/total number of pages is indicated. If there are tabs that are not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different tab. Press to adjust the image quality during a copy, scan or fax operation. Press [+] or [-] to change the entered value. Press when an error occurs to view the error message. Press to display descriptions of the various functions. A description of the current screen will be displayed. Press to display the address book. From this screen, you can select single destinations and group destinations registered in the address book. Appears while scanning and printing when making copies. Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning operations. Appears while printing with PC printing, received fax printing and report printing.1-10 Touch panel Appears when using a G3 fax connection. Appears when there are documents queued for a timer transmission. Appears when there are fax documents received with memory reception or PC faxing. Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit. Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents. Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied. Appears when a USB memory device is connected. Icon DescriptionUser authentication and account track 1-11 User authentication and account track If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine, the user name or account name and the password must be entered in the Login screen in order to log on. The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or account track setting have been specified. " User authentication and account track settings are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. With user authentication Device authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. External server authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Specify a server for [Server]. 3 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. " If account track settings have been applied, account track will be performed after [Login] is pressed. However, if the machine has been set to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account had been specified for the user who is logging on, account track will not be performed. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].1-12 User authentication and account track With account track 1 Specify an account and password for [Account] and [Password]. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used.Initial settings 1-13 Initial settings After installation, settings must be specified for the following in order to use the fax functions. Be sure to specify these settings correctly, otherwise fax transmissions cannot be performed. G3 fax settings [Date & Time Settings] Specify the current date and time. For details on the settings, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. [Fax Target] Select the country where this machine is installed. For details on the settings, refer to “[Fax Target]” on page 2-20. [Sender Settings] Specify the name and fax number of the sender (this machine). For details on the settings, refer to “[Sender Settings]” on page 2-8. [Comm. Settings] Specify settings for the fax operating environment, such as the dialing method and reception mode. For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.1-14 Initial settings Internet fax settings " Settings for using Internet fax functions are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details on the settings, refer to the [Reference Guide]. [TCP/IP Settings] Specify the necessary settings in order to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment. [Network Fax Functions Settings] Enable Internet fax functions. [E-mail TX (SMTP)] Enable the e-mail (Internet fax) transmission function. In addition, specify the IP address of the SMTP server and the e-mail address of this machine. " When sending Internet faxes, [Binary Division] is always set to [OFF]. [E-mail RX (POP)] Enable the e-mail (Internet fax) reception function. In addition, specify the address, login name and password for the POP server. [Subject] Register a subject for the e-mail (Internet fax). The subject can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet fax is sent. For details, refer to “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17. [Text] Register the message text for the e-mail (Internet fax). The message text can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet fax is sent. For details, refer to “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17.Useful functions 1-15 Useful functions By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent, recipients can be recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent. „ Address Book Register information of destinations (fax numbers and e-mail addresses, etc.) where data is frequently sent. „ Group Register multiple address book destinations together in a group. „ Program Register destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens). " For details on registering destinations, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1.1-16 Useful functionsFax Settings screen2-2 [Fax Settings] (User Settings) [Fax Settings] (User Settings) The parameters available on the [Fax Settings] screen ([User Settings]) are described below. Settings 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Fax Settings]. The Fax Settings screen appears. " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Remote RX Enabled] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the remote reception function is used. [Remote RX No.] Type in the number (2 digits) for performing remote reception. Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. Print Settings Machine Settings Scan Settings Copy Settings User Settings Default Fax Settings Fax Settings Display Fax Activity[Fax Settings] (User Settings) 2-3 [Default Fax Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting] Select the default settings for the parameters on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens that are selected when the machine is turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. [Factory Default]: The default settings are the manufacturer’s default settings. [Current Setting]: The default settings are the current settings. [Display Fax Activity] Select whether or not transmission/reception information is displayed in the control panel while sending/receiving G3 faxes. [Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the number of originals, address, ID and number of destinations are displayed while G3 faxes are being sent. [Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the number of originals and ID are displayed while G3 faxes are being received. Item Description2-4 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) The parameters available on the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) are described below. Machine Settings Sender Settings Sender Administrator Registration Authentication Setting Admin Settings Address Registration Ethernet Sender Fax No. External Memory Print Job Timeout Copy Settings Fax Settings Security Settings Folder Settings Restore Defaults Print Settings Header/Footer Settings Header Position Footer Position Fax TX Header Name Maintenance Menu[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-5 Paper Empty HDD Format Comm. Settings PB/DP Number of RX Call Rings RX Mode Redial Interval Redial Line Monitor Volume Line Monitor Manual RX V.34 OFF Ring Pattern Function Settings Inch Paper Priority Print Paper Size Paper Priority Min. Reduction for RX Print Tray Selection for RX Print Duplex Print (RX) Print Separate Fax Pages Restriction Code Settings2-6 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) Fax Function Settings F-Code TX Confirm Addr (TX) Dest. Check Display Func. Restrict Fax TX Confirm Addr (Register) Restrict PC-Fax TX Restrict Fax RX Memory RX Memory RX Password Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting Forward & Print Forwarding Address Closed Network RX Password Enable Password Restrict Internet Fax TX Restrict Internet Fax RX[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-7 Remote RX Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. Nighttime RX Settings Night Fax RX Print Night RX End Time Night RX Start Time PC-Fax RX Settings PC-Fax RX Setting PC-Fax RX Print PBX Connection Settings PBX Function PBX Number Fax Report Activity Report TX Result Report Image TX Result Report PC-Fax TX Error Report TX Reserve Broadcast Result Report Broadcast Report TX Result Report Screen2-8 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) Settings 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Admin Settings]. 3 Type in the administrator password (Default: 12345678), and then press [OK]. The Admin Settings screen appears. 4 Press [Fax Settings]. The Fax Settings screen appears. " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Sender Settings] Item Description [Sender] Type in the sender’s (this machine’s) name. (up to 30 bytes) The information specified here is printed as the transmitting subscriber identification in the header of sent documents. [Sender Fax No.] Type in the fax number of this machine. (up to 20 characters) The information specified here is printed as the transmitting subscriber identification in the header of sent documents. List Print Fax Setup Pg Fax Image Initialized Fax Factory Default Fax Target I-Fax RX Error Report[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-9 [Header/Footer Settings] Item Description [Header Position] Settings [Inside Body Text] / [Outside Body Text] / [OFF] Select the position for the transmitting subscriber identification added to documents sent from this machine. The added transmitting subscriber identification is printed as a part of the image in the received document. If [OFF] is selected, the transmitting subscriber information is not added. (For 120V model, [OFF] is not available.) "When transmitting subscriber identification is added while sending Internet faxes, the information is added inside the document regardless of the selected setting. [Fax TX Header Name] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select the information added as the transmitting subscriber identification. [ON]: Adds the sender’s name, recipient’s fax number (To: xxxxx), date/time that transmission begins, communication number and page number/total number of pages as the transmitting subscriber identification. [OFF]: Adds the sender’s name, sender’s fax number, date/time that transmission begins, communication number and page number/total number of pages as the transmitting subscriber identification. "The recipient's address will not be added when sending Internet faxes, even if [ON] is selected.2-10 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Comm. Settings] [Footer Position] Settings [Inside Body Text] / [Outside Body Text] / [RX Ft. OFF] Select the position for the reception information (reception time and reception number) printed in documents received by this machine. If [RX Ft. OFF] is selected, the reception information is not printed. Item Description [PB/DP] Settings [PB] / [10pps] / [20pps] Select the dialing method according to the operating environment being used. "The default setting differs depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. If [Fax Target] is set to a country that is not compatible with [20pps], [20pps] does not appear. [RX Mode] Settings [Auto RX] / [Manual RX] / [DRPD] Select the reception method. [Auto RX]: Automatic reception [Manual RX]: Manual reception; Select this setting if an external telephone is connected and the phone line is often busy, or if remote reception is to be used. [DRPD]: If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call is automatically received as a fax. If [DRPD] is selected, select the ring pattern for faxing with [Ring Pattern]. [Number of RX Call Rings] Settings [1] - [15] ([2]) Specify how many rings are produced until the machine begins receiving the fax when it is set for automatic reception. "The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-11 [Redial] Settings [0] - [10] ([1]) Specify the number of times this machine automatically redials when a fax could not be sent correctly, for example, if the line is busy or a communication error occurred. "The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. [Redial Interval] Settings [2] - [15] ([2]) Select the length of the interval (in minutes) between redial attempts when the machine automatically redials. "The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target]. [Line Monitor] Settings [OFF] / [Until Connection Complete] / [Until Transmission Complete] Select whether the line monitoring tone is produced during communication. [OFF]: No line monitoring tone is produced. [Until Connection Complete]: The line monitoring tone is produced until the connection with the destination has been completed after dialing. [Until Transmission Complete]: The line monitoring tone is produced until the fax transmission has been completed after dialing. [Line Monitor Volume] Settings [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select the volume of the line monitoring tone. [Ring Pattern] Settings [Normal Ring] / [Double] / [Triple 1] / [Triple 2] Select the ring pattern for faxing when [RX Mode] is set to [DRPD]. "For details on the settings, refer to “[Ring Pattern]” on page 4-4. Item Description2-12 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Function Settings] [Manual RX V.34 OFF] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not V.34 is automatically turned off during manual reception. Item Description [Inch Paper Priority] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not paper sizes in inches are given priority when printing received documents. "The default setting is [ON] for 120V model, and [OFF] for other models. [Paper Priority] Settings [Auto Select] / [Fixed Size] / [Size Priority] Specify the priority for the paper drawers when printing received documents. [Auto Select]: Selects the paper automatically. [Fixed Size]: Prints only on paper of the specified size. [Size Priority]: Prints on paper with the size given priority. If no paper size has been given priority, paper with the closest size is used for printing. [Print Paper Size] Settings [Letter] / [Legal] / [Oficio] / [A4] Select the size of paper used for printing received documents. In order for this parameter to be available, [Tray Selection for RX Print] must be set to [Auto]. "The default setting is [Letter] for 120V model, and [A4] for other models. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-13 [Fax Function Settings] [Tray Selection for RX Print] Settings [Auto] / [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Select the paper drawer to be used when a specific paper drawer is used for printing received documents. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed. [Min. Reduction for RX Print] Settings [87%] - [96%] / [100%] Specify the reduction ratio (%) used for printing received documents. [Print Separate Fax Pages] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not pages are split when the received document is longer than the standard paper size. When [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON], this parameter does not appear. [Duplex Print (RX)] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not received documents are printed on both sides of paper. When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], this parameter does not appear. Item Description [F-Code TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not F-code transmissions are used. [Dest. Check Display Func.] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the list of specified destinations is printed before the fax is sent. Item Description2-14 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Cofirm Addr (TX)] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the destination address must be entered a second time for confirmation when directly typing in the address. Requiring that the address be entered twice reduces misdirected faxes caused by the address being mistyped. [Cofirm Addr (Register)] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the destination address must be entered a second time for confirmation when registering destinations. Requiring that the address be entered twice prevents incorrect programming caused by the address being mistyped. [Restrict Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax transmissions. [Restrict Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax receptions. [Restrict PC-Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit PC fax transmissions. [Restrict Internet Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit transmission of Internet faxes. [Restrict Internet Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit reception of Internet faxes. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-15 [Memory RX] " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [PC-Fax RX Settings], [Forward TX Settings] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens. [Closed Network RX Password] [Forward TX Settings] Item Description [Memory RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the memory reception function is used. If [ON] is selected, received documents are saved in the machine’s memory and are not automatically printed. [Password] Specify the password (up to 8 digits) for allowing documents saved in the memory to be used. Item Description [Enable] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not the closed network reception function is used. [Password] Specify the password (4 digits) for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions. Item Description [Forward TX Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the memory reception function is used. [Forwarding Address] Type in the fax number of the forwarding destination. Press to select a registered destination. "A received document can also be forwarded to an e-mail address. To forward documents to an e-mail address, select the forwarding destination from the address book.2-16 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [PC-Fax RX Settings], [Memory RX] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens. [Remote RX Settings] [PC-Fax RX Settings] " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [Forward TX Settings], [Memory RX] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens. [Forward & Print] Settings [Forward & Print] / [Forward & Print (If TX Fails)] Select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded. [Forward & Print]: Normally prints the fax at the same time that is forwarded. [Forward & Print (If TX Fails)]: Prints the fax if forwarding failed. Item Description [Remote RX Enabled] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the remote reception function is used. [Remote RX No.] Type in the remote reception number (2 digits) for performing remote reception. Item Description [PC-Fax RX Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the PC fax reception function is used. [PC-Fax RX Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a PC fax is printed automatically after it is received. However, if the fax is saved with the memory reception function, it is not automatically printed. Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-17 [Nighttime RX Settings] " The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the [Forward TX Settings], [Memory RX] and [PC-Fax RX Settings] screens. [PBX Connection Settings] Item Description [Night Fax RX Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to prohibit printing of documents received during the night. [Night RX Start Time] Specify the start time for the night. [Night RX End Time] Specify the end time for the night. Item Description [PBX Function] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a PBX line is connected. [PBX Number] Specify the outside line access number. The outside line access number specified here will be dialed before the fax numbers registered with address book destinations and program destinations.2-18 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Fax Report] Item Description [Activity Report] Specify the settings for printing activity reports. [Output Settings] Settings [Every 100 comm.] / [Every Day] / [100/Daily] / [No] Select the conditions for printing. [Every 100 comm.]: Prints after every 100 communication jobs. [Every Day]: Prints at the specified time every day. [100/Daily]: Prints at the specified time every day and after every 100 communication jobs. [No]: Is not printed. [Output Time Setting] Specify the time for printing the report when [Output Settings] is set to [Every day] or [100/ Daily]. [Activity Report] Settings [Journal 100] / [Within 24 Hours] Select a setting when [Output Settings] is set to [Every day] or [100/Daily]. [Journal 100]: Prints the information for the 100 most recent communication jobs. [Within 24 Hours]: Prints the information for a maximum 100 communication jobs within the past 24 hours. [TX Result Report] Settings [Always] / [If TX Fails] / [No] Select the conditions for printing the transmission results report. [TX Result Report Image] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an image of the first page of the document is printed in the transmission results report. [TX Reserve] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a report is printed with timer transmissions.[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-19 [List Print] [PC-Fax TX Error Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an error report is printed with PC fax transmissions. [Broadcast Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a results report is printed with broadcast transmissions. [Broadcast Result Report] Settings [All Dest.] / [Mode Once] Select the conditions for printing the results report for broadcast transmissions. [All Dest.]: Prints the report if transmission to all destinations was completed. [Mode Once]: Prints a report for each destination if transmission could not be completed, even after redialing. [TX Result Report Screen] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to request confirmation for printing a transmission results report before beginning the transmission. [I-Fax RX Error Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to print a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails. Item Description [Fax Setup Pg] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] A list of fax-related settings will be printed. To print, press [Print], and then press [OK].2-20 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) [Fax Target] [Fax Factory Default] " The address book is not initialized. [Fax Image Initialized] " The address book is not initialized. Description Settings [U.S.A.] / [Canada] / [Mexico] / [Austria] / [Belgium] / [Denmark] / [Finland] / [France] / [Germany] / [Greece] / [Ireland] / [Italy] / [The Netherlands] / [Norway] / [Poland] / [Portugal] / [Spain] / [Sweden] / [Switzerland] / [The U.K.] / [Russia] / [Argentina] / [Brazil] / [South Africa] / [Australia] / [New Zealand] / [China] / [Hong Kong] / [Malaysia] / [Singapore] / [Korea] / [Taiwan] / [Israel] / [Japan] / [Saudi Arabia] / [Turkey] / [Hungary] / [Slovakia] / [Vietnam] / [The Czech Republic] / [The Philippines] / [Europe] Select the country where this machine is installed. Select the setting when installing the machine. Description Settings [Yes] / [No] The fax settings are reset to those specified when the machine was shipped from the manufacturer. To return all settings to their factory default, press [Yes], and then press [OK]. Description Settings [Yes] / [No] All saved fax data (jobs) is initialized. To initialize, press [Yes], and then press [OK]. The machine is automatically restarted.Sending faxes3-2 General operation General operation The general procedure for sending G3 faxes and Internet faxes is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on page 1-8. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the original document” on page 3-4. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 3-7. – In the initial Fax screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the specified destinations. 4 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens. – For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 3-11. – For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13, “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14 and “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17.General operation 3-3 – For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18. 5 Press the [Start] key. – The fax is sent in black and white regardless of whether the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key is pressed. After all document pages have been scanned, the fax is sent. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 3-18. " If the G3 fax cannot be sent, for example, because the recipient’s line is busy, the machine will redial the fax number and try again to send the fax. For details on redialing, refer to “If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax)” on page 3-23. " If the fax could not be sent, a transmission results report is printed (if the machine has been set to print the transmission results report). For details on the transmission results report, refer to “Printing reports/ lists” on page 7-4. " To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmission queued for redialing, delete the job from the Job screen. For details, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23. " If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned, scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. " Internet fax documents will be scanned and sent with the following attributes. · File type: Monochrome (TIFF) · Coding method: TIFF-S (MH) 3-4 Positioning the original document Positioning the original document With this machine, the document can be placed in the ADF or on the original glass. Using the ADF If the ADF is used, documents containing multiple pages can be automatically scanned and faxed. In addition, double-sided documents can also be faxed. 1 Place the document face up in the ADF. 2 Slide the document guides against the edges of the document. " Lower the document stopper when scanning Legal-size paper with the ADF. " If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF, the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 3-11. " A document containing a combination of Letter- and Legal-size pages can be scanned with the ADF. When scanning a document containing a combination of Letter- and Legal-size pages, select “Legal” as the size of the document to be scanned. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 3-18. " Do not load original documents that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples.Positioning the original document 3-5 " Do not load more than 50 sheets; otherwise an original document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. " If the original document is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight, or an original document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. " Do not open the ADF cover while documents loaded into the ADF are being scanned. Using the original glass If the original glass is used, documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF (thick documents, such as a book, or a document on thin paper) can be scanned and faxed. With the original glass, only one document page at a time can be scanned. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Place the document face down on the original glass, aligning the document with the document scales.3-6 Positioning the original document 3 Carefully close the ADF. " When using the original glass to scan a document containing multiple pages, the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 3-11.Specifying destinations 3-7 Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations. „ “Selecting from the registered destinations” on page 3-7 „ “Directly typing in the address” on page 3-8 „ “Selecting from the log” on page 3-9 „ “Selecting with an LDAP search” on page 3-10 Selecting from the registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine. " In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites]. As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Fax screen is displayed. Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent. " The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press . 2 Press the desired index tab to search the destinations. – If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the desired tab appears. – To select a group destination, press [Group].3-8 Specifying destinations 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent. Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press . 2 Press [Search]. 3 Select the search method. – [Type]: Select the destination type (Fax, E-mail, etc.). – [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for. Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a list of the search results. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent. 5 Press [OK]. Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type in the address. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Direct Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. G3 fax 1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [Fax]. 3 Type in the fax number. – [Tone]: Press to send push-button tones when pulse dialing is being used. [T] appears in the screen. – [Pause]: Press to insert a pause when dialing. [P] appears in the screen. – [-]: Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing.Specifying destinations 3-9 4 Press [OK]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], the fax number must be entered again after [OK] is pressed. " To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, press [Next Dest.] after the fax number was entered, and then type in the next fax number. " If the machine is being used with a PBX, press [Pause] after the outside line access number (for example, [0]) for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line. Internet fax 1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [Internet Fax]. 3 Type in the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Others]. 2 Press [Log]. 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. " Only addresses that have been directly typed in remain in the log. " Selecting destinations from the log is possible only for jobs with a single destination. " When the machine is turned off, the transmission log is cleared. " If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log.3-10 Specifying destinations " The following types of transmissions are not recorded in the log. · PC faxing · Fax forwarding and E-mail forwarding · Transmissions recovered after the machine is turned off, then on again · Transmissions where the address is directly typed in while the machine is off-hook Selecting with an LDAP search Destinations can be selected after searching an LDAP server. This can be used if the network contains an LDAP server, for example, for user management. " In order to perform an LDAP search, the LDAP server must be registered with the machine. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP server. 1 In the initial Fax screen, press . 2 Press [LDAP]. 3 Select the search method, and then perform the search. – [Search]: Type in the keyword to be searched for. Press [OK] to begin searching. – [Advanced Search]: Select the appropriate conditions, and then type in the keyword to be searched for. Press [OK] to begin searching. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To register an address in the address book, select the address from the address list, and then press [Save]. – To view the details of an address, select the address from the address list, and then press [Details]. – To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent.Specifying scan settings 3-11 Specifying scan settings From the [Scan Settings] screen, settings for scanning the document can be specified. [Original Type] Select the appropriate image quality setting according to your document. [Resolution] Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned. " A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. " Only [Standard] and [Fine] are available for sending Internet faxes. If [Super Fine] was selected, the setting will change to [Fine] before the Internet fax is sent. [Separate Scan] A document can be divided and scanned separately. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages, and then all scanned pages can be faxed as a single document. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos. [Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos. Item Description [Standard] The document will be scanned at 200 × 100 dpi. [Fine] The document will be scanned at 200 × 200 dpi. [Super Fine] (G3 fax only) The document will be scanned at 400 × 400 dpi.3-12 Specifying scan settings Procedure 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Press [Settings]. 5 Press [Scan Settings]. 6 Set [Separate Scan] to [ON]. 7 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned. 8 Load the next batch of document pages, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this operation until all document pages have been scanned. – Press [Change Settings] to change the scan settings. 9 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish]. [Density] Select the density at which the document is to be scanned. Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting according to your document. [Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned. Nine density levels are available for the background color. [Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting toward “+”. Seven sharpness levels are available.Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) 3-13 Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) With [Line Settings] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, settings for the transmission line can be specified. [ECM OFF] The error correction mode (ECM) is turned off when data is being sent. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirming that the sent data is free of errors. Therefore, communication can be free of disturbances caused by telephone line noise, etc. If noise frequently occurs, it may take a slightly longer time to complete a communication, compared with when ECM is turned off. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on ECM. " This setting cannot be used together with polling reception. " If [V34 OFF] is set to [No], [ECM OFF] cannot be set to [Yes]. [V34 OFF] V.34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through a PBX, it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode due to the condition of the telephone line. In this case, it is recommended that V.34 be turned off before sending data. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on the V.34 mode. " This setting cannot be used together with polling reception. [Check Dest. & Send] The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI), and the data is sent only if the fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail, resulting in a transmission error. " In order to use this function, the recipient’s fax number must be specified on their fax machine.3-14 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) With [Comm. Method] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, useful transmission functions can be specified. " For details on [Polling RX], refer to “Polling reception (G3 fax)” on page 4-6. [Timer TX] A timer transmission can be specified. Timer transmission is the function for sending a fax at a specified time. Multiple destinations can be specified. A maximum of 16 timer transmissions (including transmissions being redialed) can be queued. To send a timer transmission, press [Yes], and then use the keypad to type in the transmission time. The time can be set in hours and minutes. The day cannot be specified. " In order to send a timer transmission, the date and time must first be specified on the machine. For details on the date and time settings, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. " This function cannot be used together with Internet fax transmissions or polling reception. " If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information. " If the machine is off at the specified TX Start Time, the fax will be sent the next time that the machine is turned on. " For details on canceling a queued transmission job, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23.Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) 3-15 [Password TX] A password transmission can be specified. Password transmission is the function for sending a fax with a password applied. This function can be used if the recipient’s fax machine is compatible with closed network receptions. If the recipient’s fax machine is set for closed network receptions, this machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network reception password specified on the recipient’s machine. To send a password transmission, press [Yes], and then use the keypad to type in the closed network reception password specified on the recipient’s fax machine. " If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information. " This function cannot be used together with F-code transmissions or polling reception. [F-Code TX] An F-code transmission can be specified. F-code transmissions are the function for sending a fax to a specific recipient’s box with a specified Sub address and password. To send an F-code transmission, press [Yes]. Press [Sub Address] or [Password], and then use the keypad to type in the corresponding settings. The following types of recipient boxes are available. „ Confidential TX The fax will be sent to a confidential box on the recipient’s machine. Type in the box number for [Sub Address], and type in the communication password for [Password]. „ Relay TX The fax will be sent to a relay box if the recipient’s machine is equipped with a relay transmission function. Type in the relay box number for [Sub Address], and type in the relay password for [Password]. " This function can be used if the recipient’s fax machine is compatible with F-codes. " Confidential communication is the function for using a confidential box to receive a document to be sent to a specific person. In order to send a confidential transmission from this machine, a confidential box and password must be specified on the recipient’s fax machine.3-16 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) " Relay transmission is the function for sending a document to a relay station, which then broadcasts the document to the recipients. In order to send a relay transmission, a relay box number, relay password and destination group number must be specified on the recipient’s machine used as a relay station. This machine cannot be used as a relay station. " This function cannot be used together with password transmissions or polling reception. " If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information.Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings 3-17 Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings With [E-mail Settings] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, specify the file name, subject, From address and body text for sending Internet fax (e-mail) messages. " For details on registering information from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Item Description [File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data. [Subject] Type in the subject for e-mail messages. Subject text registered with PageScope Web Connection can also be selected. [From] Specify the sender's address. Select [Administrator E-mail Addr.] or [User Address], or type it in directly. [Administrator E-mail Addr.] can be selected if the administrator e-mail address has been registered. [User Address] can be selected if an e-mail address has been registered for the currently authenticated user. [Body] Type in the body text for the e-mail message. Body text registered with PageScope Web Connection can also be selected.3-18 Specifying document settings Specifying document settings From the [Original Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the document to be faxed. [Original Size] Specify the size of the document that is to be faxed. [Long Original] Select whether or not a long original document is to be sent. A document with a maximum length of 1,000 mm can be sent. To send a long document, press [ON]. " Long documents can only be scanned using the ADF. Double-sided long documents cannot be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used. Item Description [Standard Size] When sending a document of a standard size, press [Standard Size], and then select the document size. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 148 mm and 356 mm (5.83 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 140 mm and 216 mm (5.51 inches and 8.50 inches). Item Description [1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided document. [2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a double-sided document.Specifying document settings 3-19 [Binding Position] Specify the binding position when sending a double-sided document using the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left. [Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a double-sided document with a cover page. Only the front side of the first page will be scanned, and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned. Item Description [Left Bind] Select this setting for binding at the left. [Top Bind] Select this setting for binding at the top. [Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position. If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69 inches), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.3-20 Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) The same document can be sent to multiple destinations with a single operation. If all of the desired destinations are selected when sending the fax, the same document will be sent to each of the specified destinations. A broadcast transmission can be specified as a timer transmission. Use any of the following methods to specify destinations for broadcast transmissions. „ Selecting from registered destinations (up to 500 destinations) (page 3-7) „ Directly typing in the address (up to 100 destinations, including the destinations with an LDAP search) (page 3-8) „ Selecting with an LDAP search (up to 100 destinations, including the destinations with direct input) (page 3-10) „ Selecting a group destination (page 3-7) „ Selecting a program destination (page 3-21) " For details on destination types and their registration procedures, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. " The results of the broadcast transmission can be viewed in the Broadcast Result Report. For details, refer to “Broadcast Result Report” on page 7-9. " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the document cannot be sent with the [Super Fine] Resolution setting (400 × 400 dpi). " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the timer transmission function cannot be used. " Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP server.Selecting a program destination 3-21 Selecting a program destination A fax can be sent with a program destination registered on the machine. Program destinations are registered with destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens) allowing a fax to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on page 1-8. 2 Position the document to be faxed. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the original document” on page 3-4. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK]. The settings and destination addresses are recalled. 5 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned and transmission begins. " In order to select a program destination, the program destination must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 6-6. " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the document cannot be sent with the [Super Fine] Resolution setting (400 × 400 dpi). " When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations, the timer transmission function cannot be used.3-22 Faxing manually (G3 fax) Faxing manually (G3 fax) If a fax is sent manually, the status of the recipient can be confirmed before the fax is sent. In order to send a fax manually, the following requirements must be met. „ The document cannot be divided and scanned separately. If the original glass is being used, the document being sent can contain only one page. „ F-code transmissions, timer transmissions, password transmissions and polling reception are not being performed. „ Automatic redialing cannot be used. „ Multiple destinations cannot be specified. The procedure for a manual transmission with [Off-Hook] pressed is described below. " If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], [Off-Hook] cannot be used. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on page 1-8. 2 Position the document to be faxed. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the original document” on page 3-4. 3 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens. – For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 3-11. – For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13 and “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14. – For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18. 4 Press [Off-Hook]. 5 Make sure that [Send] is selected. 6 Specify the destination. – Press to select a registered destination. – Press the [Mode Memory] key to select a program destination. 7 After the fax answer tone is heard, press [Start] or press the [Start] key. The document is scanned and transmission begins.If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) 3-23 If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) If the fax could not be sent correctly, for example, if the line is busy or a communication error occurred, a message appears, informing that the number will be redialed after a certain length of time. A fax that could not be sent becomes a queued transmission, and the machine automatically redials the number after a certain length of time has passed. If necessary, the number of redial attempts and the interval between them can be specified. For details, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. " Automatic redialing cannot be used if the fax is being sent manually. " For details on canceling a transmission being redialed, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23. " For details on problems that may occur during transmission, refer to “Problems when sending faxes” on page 8-2. Canceling a queued transmission To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmission queued for redialing, delete the job from the Job screen. 1 In the home screen, press [Job]. – For details on the home screen, refer to “Home screen” on page 1-6. 2 Press [Send]. A list of queued transmission jobs appears. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. 4 Press [Yes], and then press [OK]. The job is deleted. " For details on the Job screen, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide].3-24 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification Adding the transmitting subscriber identification The transmitting subscriber identification can be added to documents sent from this machine. This information is printed in the header of the received document as a part of the image. " For details on the settings for specifying where to print the transmitting subscriber identification and for printing the recipient information in the transmitting subscriber identification, refer to “[Header/Footer Settings]” on page 2-9. G3 fax The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identification. „ Sender’s name „ Fax numbers of the sender or recipient „ Date/time that transmission begins „ Communication number „ Page number/total number of pages " For details on the registering the name and fax number of the sender (this machine), refer to “[Sender Settings]” on page 2-8. " During a manual transmission, the total number of pages is not printed in the transmitting subscriber identification. Internet fax The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identification. „ From address of the Internet fax (E-mail) „ Date/time that transmission begins „ Communication number „ Page number/total number of pages " When sending Internet faxes, transmitting subscriber identification is added inside the document.Receiving faxes4-2 Receiving G3 faxes Receiving G3 faxes The following reception modes are available with this machine. Select the one that fits your environment. „ “Automatic reception” on page 4-2 „ “Manual reception” on page 4-3 „ “DRPD” on page 4-4 " When the machine is turned off, faxes cannot be received. Therefore, be sure to leave the machine turned on. Automatic reception Select this mode when using the telephone line as a dedicated fax line. When the specified number of rings is detected, fax reception begins automatically. In order to receive faxes automatically, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Auto RX]. „ With [Comm. Settings] - [Number of RX Call Rings] to specify how many rings are produced before the machine begins receiving the fax. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.Receiving G3 faxes 4-3 Manual reception Select this mode if an external telephone is connected and it is frequently used to make phone calls. Manual reception can be performed either with the control panel of this machine or with an external telephone. In order to receive faxes manually, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Manual RX]. „ With [Comm. Settings] - [Manual RX V.34 OFF], specify that V.34 is automatically turned off during manual reception. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. With the control panel The procedure for manually receiving a fax from the control panel is described below. 1 When the external telephone rings, press [Off-Hook] in the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Receive]. 3 Press [Start] or press the [Start] key. The machine starts receiving the fax. With an external telephone For details on the procedure using the external telephone, refer to “Remote reception (G3 fax)” on page 4-9.4-4 Receiving G3 faxes DRPD Select this mode when using DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call is automatically received as a fax. In order to use DRPD, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [DRPD]. „ With [Comm. Settings] - [Ring Pattern], select the ring pattern for faxing. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. [Ring Pattern] Refer to the following table and select the ring pattern. S-ON (Short-ON): On for 150 ms to 600 ms L-ON (Long-ON): On for more than 600 ms S-OFF (Short-OFF): Off for 100 ms to 1,200 ms L-OFF (Long-OFF): Off for more than 1,200 ms Settings Ring Pattern [Normal Ring] L-ON + L-OFF [Double] L-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + L-OFF [Triple 1] S-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + S-OFF + S-ON + L-OFF [Triple 2] S-ON + S-OFF + S-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + L-OFFReceiving Internet faxes 4-5 Receiving Internet faxes Settings for receiving Internet faxes (e-mail) must first be specified from the [E-mail RX (POP)] page of PageScope Web Connection. For details of the settings on the [E-mail RX (POP)] page, refer to the [Reference Guide]. This machine connects to the POP server at a fixed interval to check if an Internet fax has arrived. If an Internet fax has been received, the attached file will automatically be printed. " If data is received with a resolution not supported by this machine, a reception error occurs. For the resolution of data that can be received by this machine, refer to “Technical specifications” on page A-2. " The subject and body text of received Internet faxes are not printed. " If the memory reception or PC fax reception function is being used, the data for a received Internet fax is saved in the memory. For details on using data saved in the memory, refer to “Memory reception (G3 fax/ Internet fax)” on page 4-7 or “Receiving a PC fax” on page 5-18. " Settings can be specified for printing a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails. For details on the report, refer to “Printing reports/lists” on page 7-4.4-6 Useful reception functions Useful reception functions The various useful reception functions available with this machine are described below. Polling reception (G3 fax) Polling reception is the function where a document queued for polling transmission by the sender or a document saved on the sender’s bulletin board is sent with a command from the recipient. This is useful when the recipient is to incur the cost of the call. Polling reception can be performed to receive a normal fax or to receive a fax by specifying the sender’s bulletin board. " This function cannot be used together with ECM OFF, V34 OFF, password transmissions, timer transmissions, F-code transmissions or Internet fax transmissions. " Multiple destinations cannot be specified. Performing a polling reception The procedure for using polling reception is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Specify the destination. 3 Press [Settings]. 4 Press [Comm. Settings]. 5 Press [Comm. Method]. 6 Press [Polling RX]. 7 Press [Yes], and then select the reception method. – To perform normal polling reception, press [Polling RX]. – To specify a sender’s bulletin board for polling reception, press [Bulletin], and then use the keypad to type in the sender’s bulletin board number. – If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the entered information. 8 Press [OK]. 9 Press the [Start] key. Polling reception begins.Useful reception functions 4-7 Memory reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) Memory reception is the function for saving received documents in the machine’s memory. Documents saved in the memory can be printed or retrieved. In order to use memory reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] to [ON]. „ With [Memory RX] - [Password], specify the password for allowing documents saved in the memory to be used. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Memory RX]” on page 2-15. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, fax forwarding, E-mail forwarding or night reception. Using received documents The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Others]. 3 Press [Memory RX]. 4 Type in the password, and then press [OK]. The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed, and then press [Print]. – To delete the selected document, press [Delete]. The document is printed. " Received documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Closed network reception (G3 fax) Closed network reception is the function for accepting only transmissions from sender’s machines with a matching password. This function can only be used if the sender’s fax machine is equipped with a password transmission function. If this machine is set for closed network receptions, the sender’s fax machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network reception password specified on this machine. In order to use closed network reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.4-8 Useful reception functions „ Set [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] to [Yes]. „ With [Closed Network RX Password] - [Password], specify the password for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Closed Network RX Password]” on page 2-15. Fax forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) Fax forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the previously specified destination. In order to use fax forwarding, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] to [ON]. „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forwarding Address], specify the fax number of the forwarding destination. „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward & Print], select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Forward TX Settings]” on page 2-15. " An Internet fax destination cannot be specified as the forwarding destination. " If a document with a resolution of 300 × 300 dpi is received as an Internet fax, this machine prints the document without forwarding it. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory reception or night reception. E-mail forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) E-mail forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the previously specified destination. In order to use e-mail forwarding, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] to [ON]. „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forwarding Address], press , and then specify the e-mail address of the forwarding destination.Useful reception functions 4-9 „ With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward & Print], select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Forward TX Settings]” on page 2-15. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory reception or night reception. Remote reception (G3 fax) Remote reception is the function for giving this machine the command to receive a fax by entering a remote reception number from an external telephone. In order to use remote reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Manual RX]. „ Set [Remote RX Settings] - [Remote RX Enabled] to [Yes]. „ With [Remote RX Settings] - [Remote RX No.], specify the remote reception number for giving the command to receive a fax. " For details on the parameters in the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10. " For details on the parameters in the [Remote RX Settings] screen, refer to “[Remote RX Settings]” on page 2-16. Giving the reception command from an external telephone The procedure for using remote reception is described below. 1 When the external telephone rings, pick up the receiver, and then check that a fax is being sent. 2 With the external telephone, type in the remote reception number (2 digits). The machine starts receiving the fax. 3 Replace the telephone receiver. " When using remote reception with pulse dialing, the telephone must be switched to pulse dialing. For details on switching to pulse dialing, refer to the instruction manual for the telephone.4-10 Useful reception functions Night reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) Night reception is the function for prohibiting printing of received documents during the specified night times. Documents received during the time that printing is prohibited are all printed when the machine is finally able to print. In order to use night reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night Fax RX Print] to [ON]. „ With [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night RX Start Time], specify the start time for the night. „ With [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night RX End Time], specify the end time for the night. " For details on the settings, refer to “[Nighttime RX Settings]” on page 2-17. " This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory reception, fax forwarding or E-mail forwarding.Printing received faxes 4-11 Printing received faxes This section describes how received faxes are printed. Determining the paper size The following describes the guidelines for determining the most suitable paper size and the size of paper that will be printed on. " For details on the paper settings for printing received documents, refer to “[Function Settings]” on page 2-12. Step 1: Determining the most suitable paper size Based on the following rules, the most suitable paper size is automatically determined from the width and length of the received document. Width of received document (fixed at A4) Inch Paper Priority Footer Position Length of received document (mm) Paper size that was determined (most suitable paper size) A4-width [OFF] [RX Ft. OFF] or [Inside Body Text] 1,000 or less A4 [Outside Body Text] 1,000 or less A4 [ON] [RX Ft. OFF] or [Inside Body Text] 292 or less Letter 293 - 1000 Legal [Outside Body Text] 284 or less Letter 285 - 1000 Legal4-12 Printing received faxes Step 2: Determining the actual paper size used for printing The machine checks if paper of the most suitable size determined in step 1 is loaded. „ If paper of the most suitable size is loaded, printing begins. „ If paper of the most suitable size is not loaded, or if the Auto Tray Switch function is disabled, the machine checks for paper of the next most suitable size in the order listed in the following table, starting from the top. " If no paper suitable for printing is loaded in a paper drawer, a message appears, instructing that paper be loaded. " For details on the Auto Tray Switch function, refer to the [Printer/ Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. Reducing and splitting The following four reducing and splitting operations are performed when a received document is printed, depending on the selected settings. " For details on the reducing and splitting settings for printing received documents, refer to “[Function Settings]” on page 2-12. When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer „ If the received document is the same size or is shorter than the paper loaded in the drawer, the image is printed reduced by the specified reduction ratio (between 87% and 96%). „ If the received document is longer than the paper loaded in the drawer, the image is automatically reduced (between 75% and 96%) and printed. If the received document still does not fit within the paper, even after being reduced up to 75%, any part of the image that does not fit within the paper will be lost. „ The pages cannot be split. Most suitable paper size A4 Letter Legal Order for selecting paper (from top to bottom) A4 Letter Legal A4 Letter Legal A4Printing received faxes 4-13 When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] „ The pages cannot be split. „ The image is not reduced. „ [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to [Auto]. „ Received documents are printed at full size on paper that fits the length of the received image minus 20 mm. As a result, up to 20 mm of the trailing edge of the image may be cut off. If the length of the received image is more than 20 mm longer than the paper size, the image is printed on the next larger paper size (most suitable paper size). When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF] „ The received document is automatically reduced (between 75% and 96%) and printed. If the received document still does not fit within a single page, even after being reduced up to 75%, any part of the image that does not fit within the paper will be lost. „ The image is reduced in both the main scanning direction and the sub-scanning direction while maintaining the original height-to-width ratio. „ If the orientation of the paper to be printed on is different from the orientation of the paper that was automatically selected, the image will not be automatically rotated 90°. When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON] „ The received document is reduced by the specified reduction ratio (between 87% and 96%). If the document does not fit within a single page, the document is split and the remainder is printed on the next page. „ There is no overlapping section on split pages. " Pages are not split when the following settings have been specified, even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]. ·When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer for printing ·When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] ·When [Paper Priority] is set to [Fixed Size] or [Size Priority] ·When [Duplex Print] is set to [ON]4-14 Adding reception information Adding reception information Reception information can be added to documents received at this machine. This information is printed in the footer of the received document. The following information can be printed as the reception information. „ Reception date/time „ Communication number „ Page number/total number of pages " For details on the settings for specifying whether or not reception information is printed and where to print the reception information, refer to “[Header/Footer Settings]” on page 2-9.Sending/ receiving a PC fax5-2 Sending a PC fax Sending a PC fax Using the fax driver, a G3 fax can be sent from this machine through operations performed on the computer without using any paper. " In order to perform a PC-Fax operation, the fax driver must be installed. For details on installing the driver, refer to the [Installation Guide]. " The fax driver is not compatible with IPP (Internet Printing Protocol). Transmission operation The procedure for sending a PC fax is described below. 1 Using a computer application, create the data to be sent. 2 On the [File] menu, click [Print]. 3 From the [Printer Name] box, select the installed printer (appears with a name such as “xxxxxxx FAX”). 4 If necessary, click [Properties] (or [Preferences]), and then change the fax driver settings. – For details, refer to “Fax driver settings” on page 5-8. 5 Click [Print]. The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears. 6 In the [Name] and [FAX Number] boxes, type the appropriate information. – Up to 80 characters can be entered in the [Name] box. – Up to 38 characters, including numbers between 0 and 9, hyphens (-), #, *, P, and T, can be entered in the [FAX Number] box. To send a fax overseas, enter the country code at the beginning of the fax number. – [ECM]: Select this check box to use ECM (error correction mode). If the [V.34 Mode] check box is selected, this check box cannot be cleared. – [V.34 Mode]: Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmission mode. Select this check box for ordinary operation; clear this check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode of the recipient’s machine. – To specify a fax number registered in the address book of this machine, click [Add from Address Book]. For details, refer to “Selecting a recipient from the address book” on page 5-4. – To specify a fax number registered in the phone book, click [Add From Phone Book]. For details, refer to “Selecting a recipient from the phone book” on page 5-3.Sending a PC fax 5-3 – To add the entered name and fax number to the [Simple Entry] folder of the phone book, click [Register To Phone Book]. 7 Click [Add Recipients]. – To send a fax to multiple recipients, repeat steps 6 and 7. Up to 100 recipients can be registered. – To remove a registered recipient, click [Delete From List]. 8 To change the fax mode settings, click [Fax Mode Setting Details]. To specify a fax cover sheet, select the [FAX Cover Sheet] check box. – For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4 and “Creating a fax cover sheet” on page 5-5. 9 Click [OK]. The fax data is sent via this machine. Selecting a recipient from the phone book By clicking [Add From Phone Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the phone book. " Before using the phone book, register the name and fax number of the recipient. For details, refer to “Using the phone book” on page 5-15. 1 When sending a fax, click [Add From Phone Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box. 2 Select [Personal List] or [Group] from the list on the left side of the phone book to display the desired recipient under [Personal Information]. – To search for recipients by specifying conditions, click [Find]. 3 Select a recipient name under [Personal Information], and then click [Add Recipients]. – To send a fax to multiple recipients, continue adding them in the same way. Up to 100 recipients can be registered. – To delete a recipient added under [Recipient List], select the name of the recipient to be deleted, and then click [Delete]. – If recipients have been registered as a group, select the name of the group, and then click [Add Recipients]. All members of the group are added under [Recipient List] (broadcast transmission). 4 Click [OK]. The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears again with the specified names added under [Recipient List].5-4 Sending a PC fax Selecting a recipient from the address book By clicking [Add from Address Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the address book destinations registered on this machine. " In order to select recipients from the address book of this machine, your computer must be connected to this machine and be able to communicate with it. " Before a recipient can be selected from the address book of this machine, the name and fax number of the recipient must be added to the address book. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1. 1 When sending a fax, click [Add from Address Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box. 2 Select [Address Book List] from the list on the left side of the dialog box to display the desired recipient under [Address Book]. – To start communicating with this machine and read the information from the address book, click [Get Addr. Info]. – To search for recipients by specifying conditions, click [Find]. 3 Select the name of a recipient name under [Address Book], and then click [Add Recipients]. – To send a fax to multiple recipients, continue adding them in the same way. Up to 100 recipients can be registered. – To delete a recipient added under [Recipient List], select the name of the recipient to be deleted, and then click [Delete From List]. 4 Click [OK]. The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears again with the specified names added under [Recipient List]. Specifying transmission conditions By clicking [Fax Mode Setting Details] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the transmission conditions for the PC fax can be specified. Item Description [Print Recipient File] Select this check box to print the original document after a fax is sent. [Timer Send] Specify the transmission time. Click [Reflect Current Time] to add the current time set on the computer to the [Send Time] box.Sending a PC fax 5-5 " When faxing with a timer transmission, make sure that the time set on the computer matches the time set on this machine. If the specified transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine, the fax will be sent on the following day. Creating a fax cover sheet By selecting the [FAX Cover Sheet] check box in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the PC fax can be sent with a cover sheet attached. In addition, click [Settings] to display the [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box in order to change the settings for cover sheets. In the [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box, change the desired settings by switching between the [Basic], [Recipient], [Sender] and [Image] tabs. [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box [SUB Address] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the SUB address. (up to 20 digits) [Sender ID] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the sender ID. (up to 20 digits, including numbers, # and *) Item Description [Cover Sheet Settings] Select a set of cover sheet settings. To change the settings for the selected cover sheet, click [Edit]. To save the selected cover sheet settings so they can be recalled later, click [Add] after specifying the new settings. [Check] Click to display an enlarged image of the layout. [Cover Size] Specify the size of the cover sheet. [Basic] tab Specify settings such as the style and usage conditions. [Recipient] tab Specify recipient information. [Sender] tab Specify sender information. [Image] tab Specify the file for the image added to the cover sheet. Item Description5-6 Sending a PC fax [Basic] tab [Recipient] tab Item Description [Style] Select the desired cover sheet design. [Subject] Enter the subject of the fax to be sent. (up to 64 characters) [Date] Specify the date. Select a specific format, or enter the date as desired. (up to 20 characters) [Pages] Specify the number of pages to be sent. [Comment] Enter the text that will appear in the comment box. (up to 640 characters) A line break is counted as two characters. Item Description [Standard] Select this to use the preset text. [Details] Select this to specify details under [Recipient Setting Details] at the bottom of the dialog box. [Load with Joint Name] Select this to add the individual recipients in a group destination. The contents of [Recipient List] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box are added. [Change Each Recipient] Select this to change the information for the recipients. The information for the contents of [Recipient List] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box are changed. [Load Set Information] Select this to add the information entered in the [Company], [Department], [Name] and [FAX Number] boxes. (up to 80 characters) Click [Read] to import the information for the first recipient into the boxes.Sending a PC fax 5-7 [Sender] tab [Image] tab Item Description [Sender Information Settings] Enter the appropriate sender information in the [Company], [Department], [Name], [Phone], [FAX Number] and [E-mail] boxes. Select the check boxes for the items to be added, and then type in the text. (up to 80 characters) Item Description [Paste Image] To add an image to the cover sheet, select the [Paste Image] check box, and then specify the image file. Only files in the BMP format can be selected. [Zoom] Specify the zoom ratio for the added image. [Position] In the [X:] and [Y:] boxes, specify the position of the added image.5-8 Fax driver settings Fax driver settings This section describes the settings and buttons common to tabs of the [Printing Preferences] or [Properties] dialog box of the fax driver. " For details on installing the driver, refer to the [Installation Guide]. [Printing Preferences] dialog box Settings for machine-specific functions can be specified. To display the [Printing Preferences] dialog box, click [Properties] (or [Preferences]) in the [Print] dialog box, or right-click the printer icon in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, then click [Printing Preferences]. [Properties] dialog box Settings concerning the installed options and the default settings for displaying confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes can be changed. To display the [Properties] dialog box, right-click the printer icon in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, and then click [Properties]. Item Description [FAX] tab Specify the transmission conditions for PC faxes. For details, refer to “[FAX] tab” on page 5-10. [Basic] tab Specify settings for the paper and original document to be sent. If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine, specify the user or account information. For details, refer to “[Basic] tab” on page 5-11. [Layout] tab Specify settings for the page layout. For details, refer to “[Layout] tab” on page 5-12. [Version Information] tab View the driver version information. Item Description [Configure] tab Specify settings concerning the installed options. For details, refer to “[Configure] tab” on page 5-13. [Settings] tab Change the default settings for displaying confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes. For details, refer to “[Settings] tab” on page 5-13.Fax driver settings 5-9 Common Settings The buttons described below appear on all tabs. Item Description [OK] Click this button to apply changes to the settings and close the dialog box. [Cancel] Click this button to cancel changes to the settings and close the dialog box. [Help] Click this button to display the Help for the items in the displayed dialog box. [Add] (Favorite Setting) Click this button to save the current settings so they can be recalled later. For details, refer to “Saving fax driver settings” on page 5-14. [Edit] (Favorite Setting) Click this button to change the saved settings. For details, refer to “Saving fax driver settings” on page 5-14. [Default] Click this button to return the settings to those specified when the driver was installed. View Displays a sample page layout based on the current settings so the transmission result image can be checked. Icons for the specified functions appear at the bottom. [Printer Information] Click this button to start Web Connection and check the printer information. This button is available only when your computer can communicate with this machine.5-10 Fax driver settings [FAX] tab The settings available on the [FAX] tab are described below. Item Description [Resolution] Select a resolution for the fax. Selecting a higher resolution may increase the communication time. [Print Recipient File] Select this check box to print the original document after a fax is sent. This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [Timer Send] Specify the transmission time. Click [Reflect Current Time] to add the current time set on the computer to the [Send Time] box. This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [SUB Address] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the SUB address. (up to 20 digits) This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [Sender ID] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the sender ID. (up to 20 digits, including numbers, # and *) This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4. [Cover Sheet] Select this check box to specify cover sheet settings. This can also be specified when sending a fax. For details, refer to “Creating a fax cover sheet” on page 5-5. [Phone Book Entry] Click this button to edit the phone book. For details, refer to “Using the phone book” on page 5-15.Fax driver settings 5-11 " When faxing with a timer transmission, make sure that the time set on the computer matches the time set on this machine. If the specified transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine, the fax will be sent on the following day. [Basic] tab The settings available on the [Basic] tab are described below. " To fax an original document of a custom size, select [Custom Size] from the [Original Size] list. In the [Custom Size Settings] dialog box, specify the length and width of the original document. " If user authentication is not enabled in the [Configure] tab, user authentication will not be performed. If user authentication is being used, be sure to enable it in the [Device Option] list. For details, refer to “[Configure] tab” on page 5-13. Item Description [Original Orientation] Select the orientation of the original document to be sent. [Original Size] Select the paper size of the original document to be sent. [Paper Size] Select the size of the paper to be sent. If it is different from the original document size, the output image will be automatically enlarged or reduced. [Zoom] Select an enlargement or reduction ratio. [Authentication/Account Track] Click this button to specify the user name and password when [User Authentication] has been enabled on this machine, or the account name and password when [Account Track] has been enabled on this machine.5-12 Fax driver settings [Authentication/Account Track] dialog box " If a fax is sent using a user name and password or account name and password that are not registered on the machine, or if a fax is sent without the [User Authentication] or [Account Track] settings specified in the driver, the fax is deleted without being authenticated by the machine. " Even if the user or account has been registered on the machine, the PC fax may not be sent if use of the fax function is not permitted. [Layout] tab The settings available on the [Layout] tab are described below. " Sending documents containing pages of different sizes or orientations in one job may cause some images to be partially lost or to overlap. Item Description [User Authentication] If user authentication settings have been specified on this machine, select [Recipient User], and then specify in the [User Name] and [Password] boxes the settings specified on the machine. (up to 64 characters) If public user access is allowed on this machine, the printer can be used when [Public User] is selected. Server settings must be specified if user authentication is performed with a server. Click [Server Setting], and then select a server. [Account Track] If account track settings have been specified on this machine, specify in the [Department Name] and [Password] boxes the settings specified on the machine. (up to 8 characters) Item Description [Combination] Select this check box to combine the pages of a multi-page document into a single sheet, or divide a single document page into multiple sheets when faxing. Click [Combination Details] to specify various details.Fax driver settings 5-13 [Configure] tab The settings available on the [Configure] tab are described below. " Click [Acquire Device Information] to communicate with this machine and read the machine status. This feature is not available if the computer cannot establish a connection and communicate with this machine. [Settings] tab The settings available on the [Settings] tab are described below. Item Description [Device Option] Specify the status of the options installed on this machine and user authentication/account track settings. Select the status of each item in the [Setting] box. [Acquire Device Information] Click this button to communicate with this machine and read the status of the installed options. [Acquire Settings] Click this button to specify the conditions, such as the destination, that are acquired from the device information. Item Description [Display Constraint Message] Select this check box to display a message when functions that cannot be used together have been enabled from the driver. [Verify Authentication settings before printing] Select this check box to verify authentication settings for this machine before printing, and display a message if they do not match. [Popup Authentication Dialog when printing] Select this check box to display the [User Authentication/Account Track] dialog box when printing so that the user name and account name can be entered. [Reconfirm FAX number entered directly] Select this check box to display a dialog box for entering the fax number again for confirmation when [Add Recipients] is clicked after information has been entered in the [FAX Number] box of the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box.5-14 Fax driver settings Saving fax driver settings The settings specified in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box of the fax driver can be saved as favorite settings. Saved settings can be recalled at any time by selecting them from the [Favorite Setting] list in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box. Saving the settings After changing the fax driver settings, click [Add] in the [Favorite Setting] box. Then, specify settings for the following. " Up to 30 shared driver settings and up to 20 private driver settings can be saved. Editing settings To edit saved favorite settings, click [Edit] in the [Favorite Setting] box. Select the name of the favorite settings to be edited, and then edit the settings. " To select the items to be recalled when favorite settings are selected, click [Option]. Selected settings are applied to the current settings when the favorite settings are recalled. " The settings for fax driver functions cannot be changed. " To save the favorite settings as a file, click [Export]. To import exported favorite settings into the fax driver, click [Import]. This is useful when using the same settings on a different computer. Item Description [Name] Enter a name for the settings. (up to 30 characters) [Icon] Select an icon. Settings can be saved without an icon selected. [Sharing] Select this check box to share the setting file with other users, or clear this check box to register it for private use. Only the administrator can select the [Sharing] check box. [Comment] Enter a detailed description of the setting file, if necessary. (up to 255 characters)Using the phone book 5-15 Using the phone book Adding frequently used recipients to a phone book allows you to recall them when sending faxes. Use the [FAX] tab of the fax driver to add recipients to a phone book. Adding recipients to a phone book The procedure for adding recipients to the phone book is described below. 1 In the [FAX] tab of the fax driver, click [Phone Book Entry]. The [Phone Book Entry] dialog box appears. 2 Select [Personal List] from the list on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Add New]. The [Personal Information\\Personal List] dialog box appears. 3 In the [Name], [FAX Number], [Company] and [Department] boxes, type the appropriate information. – When the entered name is printed on the fax cover sheet, a title will not be included. To provide the name with a title on the fax cover sheet, enter the name with a title in the [Name] box. – Up to 80 characters can be entered in the [Name], [Company] and [Department] boxes. – Up to 38 characters, including numbers between 0 and 9, hyphens (-), spaces, #, *, P, and T, can be entered in the [FAX Number] box. To send a fax overseas, enter the country code at the beginning of the fax number. – [ECM]: Select this check box to use ECM (error correction mode). If the [V.34 Mode] check box is selected, this check box cannot be cleared. – [V.34 Mode]: Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmission mode. Select this check box for ordinary operation; clear this check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode of the recipient’s machine. 4 To add the recipient to groups, select the check boxes for the groups. – When a recipient is added to a group, a fax can be sent to the recipient by selecting the group as the destination (broadcast transmission). If faxes will frequently be sent to certain destinations, it is useful to add them to a group. – The recipient can be added to multiple groups.5-16 Using the phone book 5 Click [OK]. The personal information is registered and displayed under [Personal List]. If groups have been selected for the recipient, the recipient will appear in the list for those groups. 6 Click [OK]. If recipients have already been added to the phone book, editing of the phone book is finished. If this is the first time that a recipient is being added to the phone book, a dialog box appears, requesting confirmation to save the phone book. 7 Click [Yes]. The [Save As] dialog box appears. 8 Browse to the folder where the file is to be saved, type in the file name, and then click [Save]. The phone book is saved as a new file. " The [Save As] dialog box appears only the first time that a recipient is being added to the phone book. When the phone book is subsequently edited, the [Save As] dialog box does not appear, and the existing file is automatically overwritten. " The saved phone book file automatically appears the next time that the phone book is opened. To open a different phone book file, click the [File] menu in the [Phone Book Entry] dialog box, and then click [Open]. If multiple phone book files have been saved, you can switch between these files to locate the desired one. " To create a new phone book file, click the [File] menu in the [Phone Book Entry] dialog box, and then click [New]. On the [File] menu, click [Save As] to save the file with a different name. " The phone book file is saved with the .csv extension. Editing a phone book Editing or organizing a phone book, for example, by changing the registered personal information or group name, enhances its usability. Changing personal information Select the name of the recipient to be edited under [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Edit]. The [Personal Information] dialog box appears, which is the same as that for adding a recipient, so that the information can be changed.Using the phone book 5-17 To delete a recipient, select the name of the recipient under [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Delete]. At the same time, that recipient is deleted from all groups it belongs to. " Names and fax numbers that have been added using [Register To Phone Book] when sending faxes appear in the [Simple Entry] folder of the phone book. Changing group membership Select the name of the recipient to be edited under [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then select or clear the check boxes in the group list on the right. Up to 100 recipients can be added to a single group. Changing a group name Select the group name to be changed under [Group] on the left side of the phone book, click the [Edit] menu, and then click [Rename Group]. Creating a folder Select [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Add Folder] to create a folder. A folder can also be created by clicking [Add Folder] in the [Edit] menu. A recipient can be moved from the [Personal List] to the new folder by dragging the name to the folder. To edit a folder, select the folder to be changed, and then click [Edit]. To delete a folder, select the folder to be deleted, and then click [Delete]. Searching for personal information Clicking [Find] on the right side of the phone book displays the [Find] dialog box, where various search conditions can be specified.5-18 Receiving a PC fax Receiving a PC fax When this machine receives a PC fax, the received document is saved in the machine’s memory in the TIFF format. Documents saved in the memory can be printed or retrieved. In order to use PC fax reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified. „ Set [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] to [ON]. „ With [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Print], select whether or not a PC fax is printed automatically after it is received. " For details, refer to “[PC-Fax RX Settings]” on page 2-16. " This function cannot be used together with fax forwarding, E-mail forwarding, memory reception or night reception. " If faxes are saved with the memory reception function, a PC fax is not automatically printed after it is received. Using received documents The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described below. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Others]. 3 Press [Memory RX]. 4 Type in the password, and then press [OK]. The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed, and then press [Print]. – To delete the selected document, press [Delete]. The document is printed. " With [Memory RX], specify the password that allows documents saved in the memory to be used. For details, refer to “[Memory RX]” on page 2-15. " Received PC fax documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].Uninstalling the fax driver 5-19 Uninstalling the fax driver If the fax driver must be removed, for example, when reinstallation of the driver is necessary, remove the driver using the following procedure. 1 Click [Start], and then click [All Programs] (or [Programs]) - [KONICA MINOLTA] - [xxxxx (model name)] - [Uninstall Printer Driver]. 2 Select the components to be removed, and then click [Uninstall]. Continue by following the instructions that appear. 3 If a dialog box appears, instructing you to restart the computer, click [OK].5-20 Uninstalling the fax driverRegistering destinations6-2 Destination registration Destination registration By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent, recipients can be recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent. With this machine, address book destinations (Address Book), group destinations (Group) and program destinations (Program) can be registered. Address Book The information for destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered. A destination can selected from the address book when a fax is being sent. A maximum of 2,000 address book destinations can be registered. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 6-3. Group Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group. This is useful when sending the same fax to multiple destinations in a broadcast transmission. A maximum of 100 group destinations (with a maximum of 500 address book destinations per group) can be registered. Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Program Destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens). A registered program destination can be recalled by pressing the [Mode Memory] key in the control panel. A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered. For details on registering, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 6-6.Registering an address book destination 6-3 Registering an address book destination The procedure for registering an address book destination is described below. G3 fax Address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the control panel and the user mode of PageScope Web Connection. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. 3 Press [Fax]. 4 Press [New]. – To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Details]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the Details screen. 5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK].6-4 Registering an address book destination Settings Item Description [Name] Type in the registration name for the address book destination. [Fax number] Type in the fax number of the recipient. „ [Tone]: Press to send push-button tones when pulse dialing is being used. [T] appears in the screen. „ [Pause]: Press to insert a pause when dialing. [P] appears in the screen. „ [-]: Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing. „ If the machine is being used with a PBX, press [Outside] when registering an outside destination. [E] appears in the screen. At the point indicated by [E], the outside line access number specified on this machine is automatically dialed. For details, refer to “[PBX Connection Settings]” on page 2-17. „ If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (Register)] is set to [ON], the fax number must be entered again after [OK] is pressed. [Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON]. This allows the destination to be found more easily, which is useful when destinations are being selected. [Index] Select the search characters that will be used to search for the destination.Registering an address book destination 6-5 Internet fax Internet fax destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the user mode of PageScope Web Connection. [Line Settings] Configure the line used to send faxes. [ECM OFF] The error correction mode (ECM) is turned off to shorten the transmission time. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirming that the data sent is free of errors. [V34 OFF] V.34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through a PBX, it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode due to the condition of the telephone line. In this case, it is recommended that V.34 be turned off before sending data. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on the V.34 mode. [Check Dest. & Send] The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and the data is sent only if those fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail, resulting in a transmission error. To verify the destination and send the fax, the recipient’s fax number must be specified on their fax machine. Item Description6-6 Registering a program destination Registering a program destination The procedure for registering a program destination for fax transmission is described below. Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. 1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen. 2 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens. – For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 3-11. – For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13, “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14 and “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17. – For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Press [Register]. 5 At [Name], enter the name. 6 At [Dest.], specify the destination. – Press , select the address book or group destinations, and then press [OK]. 7 Press [OK].Communication management7-2 Checking a job Checking a job From the Job screen, the status of transmission/reception jobs and results of jobs can be viewed. In the home screen, press [Job] to display the Job screen. " For details on the Job screen, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. Checking jobs being performed A list of jobs currently being performed appears when the initial Job screen is displayed. If the job log is displayed, press [Active] to display the list of jobs currently being performed. Transmission jobs Press [Send] to view the list of jobs queued for redialing and queued for transmission. To delete a job, select the job from the list, and then press [Delete]. Reception jobs Press [Receive] to view the list of jobs being received and queued for reception. To delete a job, select the job from the list, and then press [Delete].Checking a job 7-3 Checking the job log Press [Log] in the Job screen to display the job log. " If [Admin Settings] – [Security Settings] – [Security Details] – [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], the job log cannot be displayed. Transmission jobs Press [Send] to view the log for transmission jobs. To view job details, select the job from the list, and then press [Details]. " To view an address, select the job from the job log, and then press [Details]. If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Hide Personal Data] is set to [ON], the address is displayed as “****”. Reception jobs Press [Receive] to view the log for reception jobs. To view job details, select the job from the list, and then press [Details].7-4 Printing reports/lists Printing reports/lists This section describes the fax-related reports and lists that can be printed by this machine. Types of reports The following types of fax-related reports can be printed by this machine. Report name Description Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions. Results can be viewed of the last 100 transmissions/receptions. Transmission results and reception results are printed separately. If necessary, the conditions for printing can be specified. TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission results. A reduced image of the sent document is printed on the first page. This report is automatically printed when a fax is sent. If necessary, the conditions for printing can be specified. Reservation TX Report (G3 fax only) This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions. This report is automatically printed when a timer transmission is queued. If necessary, the machine can be set so that this report is not printed. Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions. If necessary, the conditions for printing can be specified. Broadcast Reservation Report (G3 fax only) This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions. This report is automatically printed when a broadcast timer transmission is queued. If necessary, the machine can be set so that this report is not printed. PC-Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred, preventing a PC fax transmission from being completed correctly.Printing reports/lists 7-5 Types of lists The following types of fax-related lists can be printed by this machine. I-Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed. List name Description Address Book List This list contains the information registered for address book destinations. Group List This list contains the information registered for group destinations. Program List This list contains the information registered for program destinations. Fax Setup Information List This list contains the fax-related settings that have been specified. Report name Description7-6 Printing reports/lists Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions. Results can be viewed of the last 100 transmissions/receptions. Transmission results and reception results are printed separately. The Activity Report is printed automatically. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Activity Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [No.] Shows the communication number. [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the destination. [Start Time] Shows the time that communication began. [Time] Shows the length of time required for communication. [Prints] Shows the number of pages sent/received. [Result] Shows the communication results. For details, check the margin of the report. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the communication. For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-7 TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission results. If necessary, a reduced image of the first page of the sent document can be printed in the report. The TX Result Report is printed automatically when transmission is completed. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Result Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Result Report Image], whether or not to print a reduced image of the sent document in the TX Result Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Confirm TX Result Report], whether or not to print the transmission results report before transmission can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the destination. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission began. [Time] Shows the length of time required for transmission. [Prints] Shows the number of pages sent. [Result] Shows the results of the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.7-8 Printing reports/lists Reservation TX Report This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions. The Reservation TX Report is printed automatically when a timer transmission is queued. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Reserve], whether or not to print the Reservation TX Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the destination. [Create Time] Shows the time that the transmission was queued. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin. [Prints] Shows the number of pages that were scanned. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-9 Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions. The Broadcast Result Report is printed automatically when a broadcast transmission is completed. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Broadcast Report], whether or not to print the Broadcast Result Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Broadcast Result Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of all destinations for the broadcast transmission. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission began. [Time] Shows the length of time required for transmission. [Prints] Shows the number of pages sent. [Result] Shows the results of the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.7-10 Printing reports/lists Broadcast Reservation Report This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions. The Broadcast Reservation Report is printed automatically when a broadcast timer transmission is queued. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Reserve], whether or not to print the Broadcast Reservation Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or address of all destinations for the broadcast transmission. [Create Time] Shows the time that the transmission was queued. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin. [Prints] Shows the number of pages that were scanned. [Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission. For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-11 PC-Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred, preventing a PC fax transmission from being completed correctly. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [PC-Fax TX Error Report], whether or not to print the PC fax transmission error report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed I-Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed. " With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [I-Fax RX Error Report], whether or not to print the I-Fax RX error report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18. Items that are printed Item Description [Destination] Shows the registration name or fax number of all destinations for the broadcast transmission. [Create Time] Shows the time that a PC fax was sent from the computer. [Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin. [Cause] Shows the cause of the error. For details, check the margin of the report. [Name] Shows the user name. Item Description [From] Shows the e-mail address of the sender. [Receiving time] Shows the time that reception began. [Cause] Shows the cause of the reception error. [Subject] Shows the subject text.7-12 Printing reports/lists Address Book List/Group List/Program List These lists contain the information registered for the various destinations. The procedure for printing a destinations list is described below. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Admin Settings]. 3 Type in the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Address Registration]. 5 Press [Address Book]. 6 Select the list to be printed. – To print [Address Book] list, continue with step 7. – To print the [Group] list, continue with step 8. – To print the [Program] list, continue with step 7. 7 Select the type of destinations to be printed on. 8 If necessary, specify settings for [Start Number] and [Number of Addresses] to limit the number of destinations to be printed. – With [Start Number], specify the registration number for the first destination to be printed. – With [Number of Addresses], specify the number of destinations to be printed. The specified number of destinations starting from the registration number specified with [Start Number] will be printed. 9 Press [List Output]. 10 Press [Print], and then press [OK]. The destination list is printed. Fax Setup Information list This list contains the fax-related settings that have been specified. For details on printing the settings list, refer to “[List Print]” on page 2-19.Troubleshooting8-2 Problems when sending faxes Problems when sending faxes " For details on the error messages, refer to “Error messages” on page 8-9. For details on troubleshooting procedures for document misfeeds, paper misfeeds, poor print quality, or empty toner, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. If the fax cannot be sent correctly, refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If the fax still cannot be sent correctly, even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative. G3 fax Symptom Cause Solution The document is not scanned. The document is too thick, too thin or too small. Use the original glass to send the fax. The document is scanned at an angle. The document guides are not adjusted to the width of the document. Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document. The fax received by the recipient is blurry. The document is incorrectly positioned. Position the document correctly. The original glass is dirty. Clean the original glass. The text in the document is written too faint. Adjust the density. There may be a problem with the telephone connection. Check the telephone line, and then try sending the fax again. There may be a problem with the recipient’s fax machine. Make a copy to check that this machine is operating correctly, and then, if the copy was printed correctly, have the recipient check the condition of their fax machine. The fax received by the recipient is blank. The document was sent with the front side facing down (when the ADF is used). Load the document to be faxed facing up.Problems when sending faxes 8-3 Transmission is not possible. The transmission procedure may have been performed incorrectly. Check the transmission procedure, and then try sending the fax again. The fax number may be wrong. Check the fax number. The address book destination, group destination or program destination may have been registered incorrectly. Check that the destinations were correctly registered. The telephone line may be incorrectly connected. Check the telephone line connection. If it is disconnected, connect it. There may be a problem with the recipient’s fax machine (such as, no paper or turned off). Contact the recipient. An incorrect telephone line setting may have been selected. Check that the dialing method setting selected from the [Comm. Settings] screen matches the telephone line being used. An incorrect password may have been specified when the transmission was sent with [Password TX] set to [Yes]. Check the password at the receiving end, and then try sending the fax again with the correct password. An incorrect password may have been specified when the transmission was sent with [F-Code TX] set to [Yes]. Check the password at the receiving end, and then try sending the fax again with the correct password. The recipient’s fax number may have been incorrectly specified on their fax machine when the transmission was sent with [TX Confirm CSI] set to [Yes]. Have the recipient check that their fax number is correctly specified on their machine. Symptom Cause Solution8-4 Problems when sending faxes Internet fax PC fax Symptom Cause Solution Transmission is not possible. The network settings are not specified correctly. Check that the settings in “Initial settings” on page 1-13 have been correctly specified. The e-mail address for the destination is incorrect. Check that the registered destination information is correct. The cables are not connected correctly. Check that the cables are correctly connected. Symptom Cause Solution The message “Printer is not connected” or “Print Error” appears on the computer screen. The fax driver specified when sending may not be supported by the printer controller. Check the specified printer name. The network or USB cable may be disconnected. Check that the cable is correctly connected. An error may have occurred on this machine. Check the control panel of this machine. Memory may be insufficient. Check whether a test page can be sent.Problems when sending faxes 8-5 Print processing on the computer finished, but transmission does not start. The fax driver specified when sending may not be supported by the printer controller. Check the specified printer name. The network or USB cable may be disconnected. Check that the cable is correctly connected. An error may have occurred on this machine. Check the control panel of this machine. Unprocessed jobs may remain queued on this machine. From the control panel of this machine, check the Job screen for the processing order for the job. Account track settings have been specified, but an unregistered account name or password has been entered. Enter the correct account name and password. User authentication settings have been specified, but an unregistered user name or password has been entered. Enter the correct user name and password. The computer may have insufficient memory. Check whether a test page can be sent. A network connection with the printer controller is not established (when connecting via the network). Contact your administrator. This machine may be in enhanced security mode. Contact your administrator. Symptom Cause Solution8-6 Problems when receiving faxes Problems when receiving faxes If the fax cannot be received correctly, refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If the fax still cannot be received correctly, even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative. G3 fax Symptom Cause Solution The received fax is blank. There may be a problem with the telephone connection or with the caller’s fax machine. Check that the machine can make clean copies. If it can, have the caller send the fax again. The caller may have loaded the pages backward. Contact the caller. Reception is not possible. The machine is set to receive faxes manually. Set the machine to automatic reception. Otherwise, perform the manual reception operation. Memory is full. Load paper if it is empty, and then print the faxes stored in memory. The telephone line is incorrectly connected. Check the telephone line connection. If it is disconnected, connect it. There may be a problem with the caller’s fax machine. Make a copy to check that this machine is operating correctly, and then, if the copy was printed correctly, have the recipient check the condition of their fax machine. [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] may have been set to [Yes]. If [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] is set to [Yes], faxes can only be received from specific senders. For details, contact the administrator.Problems when receiving faxes 8-7 Internet fax Reception is not possible. The fax may have been sent with an incorrect Sub address for the specified F-code. If an incorrect Sub address is received, a communication error occurs and the fax cannot be received. Have the sender check the Sub address on their fax machine. Printing is not possible. [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine’s memory. [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine’s memory. [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night Fax RX Print] may have been set to [ON]. Printing is performed when the specified night time has ended. Symptom Cause Solution Reception is not possible. The cables are not connected correctly. Check that the cables are correctly connected. Memory is full. Load paper if it is empty, and then print the faxes stored in memory. Printing is not possible. [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine's memory. [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] may have been set to [ON]. Print the fax from the machine's memory. Symptom Cause Solution8-8 Other problems Other problems Symptom Cause Solution The number of document pages indicated in the transmission results report is different from the number of pages in a batch transmission. Memory is full. During batch transmissions, the number of document pages indicated in the transmission results report may be different from the number of pages in the transmission if the memory is full.Error messages 8-9 Error messages If a machine malfunction occurs, the error screen appears with one of the following error messages. Refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If fax transmissions/receptions still cannot be performed correctly, even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative. Error message Cause Solution [Off-Hook] The machine has been left off-hook after a manual transmission. Put the machine back on-hook. [Memory Full (Fax)] The memory is full. If a fax is being sent, send the scanned document pages. Otherwise, send the fax manually. If a fax is being received, print the received documents saved in the memory. [Fax TX Failed] An error occurred while a G3 fax is being sent. This error is automatically cleared. [Fax RX Failed] An error occurred while a G3 fax is being received. This error is automatically cleared. [PC-Fax TX Error] An error occurred while receiving PC-Fax TX data. This error is automatically cleared. [Polling RX Error] Multiple destinations were specified for polling reception. Multiple destinations cannot be specified for polling reception. Try performing the operation again with only one destination specified. [PC-Fax Restricted] A PC fax transmission was requested although PC fax transmissions are prohibited. For details on specifying PC fax transmission settings, refer to “[Fax Function Settings]” on page 2-13. [I-Fax TX failed] An error occurred while an Internet fax is being sent. This error is automatically cleared.8-10 Error messages [I-Fax RX failed] An error occurred while an Internet fax is being received. This error is automatically cleared. Error message Cause SolutionAppendix AA-2 Technical specifications Technical specifications G3 fax Internet fax Item Specifications Compatible lines PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) PBX (Private Branch eXchange) Compatibility ECM/Super G3 Modem speed 2.4 kbps - 33.6 kbps Fax transmission speed 3 sec/page (at A4, 33.6 kbps, JBIG, V.34) Coding method MH, MR, MMR or JBIG Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX/RX Maximum scanning size ADF: 216 mm × 1000 mm Original glass: Legal Maximum recording size Legal (Pages with a maximum length of 1,000 mm can be received or printed, depending on the selected page splitting setting.) Edge erase 4.0 mm (top, bottom, left and right) Resolution Standard: 200 × 100 dpi (8 × 3.85 dot/mm) Fine: 200 × 200 dpi (8 × 7.7 dot/mm) Super Fine: 400 × 400 dpi (16 × 15.4 dot/mm) Super Fine (Reception only): 200 × 400 dpi (8 × 15.4 dot/mm) Item Description Protocol Internet fax (Simple mode), TCP/IP, SMTP, POP3 Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX/RX File type Monochrome (TIFF) Coding method (Transmission) TIFF-S (MH) Coding method (Reception) TIFF-S (MH), TIFF-F (MH/MR/MMR)Technical specifications A-3 PC fax (Fax driver) " For details on other specifications, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide]. Resolution (Transmission) Standard: 200 × 100 dpi Fine: 200 × 200 dpi Resolution (Reception) 200 × 100 dpi, 204 × 98 dpi (80 × 38.5 dot/cm) 200 × 200 dpi, 204 × 196 dpi (80 × 77 dot/cm) 300 × 300 dpi 200 × 400 dpi, 204 × 391 dpi (80 × 154 dot/cm) 400 × 400 dpi, 408 × 391 dpi (160 × 154 dot/cm) Item Description Operating system Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Windows Server 2003 (32-bit/64-bit) Windows XP (32-bit/64-bit) Windows Vista (32-bit/64-bit) Windows Server 2008 (32-bit/64-bit) Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 (32-bit/64-bit) CPU Pentium 3: 400 MHz or higher (Windows Vista: 1 GHz or higher) Memory 512 MB or more Item DescriptionA-4 Text input Text input The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below. Entering text In the keyboard screen, press the character that you want to enter. „ To enter uppercase letters, press [ ]. „ To enter symbols, press [ ]. „ To enter special characters, such as accented characters, press [ ]. „ To delete the character to the right of the cursor, press [Delete]. „ To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ]. " Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel. " To clear all entered text, press the [C] key.Index Index A-5 A Account track ....................1-11, 1-12 Address Book ...............................6-2 Address Registration ...................6-3 ADF ................................................3-4 C Canceling ....................................3-23 Closed network reception ............4-7 Comm. Method ............................3-14 F-Code TX ................................3-15 Password TX ............................3-15 Timer TX ...................................3-14 Comm. Settings .................3-13, 3-14 Control Panel ................................1-3 D DRPD .............................................4-4 Ring Pattern ................................4-4 E E-mail forwarding ........................ 4-8 E-mail Settings ........................... 3-17 F Fax driver ...................................... 5-8 Authentication/ Account Track .......................... 5-12 Basic ........................................ 5-11 Configure .................................. 5-13 Favorite Setting ........................ 5-14 FAX .......................................... 5-10 Layout ...................................... 5-12 Printing Preferences ................... 5-8 Properties ................................... 5-8 Settings .................................... 5-13 Uninstall ................................... 5-19 Fax forwarding ............................. 4-8 Fax screen .................................... 1-8A-6 Index Fax Settings (Admin Settings) ....2-4 Closed Network RX Password ............................2-15 Comm. Settngs .........................2-10 Fax Factory Default ..................2-20 Fax Function Settings ...............2-13 Fax Image Initialized .................2-20 Fax Report ................................2-18 Fax Target ................................2-20 Forward TX Settings .................2-15 Function Settings ......................2-12 Header/Footer Settings ...............2-9 List Print ....................................2-19 Memory RX ...............................2-15 Nighttime RX Settings ...............2-17 PBX Connection Settings .........2-17 PC-Fax RX Settings ..................2-16 Remote RX Settings .................2-16 Sender Settings ..........................2-8 Fax Settings (User Settings) ........2-2 Footer ..........................................4-14 G Group .............................................6-2 Group Address List ....................7-12 H Header .........................................3-24 Home screen .................................1-6 I Icon ................................................1-9 J Job .................................................7-2 Active ..........................................7-2 Log ..............................................7-3 L Line Settings ...............................3-13 ECM OFF ..................................3-13 TX Confirm CSI .........................3-13 V34 OFF ...................................3-13 Lists .............................................. 7-5 Address Book List .................... 7-12 Fax Setup Information List ....... 7-12 M Machine Parts .............................. 1-2 Memory reception ........................ 4-7 Mode Memory ............................. 3-21 N Night reception .......................... 4-10 O Off-Hook ..................................... 3-22 Original glass ............................... 3-5 Original Settings ........................ 3-18 Binding Position ....................... 3-19 Long Original ............................ 3-18 Original Size ............................. 3-18 Simplex/Duplex ........................ 3-18 P Parts .............................................. 1-2 PC-Fax ................................. 5-2, 5-18 Address book ............................. 5-4 FAX Cover Sheet ....................... 5-5 Phone book ................................ 5-3 Transmission operation .............. 5-2 Phone book ................................ 5-15 Polling reception .......................... 4-6 Printing received faxes ............. 4-11 Program ........................................ 6-2 Program Address ......................... 6-6 Program Address List ............... 7-12 R Receiving G3 faxes ...................... 4-2 Automatic reception ................... 4-2 DRPD ......................................... 4-4 Manual reception ........................ 4-3 Receiving Internet faxes ............. 4-5 Redial .......................................... 3-23 Remote reception ........................ 4-9Index A-7 Reports ..........................................7-4 Activity Report .............................7-6 Broadcast Reservation Report .......................................7-10 Broadcast Result Report .............7-9 I-Fax RX Error Report ...............7-11 PC-Fax TX Error Report ...........7-11 Reservation TX Report ...............7-8 TX Result Report ........................7-7 S Scan Settings ..............................3-11 Background Removal ...............3-12 Density ......................................3-12 Original Type ............................3-11 Resolution .................................3-11 Separate Scan ..........................3-11 Sharpness .................................3-12 Sending faxes ...............................3-1 General operation .......................3-2 Specifications .............................. A-2 Specifying destinations ...............3-7 Direct Input .................................3-8 Favorites .....................................3-7 LDAP ........................................3-10 Log ..............................................3-9 Search ........................................3-8 T Text input ..................................... A-4 Touch panel ..................................1-6 Troubleshooting ...........................8-1 Error messages ..........................8-9 U User authentication ....................1-11 Device authentication ...............1-11 External server authentication ...........................1-11A-8 IndexCopyright A121-9562-13A 2009 2011. 1 http://konicaminolta.com User’s Guide [Box Operations]Introduction C550 x-1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This User’s Guide contains details on the operations required to use the User Box functions of the bizhub C550, precautions on their use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this User’s Guide before using the machine. If software (such as PageScope Job Spooler, HDDTWAIN or PageScope Box Operator) other than that described in this User’s Guide has been installed, data saved in a user box can be used from a computer on the network. Since the operation differs for each software, refer to the manual for the corresponding software for details. In addition, for details on the operation of PageScope Web Connection, which can be used to operate this machine over a network, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]. Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations used in this manual.Introduction C550 x-2 Trademarks and registered trademarks KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape is a registered trade mark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA ® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE ® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. License information This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc. OpenSSL statement OpenSSL license Copyright © 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”Introduction C550 x-3 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay license Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.Introduction C550 x-4 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] NetSNMP License Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights ReservedIntroduction C550 x-5 Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.Introduction C550 x-6 Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.Introduction C550 x-7 - Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) Copyright © 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD)Introduction C550 x-8 Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Kerberos Copyright © 1985-2005 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All rights reserved. permission notice WITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Furthermore if you modify this software you must label your software as modified software and not distribute it in such a fashion that it might be confused with the original MIT software.Introduction C550 x-9 M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT ORIGINAL MIT SOFTWARE, MODIFIED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Mersenne Twister A C-program for MT19937, with initialization improved 2002/1/26. Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto. Before using, initialize the state by using init_genrand(seed) or init_by_array(init_key, key_length). Copyright © 1997-2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.Introduction C550 x-10 Any feedback is very welcome. http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/emt.html email: m-mat @ math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp (remove space)Introduction C550 x-11 Contents Introduction Trademarks and registered trademarks .........................................x-2 OpenSSL statement ....................................................................... x-2 NetSNMP License .......................................................................... x-4 Kerberos ......................................................................................... x-8 Mersenne Twister ........................................................................... x-9 Contents ...........................................................................................x-11 About this manual ...........................................................................x-17 Structure of the manual ................................................................ x-17 Notation ........................................................................................ x-17 Explanation of manual conventions ..............................................x-18 User’s Guides ..................................................................................x-20 Printed manuals ............................................................................ x-20 User’s Guide CD manuals ............................................................ x-20 1 Overview of the User Box functions 1.1 Available User Box functions ...........................................................1-2 Saving documents ..........................................................................1-2 Using document data .....................................................................1-3 Organizing document data .............................................................1-5 1.2 Set-up for User Box functions .........................................................1-7 User box registration ......................................................................1-7 1.3 Control panel .....................................................................................1-8 1.4 Touch panel .....................................................................................1-11 Screen layout ................................................................................1-11 Icons on the touch panel ..............................................................1-12 1.5 About External Memory ..................................................................1-13 Available External Memory ...........................................................1-13 Connecting an external memory ..................................................1-13 2 Saving documents 2.1 Information on saving documents ...................................................2-2 User authentication ........................................................................2-2 Registering user boxes ...................................................................2-4 Naming documents ........................................................................2-4Introduction C550 x-12 2.2 Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed ..................2-6 When user authentication and account track settings are not specified .........................................................................................2-6 When only user authentication settings are specified ....................2-7 When only account track settings are specified .............................2-8 When user authentication and account track settings are specified and synchronized ............................................................2-8 When user authentication and account track settings are specified, but not synchronized ...................................................2-10 2.3 Saving copies in user boxes ..........................................................2-12 Settings that can be saved and changed .....................................2-12 Saving copy documents ...............................................................2-13 2.4 Saving scans in user boxes ............................................................2-17 Previewing ....................................................................................2-17 Preview - View Pages - Change Setting .......................................2-19 Preview - View Status ...................................................................2-20 Saving after previewing ................................................................2-20 Using a user box destination ........................................................2-22 Entering destinations directly .......................................................2-24 Saving in User Box mode .............................................................2-27 Saving on external memory from User Box mode .......................2-29 2.5 Saving printouts in user boxes ......................................................2-32 Saving data in a user box .............................................................2-33 Saving data in the Secure Print User Box ....................................2-36 Saving data in the Encrypted PDF User Box ................................2-38 2.6 Specifying scan settings ................................................................2-39 Settings that can be specified ......................................................2-39 Original Type ................................................................................2-40 Simplex/Duplex ............................................................................2-42 Resolution .....................................................................................2-43 File Type .......................................................................................2-44 Density ..........................................................................................2-49 Separate Scan ..............................................................................2-50 Color (Quality Adjustment) ............................................................2-50 Background Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .............................2-52 Sharpness (Quality Adjustment) ...................................................2-54 Frame Erase (Erase) ......................................................................2-56 Book Copy (Book Scan) ...............................................................2-58 Scan Size (Application) .................................................................2-60 Original Settings ...........................................................................2-64Introduction C550 x-13 2.7 Display and operation of the left panel .........................................2-67 Job List .........................................................................................2-67 Job List - Delete ...........................................................................2-68 Job List - Job Details ....................................................................2-68 Settings when saving documents ................................................2-73 Detail - Check Scan Settings .......................................................2-74 Detail - Check Original Settings ...................................................2-75 Settings when using documents ..................................................2-75 Detail .............................................................................................2-76 Check Job Settings ......................................................................2-76 Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................2-77 Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings ..........................................2-77 Preview .........................................................................................2-78 Preview - Detail ............................................................................2-79 Preview - Detail (Print/Combine) ..................................................2-79 Preview - Detail (Send/Bind TX) ...................................................2-80 3 Organizing user box documents 3.1 Overview of document organizing ...................................................3-2 Available operations in the File Document screen .........................3-2 Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................3-3 Description of File Document screen .............................................3-5 Searching for a user box name ......................................................3-6 3.2 Deleting a document .........................................................................3-8 3.3 Changing the document name .......................................................3-10 3.4 Moving a document ........................................................................3-12 3.5 Duplicating a document .................................................................3-14 3.6 Checking document details ...........................................................3-16 Check the details ..........................................................................3-17 Preview screen operations ...........................................................3-19 4 Printing a user box document 4.1 Overview of document printing .......................................................4-2 Available operations in the Use Document screen .........................4-2 Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................4-3 Description of Use Document screen ............................................4-5 Searching for a user box name ......................................................4-5 4.2 Printing ...............................................................................................4-6 Available print settings ...................................................................4-6 To print a document .......................................................................4-7 Changing the number of copies .....................................................4-8 Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing ...............................4-8Introduction C550 x-14 Specifying Finishing settings ..........................................................4-9 Adding a binding margin ..............................................................4-16 Adding cover pages (Cover Sheet) ...............................................4-19 Adding insertions (Insert Sheet) ....................................................4-24 Inserting chapter title pages (Chapters) .......................................4-29 Printing the date/time (Date/Time) ................................................4-33 Printing page numbers (Page Number) ........................................4-36 Adding preset text or images (Stamp) ..........................................4-41 Adding text and images to prevent copying (Copy Protect) ........4-44 Adding repeated preset text or images (Stamp Repeat) ..............4-53 Inserting a header/footer (Header/Footer) ....................................4-61 4.3 Combined printing ..........................................................................4-66 Available combined printing parameters ......................................4-66 To print a document .....................................................................4-67 5 Sending a user box document 5.1 Overview of document transmissions .............................................5-2 Available document transmission operations .................................5-2 Transmission methods ...................................................................5-2 Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................5-3 Description of Use Document screen ............................................5-5 Searching for a user box name ......................................................5-5 To send a document .......................................................................5-6 5.2 Specifying the destination ................................................................5-8 Selecting from the address book ...................................................5-8 Selecting from a group destination ................................................5-9 Searching for a destination ...........................................................5-11 Directly specifying an e-mail destination ......................................5-13 Directly specifying an SMB destination ........................................5-15 Directly specifying an FTP destination .........................................5-16 Directly specifying a WebDAV destination ...................................5-19 Selecting a destination with an Address search ..........................5-21 5.3 Specifying the transmission settings ............................................5-24 Settings that can be specified ......................................................5-24 File Type .......................................................................................5-25 E-Mail Settings (Communication Settings) ...................................5-29 URL Notification Setting (Communication Settings) ....................5-30 E-Mail Encryption (Communication Settings) ...............................5-31 Digital Signature (Communication Settings) .................................5-32 Date/Time (Application) ................................................................5-33 Page Number (Application) ...........................................................5-37 Stamp (Application) ......................................................................5-41 Header/Footer (Application) .........................................................5-44 Send & Print (Application) .............................................................5-49Introduction C550 x-15 5.4 Bind TX .............................................................................................5-52 Available combined sending parameters .....................................5-52 To perform a combined transmission ...........................................5-52 5.5 Checking settings before sending .................................................5-56 Deleting unnecessary destinations ...............................................5-57 6 Printing/sending a system user box document 6.1 Overview of system user boxes .......................................................6-2 6.2 Secure Print User Box ......................................................................6-3 Available printing parameters .........................................................6-3 To print a document (Mode 1) ........................................................6-4 To print a document (Mode 2) ........................................................6-7 6.3 Annotation User Box .......................................................................6-10 Available printing parameters .......................................................6-10 To print a document .....................................................................6-11 Available transmission parameters ...............................................6-13 To send a document .....................................................................6-15 Changing the text .........................................................................6-17 6.4 Encrypted PDF User Box ................................................................6-21 Printing .........................................................................................6-21 Deleting .........................................................................................6-23 6.5 ID & Print User Box .........................................................................6-26 Printing .........................................................................................6-27 Deleting .........................................................................................6-28 6.6 External Memory .............................................................................6-30 Available printing parameters .......................................................6-30 File types that can be printed .......................................................6-30 Document Details .........................................................................6-31 To print a document .....................................................................6-31 To print an encrypted PDF file ......................................................6-33 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters 7.1 Settings that can be specified from Utility mode ...........................7-2 Utility mode parameters .................................................................7-2 PageScope Web Connection .........................................................7-2 7.2 User box permissions .......................................................................7-3 Types of users ................................................................................7-3 Public user boxes and personal/group user boxes ........................7-3 7.3 Displaying settings screens .............................................................7-4 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ................................7-4Introduction C550 x-16 7.4 Registering user boxes .....................................................................7-6 Registering user boxes ...................................................................7-7 Registering annotation user boxes ...............................................7-11 7.5 Maximum Number of User Boxes ..................................................7-18 7.6 User Box Settings ...........................................................................7-20 Displaying the User Box Settings screen .....................................7-20 Delete Unused User Box ..............................................................7-21 Delete Secure Print Documents ...................................................7-22 Auto Delete Secure Document .....................................................7-23 Encrypted PDF Delete Time .........................................................7-24 ID & Print Delete Time ..................................................................7-25 Document Hold Setting ................................................................7-26 External Memory Function Settings .............................................7-27 7.7 ID & Print Settings ...........................................................................7-29 7.8 User Box Administrator Setting .....................................................7-31 7.9 HDD Setting .....................................................................................7-34 Check HDD Capacity ...................................................................7-35 Overwrite Temporary Data ...........................................................7-36 Overwrite All Data .........................................................................7-39 HDD Lock Password ....................................................................7-41 HDD Encryption Setting ...............................................................7-44 Format HDD ..................................................................................7-46 8 Appendix 8.1 Error message list .............................................................................8-2 8.2 Entering text ......................................................................................8-3 Enlarging the keyboard ...................................................................8-5 To type text .....................................................................................8-6 List of Available Characters ............................................................8-6 8.3 Glossary .............................................................................................8-7 9 Index 9.1 Index ...................................................................................................9-2Introduction C550 x-17 About this manual This User’s Guide covers the bizhub C550 box functions. This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for product names, etc. This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of computers and the machine. For the operating procedures of Windows or Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the respective manuals. In addition, software, such as HDDTWAIN and PageScope Box Operator, which are used with the Box functions of this machine, are also available. Users of these software should refer to the corresponding manuals on the CDROM. Structure of the manual This manual consists of the following chapters. Chapter 1 Overview of the User Box functions Chapter 2 Saving documents Chapter 3 Organizing user box documents Chapter 4 Printing a user box document Chapter 5 Sending a user box document Chapter 6 Printing/sending a system user box document Chapter 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters Chapter 8 Appendix Chapter 9 Index Notation Product name Notation in the manual bizhub C550 This machine, C550 Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista When the operating systems above are written together Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/VistaIntroduction C550 x-18 Explanation of manual conventionsIntroduction C550 x-19Introduction C550 x-20 User’s Guides This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User’s Guide CD. Printed manuals Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing the machine to immediately be used. In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine. Be sure to read this manual before using the machine. User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. Refer to this manual for details on using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode. User’s Guide CD manuals User’s Guide [Copy Operations] This manual contains descriptions of the Copy mode operations and machine maintenance. Refer to this manual for details on the paper and documents, copy procedures using convenient Application functions, replacing consumables, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User’s Guide [Print Operations] This manual contains details of the printing functions that can be specified with the standard built-in printer controller. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on using the printing functions. User’s Guide [Box Operations] (this manual) This manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the hard disk. Refer to this manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data. User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations] This manual contains descriptions on specifying network settings for standard equipment and operating procedures for scanning functions. Refer to this User’s Guide for details on using network functions and the Scan to EMail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB operations.Introduction C550 x-21 User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations] This manual contains descriptions on the machine settings that can be specified remotely with PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer. Refer to this manual for details on operating procedures for using PageScope Web Connection. User’s Guide [Fax Operations] This manual contains descriptions of the G3 fax operations. Refer to this manual for details on using the G3 fax operations when the optional fax kit is installed. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User’s Guide [Network Fax Operations] This manual contains details on the network fax functions. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on Internet faxing and IP address faxing. User’s Guide [Fax Driver Operations] This manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a computer. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User’s Guide [Advanced Function Operations] This User’s Guide describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function, and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications. In order to use the functions effectively, please read this User’s Guide. The following models support the advanced function. bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C2031 Overview of the User Box functionsOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-2 1 Overview of the User Box functions 1.1 Available User Box functions The User Box functions allow document data to be saved on the internal hard disk of the machine and later printed. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by e-mail, forwarded to an FTP site, or sent to a computer. By using the User Box functions, documents can easily be scanned repeatedly and the separate data can be saved on a computer. Saving documents Data can be saved to the following box: *1 To connect an external memory, an optional local interface kit is required. User box Description Reference Public/personal/group user boxes Document data that has been copied or scanned on this machine can be saved in the user boxes. Document data, which is printed from a computer on the network, can be saved. Based on user authentication or account track settings, access to some boxes, such as personal and group user boxes, can be limited to particular users. p. 2-2 Annotation user box Document data saved in Scan mode and to be printed or transmitted with an image of the date/time or an annotation number can be saved. p. 2-2 External memory *1 Appears if an external memory is installed. Scanned data can be directly saved in the external memory connected to the machine. p. 2-29Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-3 Using document data The document saved in boxes can be used as follows: Original Computers Fax External memory FTP server etc. User box Description Reference Public/personal/group user boxes Saved documents can be printed or sent. Multiple documents can be selected for printing/transmission. Depending on user authentication and account track settings, use of some boxes, such as personal and group user boxes, can be limited to a particular user. p. 6-2 Bulletin board user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. Saved documents in the bulletin board user box can be printed. - Polling TX user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. Documents sent using polling can be printed. - Secure print user box Saved documents can be printed. To print the data, enter an ID and password. p. 6-3 Memory RX user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. The fax document received though the memory RX setting can be confirmed and printed. - Annotation user box Document data saved can be printed or transmitted with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 6-10Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-4 *1 For details on bulletin board, Polling TX, Polling RX, Memory RX and File Re-TX, refer to the User's Guide [Fax Operations]. *2 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, see PageScope Direct Print manual or the manual of PageScope Web Connection. *3 To connect an external memory, an optional local interface kit is required. Fax retransmit user box *1 This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed. Saved documents can be retransmitted or printed for confirmation. - Encrypted PDF user box *2 Saved documents can be printed. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. To print documents, the preset password is necessary. p. 6-21 ID & Print user box *3 This user box appears if user authentication is applied. Documents being sent for print jobs by the printer driver after logging on as a user can be printed. p. 6-26 External memory *3 Appears if an external memory is installed. Document data in the external memory connected to the machine can be printed. p. 6-30 User box Description ReferenceOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-5 Organizing document data Documents can be organized by renaming the saved document name, changing the box where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. Fax Computers External memory FTP server etc. E-mail etc. Printouts User box Delete Change name Move Copy Details Public/personal/group user boxes o o o o o Bulletin board user box o × × × × Polling TX user box o × × × × Secure print user box o o × × o Memory RX user box o o × × o Annotation user box o o × × o Fax retransmit user box o × × × × Encrypted PDF user box × × × × × ID & Print User Box × × × × ×Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-6 External memory × × × × × User box Delete Change name Move Copy DetailsOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-7 1.2 Set-up for User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be specified. User box registration Create and save the user boxes where documents will be saved. Boxes can be registered by using the machine’s touch panel or by using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network. The following boxes can be created: - Public/personal/group user boxes (p. 7-6) - Annotation user box (p. 7-11)Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-8 1.3 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following keys and switches are provided on the control panel. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 8 14 13 12 9 15 16 17 18 11 10 19 20 21 22 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub power switch Press to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/ scan program.Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-9 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message “Now in Interrupt mode.” appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. Press the [Proof Copy] key before scanning or copying, the result can be viewed on the touch panel. ! Detail This key cannot be used if the [User Box] key was pressed to save a document. To preview a document being saved in a user box, press the [Fax/Scan] key. For details on previewing, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 10 [Start] key Press to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin to scan, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot be started. Press to restart a stopped job. 11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 12 [C] (clear) key Press to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 13 Keypad Use to type in the number of sets to be copied. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [Help] key Press to display the Help screen. From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. 15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, it does not enter Enlarge Display mode. 16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. No. Part name DescriptionOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-10 7 CAUTION Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. % Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 18 [Access] key In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings have been applied, enter the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track), and then press this key. Also press this key to log off. 19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. 21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For details on the scan operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. For details on the fax operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. 22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. No. Part name DescriptionOverview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-11 1.4 Touch panel Screen layout 1 4 5 3 2 No. Part Name Description 1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed. 2 Functions/settings display area Softkeys to select functions are displayed. This area is for specifying the settings of various functions. Touch softkeys to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. 4 Left panel The softkeys, such as [Job List] showing the jobs being processed or to be processed, and [Mode Check] showing the result of the specified settings, appear in this area. For details on the left panel, refer to “Display and operation of the left panel” on page 2-67. 5 Toner supply indicators These indicators show the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-12 Icons on the touch panel The status of the machine may appear in the icon display area. The followings are the icons appear on the touch panel. Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that data is being received by the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. If the optional image controller is installed, touch this icon to display the setting screen for the image controller. Indicates that Enhanced Security mode is set to ON. Indicates that an external memory is installed.Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-13 1.5 About External Memory If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, a USB flash memory can be connected for saving or printing data. Available External Memory The conditions of external memories available on this machine are as follows. - USB flash memory supporting the USB (1.1/2.0) Interface - FAT32 formatted. Connecting an external memory Connect an external memory to the USB connector on the side of this machine.Overview of the User Box functions 1 C550 1-14 When the external memory is connected, an icon appears on the bottom of the screen and the following screen appears.Check it, and then touch [OK]. 2 Reminder This machine is equipped with two USB connectors on the side. As one is for optional connection, two sets of external memories cannot be connected at a time. Do not pull out the external memory while a document is being saved to the external memory or being printed. Do not use any USB device other than the USB flash memory (such as hard disk or USB hub). However, the optional products connectable to the USB connector of this machine are exceptions.2 Saving documentsSaving documents 2 C550 2-2 2 Saving documents 2.1 Information on saving documents Keep in mind the following information before saving documents. User authentication This machine can be set so that an account or user name and a password must be entered in order to use the machine. Contact the administrator for details on the account or user name for using the machine. With user authentication (machine authentication) Type in the user name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. With user authentication (external server authentication) Specify the user name, password and authenticating server, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.Saving documents 2 C550 2-3 With account track Type in the account name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. 2 Note With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those that can be accessed by the user that is logged on. For details, refer to “Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed” on page 2-6. If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, contact your server administrator for log on.Saving documents 2 C550 2-4 For details on logging on when using optional authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 for authentication, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Registering user boxes Before document data can be saved, a user box must be created for saving the data. Up to 1,000 user boxes can be created. Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single user box. A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all user boxes. A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all user boxes. There are public user boxes (which can be used by more than one person), personal user boxes (which can be used only by a single person), and group user boxes (which can be used by users belonging to the account that has been logged on when account track settings have been specified). For details on registering user boxes, refer to “Registering user boxes” on page 7-6. Naming documents Document data that is saved can be given a name. The names can contain a maximum of 30 characters. The names can also be changed after they are saved. The names can be specified when the data is saved; however, if the data is saved without a name specified, a preset name is applied. Names are created by combining the following elements. As an example, the document name “CKMBT_C55008102315230” is described. Element Description C This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan P: Print KMBT_C550 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is “KMBT_C550”. This name can be changed with the “Input Machine Address” parameter on the Administrator/Machine Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters can be specified. 08102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if the document is part of a series of scans.Saving documents 2 C550 2-5 2 Note “S” appears for documents saved from the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box mode screen. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear beside “Document Name”; however, it is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Add this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the server receiving the files, for example, when data is sent by FTP. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters do not appear beside “Document Name”; however, they are added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Element DescriptionSaving documents 2 C550 2-6 2.2 Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed When user authentication and account track settings have been applied, the user boxes that can be accessed and the permissions change as shown below. Specify the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. When user authentication and account track settings are not specified Users can access all public user boxes. User boxes created by users and the administrator are public user boxes. Create and access Public user boxSaving documents 2 C550 2-7 When only user authentication settings are specified Users can access all public user boxes and only personal user boxes that the user has created. Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users. A user box administrator can be specified. A user box administrator can access all public user boxes and all personal user boxes. If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes become public user boxes. User 1 User 2 Accessible Public user box Personal user box for user 1 Personal user box for user 2 Box administratorSaving documents 2 C550 2-8 When only account track settings are specified Users can access all public user boxes and only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to. If authentication data is erased by canceling the account track settings or changing the authentication method, all group user boxes become public user boxes. When user authentication and account track settings are specified and synchronized Account A Account B Accessible Public user box Group user box for account A Group user box for account B Account A User 1 Account B User 2Saving documents 2 C550 2-9 If the account for the user was previously registered, group user boxes for accounts that the user does not belong to cannot be accessed. Users can access all public user boxes, only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to, and only personal user boxes that the user has created. Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users. A user box administrator can be specified. A user box administrator can access all public user boxes, all personal user boxes and all group user boxes. If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes and group user boxes become public user boxes. Account A Account B User 1 User 2 Accessible Public user box Personal user box for user 1 Box administrator Group user box for account A Group user box for account B Personal user box for user 2Saving documents 2 C550 2-10 When user authentication and account track settings are specified, but not synchronized If the account for the user was not previously registered, the user logs on with the account name and password. The group user box for the account can be accessed by a member of an account different from the one that is logged on. Account A User 1 Account BSaving documents 2 C550 2-11 Users can access all public user boxes, and only personal user boxes that the user has created. Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users. If a user enters an account name and password when logging on, the group user box for that account can be accessed. A user box administrator can be specified. A user box administrator can access all public user boxes, all personal user boxes and all group user boxes. If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes and group user boxes become public user boxes. User 1 Accessible Public user box Personal user box for user 1 Box administrator Accessible by entering the account name and password Group user box for account A Group user box for account BSaving documents 2 C550 2-12 2.3 Saving copies in user boxes Settings that can be saved and changed Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies, there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Punch settings are available only if optional finisher FS-517 and the punch kit are installed. Function type Function Can be saved Can be set when printing Number of copies × o Paper tray selection o × Output tray selection o × Basic screen settings Color o × Paper o × Zoom o × Original > Copy o o Fold/Bind o o Collate/Group o o Punch o o Staple o o Original Settings Combine o × Quality/Density Original Type o × Density o × Background Adjustment o × Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert o o Edit Color o × Page Margin o o Stamp/Composition o oSaving documents 2 C550 2-13 Saving copy documents Copy documents can be saved in user boxes. Specify the following information when saving copy documents. ! Detail The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box 2 Note To output the copy document after saving it to a user box and specifying Z-Fold for it, specify a paper size that supports Z-Fold when saving the copy document. The sizes that support Z-Fold are 8-1/2 × 14 w, 11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w and 8K w. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Application]. Parameter Description User Box Specify the user box where the data is to be saved. Document Name Type in 30 characters or less for the name of the document to be saved. Save & Print To make copies of the document while saving it, touch [Yes].Saving documents 2 C550 2-14 3 Touch [Save in User Box]. The Save in User Box screen appears. 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box]. 5 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then touch the button for the user box to select it. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. – To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user box.Saving documents 2 C550 2-15 The button for the selected user box appears selected. ? Is a password required when saving data? % It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the user box. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Specify the name of the document to be saved. To change the automatically specified name, touch [Document Name].Saving documents 2 C550 2-16 8 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 9 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes]. 10 Touch [OK]. 11 Specify the necessary copy settings. – If a User Box function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected. 12 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 13 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image. – For details on using previews in Copy mode, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 14 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. – If “Yes” was selected beside “Save & Print”, the scanned document is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. – If “No” was selected beside “Save & Print”, the scanned document data is saved in the specified user box. ! Detail For details on the copy settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. For details on printing the document saved in a user box, refer to “Printing a user box document” on page 4-2.Saving documents 2 C550 2-17 2.4 Saving scans in user boxes From the Fax/Scan mode screen, scanned images can be saved in user boxes. User box destinations can be registered in the address book, or a user box destination can be specified directly. The following procedures describe how to select a user box destination, how to specify a user box destination directly, and how to save from User Box mode. 2 Note Press the [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan mode screen. ! Detail The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box (only when entered directly) Previewing When saving scans in registered user box destinations, pressing the [Proof Copy] key in the control panel after loading the document displays a preview of the finished scan in the touch panel. In the Preview screen, the orientation of the scanned document can be checked and the settings can be changed. ! Detail A preview cannot be displayed if the document is scanned with an encryption setting specified. A preview cannot be displayed if the document is being saved by pressing the [User Box] key, then touching [Save Document]. The following operations can be performed from the Preview - View Pages screen.Saving documents 2 C550 2-18 2 Note By directly selecting a page, the image of the selected page is rotated by 180 degrees. Item Description [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If the document being saved contains multiple pages, the various pages can be displayed. Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and then use the scroll bars at the right side and at the bottom of the image to view the desired section of the image. Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this button to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees. [Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the document being saved contains multiple pages. A list of scanned pages appears, allowing you to select the pages to be rotated by 180 degrees. The following operations are available in the list of scanned pages. [Select Odd]: Touch this button to rotate the images of the odd-numbered pages by 180 degrees. [Select Even]: Touch this button to rotate the images of the evennumbered pages by 180 degrees. [Select All]: Touch this button to rotate the images of all pages by 180 degrees. [View Finishing] The specified settings appear as icons and descriptions in the preview image. To remove the icons and descriptions and display only the image, touch [View Finishing] to deselect it. [Change Setting] Touch this button to change some of the settings specified before the document is scanned. For details, refer to “Preview - View Pages - Change Setting” on page 2-19.Saving documents 2 C550 2-19 Preview - View Pages - Change Setting The following settings specified before scanning the original can be changed. The new settings are applied to the originals scanned after the change of setting. Item Description Basic - Document Select either 1-sided or 2-sided. If the “Cover + 2-Sided” is specified, [Cover + 2-Sided] also appears. Basic - Binding Position This item can be selected when the destination of “E-Mail”, “User Box”, “FTP”, “SMB” or “WebDAV” is specified and “Book Copy” is not selected. Basic - Original Size This item can be selected when “Mixed Original” is specified. Application - Frame Erase Specify settings for the “Frame Erase” function. (p. 2-56) Application - Center Erase When [Center Erase] appears and is able to be selected, Center Erase can be specified.Saving documents 2 C550 2-20 Preview - View Status Select whether or not to continue scanning. Saving after previewing The following procedure describes the operations performed after the document is positioned. 1 Position the document to be scanned. 2 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 3 Select the document orientation. – When placed on the original glass Item Description [Finish] To continue scanning after the currently displayed original, make sure that [Finish] is not selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-21 – When loaded into the ADF 4 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned, and the Preview screen is displayed. 5 Check the preview image, and then rotate the image or change the settings, if necessary.Saving documents 2 C550 2-22 – To scan another document page, touch the View Status tab, touch [Finish] to deselect it, and then position the other document page. 6 Press the [Start] key. The transmission begins. Using a user box destination A destination where a user box has been registered is called a “user box destination”. User box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated by “User Box” as the destination type. The following procedure describes how to select a previously registered user box destination for saving data. 2 Note If a user box destination is used, the document is automatically saved with the default name. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-23 2 Touch [Address Book]. The registered destinations are displayed. 3 Select the user box where the document is to be saved. 4 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 5 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 6 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image. – For details, refer to “Saving after previewing” on page 2-20. 7 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. The document is scanned and the data is saved.Saving documents 2 C550 2-24 Entering destinations directly Using the control panel to directly type in the user box destination is called “direct input”. 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears. 2 Touch [Direct Input]. 3 Touch [User Box]. The User Box screen appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-25 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box]. – To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [Scan Settings], then [Application], and then touch [Annotation] to select the user box. 5 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. The button for the selected user box appears selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-26 6 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. – The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 7 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK]. 8 Touch [OK]. The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified user box appears under “Broadcast Destinations”. 9 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 10 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.Saving documents 2 C550 2-27 11 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image. – For details, refer to “Saving after previewing” on page 2-20. 12 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission, but multiple e-mail and fax destinations can be specified. Saving in User Box mode Press the [User Box] key in the control panel, and then directly type in the user box destination. Documents to be saved can be used in the same way as saved scan data. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears. 2 Touch [Save Document].Saving documents 2 C550 2-28 3 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box. – To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. The button for the selected user box appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. The Save Document screen appears. 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. – The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.Saving documents 2 C550 2-29 6 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK]. 7 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 2-39. 8 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission. Saving on external memory from User Box mode If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, external memory can be connected for saving scanned documents. ! Detail The default setting for saving a document to external memory is “OFF” (cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is “OFF” (cannot be saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator mode so that documents can be saved. For details, refer to “External Memory Function Settings” on page 7-27. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-30 2 Touch [Save Document]. 3 Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory]. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name].Saving documents 2 C550 2-31 – The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 6 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK]. 7 Specify the necessary scan and document settings. – For details on the scan and document settings, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 2-39. 8 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Saving documents 2 C550 2-32 2.5 Saving printouts in user boxes If the printer driver for this machine is installed on a computer on the network, the document can be saved in a user box with the same operation for printing it. ! Detail The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. The user box number must be entered in order to save the document. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box 2 Note To output the document after saving it to a user box and specifying ZFold for it, specify a paper size that supports Z-Fold when saving the document. The sizes that support Z-Fold are 8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w and 8K w.Saving documents 2 C550 2-33 Saving data in a user box 1 In the application, click “Print” on the “File” menu. 2 Click the [Preferences] button beside the printer name.Saving documents 2 C550 2-34 3 From the “Output Method” list, select “Save in User Box” or “Save in User Box/Print”. 4 In the User Settings dialog box, type the file name and box number, and then click the [OK] button.Saving documents 2 C550 2-35 5 Click the [OK] button. 6 Click the [OK] button to start printing. ! Detail If user authentication and account track settings have been specified, click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user name for logging on and account information. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].Saving documents 2 C550 2-36 Saving data in the Secure Print User Box 1 In the application, click “Print” on the “File” menu. 2 Click the [Preferences] button beside the printer name. 3 From the “Output Method” list, select “Secure Print”.Saving documents 2 C550 2-37 4 In the User Settings dialog box, type the ID and password for the confidential document, and then click the [OK] button. 5 Click the [OK] button. 6 Click the [OK] button to start printing.Saving documents 2 C550 2-38 ! Detail If user authentication and account track settings have been specified, click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user name for logging on and account information. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations]. Saving data in the Encrypted PDF User Box A command for saving a file in a user box cannot be specified from the printer’s Properties dialog box for a PDF file that requires a password to be entered in order for it to be opened. To print from this machine, the file must be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box. The file can be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box in either of the following two ways. - Saving from PageScope Direct Print - Saving with direct printing from PageScope Web Connection When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document. ! Detail For details on PageScope Direct Print, refer to the corresponding manual. For details on printing a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to “Encrypted PDF User Box” on page 6-21.Saving documents 2 C550 2-39 2.6 Specifying scan settings The scan and document settings that can be specified when saving data in User Box mode are described below. Settings that can be specified In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings] or [Original Settings] to specify detailed settings for scanning and sending. Settings can be specified for the following. Scan Settings Parameter Description Page reference Original Type Select the quality of the document to be scanned. p. 2-40 Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned. p. 2-42 Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. p. 2-43 File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 2-44 Density Select the density for scanning. p. 2-49 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF or when placing the document on the original glass. p. 2-50 Quality Adjustment Adjust the image quality, such as the background, color and sharpness. p. 2-50 Erase Specify settings for the “Erase” function. p. 2-56 Book Scan Set the “Book Copy” function. p. 2-58 Application Specify settings for the scan size. p. 2-60Saving documents 2 C550 2-40 Original Settings Original Type From the following five image quality settings, select the appropriate setting according to the type of document being scanned. If “Text/Photo” or “Photo” is selected, the photo type can also be selected. Parameter Description Page reference Mixed Original Select this setting when loading a document containing different page sizes. p. 2-64 Z-Folded Original Select this setting when loading a zigzag-folded document. p. 2-64 Long Original Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard size. p. 2-64 Original Direction Select the orientation of the loaded document. p. 2-64 Binding Position Select the binding position for the document. p. 2-64 Despeckle Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF. p. 2-64 Setting Description Text Select this setting for documents consisting only of text. Text/Photo Select this setting for documents consisting of both text and photos (halftones). Photo Select this setting for documents consisting of only photos (halftones). Dot Matrix Original Select this setting for documents consisting of text that generally appears faint. Copied Paper Select this setting for documents with an even density produced using a copier or printer.Saving documents 2 C550 2-41 2 Note The “Compact PDF” File Type setting and the “Text” or “Dot Matrix Original” Original Type settings cannot be selected at the same time. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Original Type]. 3 Touch the button for the image quality. Setting Description Photo Paper Select this setting for photos printed on photo paper. Printed Photo Select this setting for printed photos, such as in books or magazines.Saving documents 2 C550 2-42 4 If “Text/Photo”or “Photo” is selected, select the photo type, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex]. Setting Description 1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided document. 2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided document. Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan the first page of the document as a singlesided cover page, then scan the remaining pages as double-sided.Saving documents 2 C550 2-43 3 Select the scanning type. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Resolution].Saving documents 2 C550 2-44 3 Select the resolution. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. File Type Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following six file formats are available. File type ! Detail Even if the file type was selected when the document was saved in the user box, it is necessary to specify the file type when the date is downloaded. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]. If “JPEG” is selected, “Single Page” is automatically selected under “Scan Setting”. A compression method can be selected when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. Compact PDF Select this setting to compress the data more than with the PDF format. This is used with full-color scan data. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. Compact XPS Select this setting to compress the data more than the XPS format and save.Saving documents 2 C550 2-45 Some File Type settings may not be available, depending on the selected Color setting. The possible combinations of the File Type and Color settings are shown below. If the “PDF” or “Compact PDF” File Type setting is selected, the encryption level and stamp combination method can be specified. Encryption settings Detail Settings of Encryption If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed permission settings can be specified. In addition, the grouping of the saved data can be specified. Scan Setting Auto Color Full Color Gray Scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o × TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o × XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o × Parameter Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Document Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Parameter Description Printing Allowed Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If “Encryption Level” is set to “High level”, “Low Resolution” appears. Enable copying of text, images and other content Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted. Change Allowed Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data.Saving documents 2 C550 2-46 ! Detail For details on specifying the Color setting, refer to “Color (Quality Adjustment)” on page 2-50. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [File Type]. – Even if “Single Page” is selected when saving a document in a user box, the document is saved in “Multi Page”. Pages can be specified when downloading data to a computer. – For details on downloading to a computer, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]. 3 Select the file format. Setting Description Single Page Select this setting to create a file in a format where the data for each page can be saved when downloading. Multi Page Select this setting to create a single file from the entire scanned document. This setting cannot be selected if the “JPEG” File Type setting is selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-47 – When saving data in a user box, the file format must be specified, even if the file format was selected before scanning. 4 If “PDF” or “Compact PDF” was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary. – The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-48 5 Specify the encryption settings. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Select the scan setting. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-49 Density Adjust the density for scanning. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Density]. 3 Select the density. – To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark]. – To select the default setting, touch [Standard]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-50 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for various types of documents, for example, when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF, when placing the document on the original glass, or when single-sided documents are combined with double-sided documents. Touch [Separate Scan]. The setting is selected when the button appears selected. Color (Quality Adjustment) Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. The following four settings are available. Some Color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type setting. The possible combinations of the Color and File Type settings are shown below. Setting Description Auto Color Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. Full Color Select this setting to scan in full color. Gray Scale Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. Black Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.Saving documents 2 C550 2-51 ! Detail For details on specifying the File Type setting, refer to “File Type” on page 2-44. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Quality Adjustment]. Auto Color Full Color Gray Scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o × TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o × XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o ×Saving documents 2 C550 2-52 3 Select the color type. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Background Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) The scanning density of the document background can be adjusted. When documents printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Quality Adjustment].Saving documents 2 C550 2-53 3 Touch [Background Removal]. 4 Adjust the density of the background. – To adjust the density automatically, touch [Auto]. – To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark]. – To select the default setting, touch [Standard]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-54 Sharpness (Quality Adjustment) Contours, for example, the edges of text, can be emphasized when scanning. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Quality Adjustment]. 3 Touch [Sharpness].Saving documents 2 C550 2-55 4 Adjust the sharpness. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-56 Frame Erase (Erase) An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width between 1/16 and 2 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top and bottom. ! Detail If a width to be erased around the document is specified with “Frame Erase” with the “Book Copy” function, the same settings are also applied on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen). 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. 2 Touch [Erase]. 3 Touch [Frame Erase].Saving documents 2 C550 2-57 4 Select the width of the area to be erased. – To use frame erasing, touch [Yes]. – To erase the same width on all sides, touch [Frame], and then specify a value. – To specify different widths for the top, left, right and bottom, touch the button for the desired location, and then specify a value. To cancel frame erasing, touch [None]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Saving documents 2 C550 2-58 Book Copy (Book Scan) Select the method for scanning page spreads. The following four scanning methods are available. In addition, the binding position and erase settings can be specified. 2 Note Specify the size of the page spread as the scan size. The document can be scanned while erasing the shadows typical for page spreads. 2 Note If a width to be erased around the document is specified with “Frame Erase” with the “Book Copy” function, the same settings are also applied on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen). 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. Setting Description Book Spread Select this setting to scan a page spread as a single page. Separation Select this setting to scan a page spread as two separate pages (left and right). Front Cover Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover. Front + Back Covers Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover, the second page as the back cover, and the remaining pages as the body. Parameter Description Frame Erase An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width between 1/16 and 2 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top and bottom. Center Erase An area along the center of the document can be erased. An area with a width between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 30.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified.Saving documents 2 C550 2-59 2 Touch [Book Scan]. 3 Touch [Book Copy]. 4 Specify the settings for the “Book Copy” function.Saving documents 2 C550 2-60 – If “Separation”, “Front Cover” or “Front + Back Covers” was selected, touch [Binding Position], and then select the binding position. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Scan Size (Application) Select the size of paper that is to be scanned. The following Scan Size settings are available. 2 Note If the “Book Copy” function was set, specify the size of the page spread. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings]. Setting Description Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded document. Standard sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation. Custom Size Type in the dimensions of a custom size that is not available as a preset size. The size in the X direction can be set between 2 and 17 inches on the North American (inch) model (30.0 and 432.0 mm on the European (metric) model), and the size in the Y direction can be set between 2 and 17 inches on the North American (inch) model (30.0 and 297.0 mm on the European (metric) model). Photo Size On the North American (inch) model, 3 × 5 or 2-1/4 × 3-1/4 can be selected. On the European (metric) model, 13 × 18, 10 × 15 or 9 × 13 can be selected.Saving documents 2 C550 2-61 2 Touch [Application]. 3 Touch [Scan Size]. 4 Select the desired size and orientation. – On the North American (inch) model:Saving documents 2 C550 2-62 – On the European (metric) model: – Select the orientation and size of the paper to be scanned. – Touching [Custom Size] displays the Custom Size screen. Use the keypad to type in the size, and then touch [OK]. – The values can be specified in 1/16-inch increments on the North American (inch) model (in 0.1 mm increments on the European (metric) model). – On the North American (inch) model:Saving documents 2 C550 2-63 – On the European (metric) model: – Touching [Photo Size] displays the Photo Size screen. Select the orientation and size of the photo to be scanned, and then touch [OK]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Saving documents 2 C550 2-64 Original Settings Specify the type of document that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or is folded in a zigzag. 2 Note The original settings and direction settings can be used together. 1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Original Settings]. 2 Select settings for the Original Settings functions. Parameter Description Mixed Original Select this setting when documents of different sizes are loaded into the ADF (optional). The scan speed is decreased since the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. Z-Folded Original Select this setting to detect the size of a zigzag-folded document by the length fed through the ADF. Long Original Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard size. Original Direction Select the orientation of the document. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Binding Position Select the binding position, such as when holes are punched in the document or the document is stapled. This adjusts the scan of double-sided documents so that the binding position is not reversed. Left Select this setting for a document with binding on the left side. Top Select this setting for a document with binding at the top. Auto: The binding is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm. Despeckle Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF.Saving documents 2 C550 2-65 – Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the binding position, and then touch [OK]. – To apply the “Despeckle” setting, touch [Despeckle] to select it. 3 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents 2 C550 2-66 ! Detail The scanning speed will be reduced if the “Despeckle” setting is selected. Clean the left partition glass when it becomes extremely dirty. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Saving documents 2 C550 2-67 2.7 Display and operation of the left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, job status and settings can be displayed using the keys. The followings are the keys appear in the left panal in User Box mode. Job List Queued operation, such as saving document data to a user box and printing/ sending documents, is called a job. Touch [Job List] to display the jobs being processed. 1 2 3 No. Part Name Description 1 [Job List] Jobs that are being processed and the job history can be checked. 2 [Check Job] Information on the selected user box, scan, printing and transmission settings of documents can be checked. 3 [Preview] Saved document image can be previewed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-68 Job List - Delete Jobs being processed can be deleted from the list to cancel the job. Select the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and then delete the job. ! Detail With documents containing multiple pages, an image for each page can be checked. Job List - Job Details Jobs that are being processed and the job history can be viewed from the Job List screens. Jobs are classified into the following three categories: Name Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. [Send] Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs. [Save] Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes.Saving documents 2 C550 2-69 2 Note If the optional fax kit has been installed, the Receive tab appears. Current Jobs in Print page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. If Change Job Priority in Administrator mode is set to “Restrict”, the print job priority control is not available. If Change Job Priority is set to ON, touching this softkey interrupts the printing job for the given priority. The interrupted job is automatically printed once the given priority job is finished. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Status: Job status (Receiving, PrintWait, Printing, StopPrint, Print Err, Job Stored) Document Name: File name to be printed. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. Copies: The number of copies to be printed. [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Delete] Deletes the selected job. [Increase Priority] Allows to change printing job priority. [Release Held Jobs] Allows to change settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Allows to view the settings of the selected job. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →]. [Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, output tray, queued time, the number of original pages, and the number of copies to be printed. Touch [Delete] to delete the job.Saving documents 2 C550 2-70 Job History in Print page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. Current Jobs in Send page Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Document Name: File name to be printed. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of originals. Copies: The number of copies to be printed. Result: Result of a job (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes). [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Touch the softkey to display each category of job. [Detail] Displays the results of the job, error details, user name, document name, output tray, queued time, completed time, the number of original pages, and the number of copies to be printed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Type of the terminal receiving data (Fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, others). Status: Job status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial) Address: Fax number, E-mail address and user box name of the recipient. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. Touch [Delete] to delete the job. [L1][L2] These softkeys appear if the optional fax multi line has been installed. Displays the list of the selected line. [Delete] Deletes the selected job. [Redial] Select the job marked “Waiting To Redial” status for redialing. [Check Job Set.] Allows to view the settings of the selected job. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →].Saving documents 2 C550 2-71 ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. “TWAIN” is indicated for jobs sent by the Web service. The external server information in [Detail] is available only if the external server authentication is applied. Job History in Send page [Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, destination type, destination, queued time, transmission time, the number of original pages, and external server information. Touch [Delete] to delete the job. Item Description Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Type of the terminal receiving data (Fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, others). Address: Fax number, E-mail address and user box name of the recipient. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. Result: Result of a job (Job Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User). [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Touch the softkey to display each category of job. [Comm. List] Displays the Scan list, Fax TX list, and Fax RX list. At each list screen, the activity report, TX report, and RX report can be printed. [Detail] Displays the job results, error details, user name, document name, destination type, queued time, transmission time, the number of original pages, and external server information.Saving documents 2 C550 2-72 ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. “TWAIN” is indicated for jobs sent by the Web service. The external server information in [Detail] is available only if the external server authentication is applied. Current Jobs in Receive page The Receive tab appears only when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details on the contents of the tab, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. Job History in Receive page The Receive tab appears only when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details on the contents of the tab, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. Current Jobs in Save page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Status: Job status (Receiving, Saving to Memory). Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of original pages. [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Delete] Deletes the selected job. [Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, user box, queued time, and the number of original pages. Touch [Delete] to delete the job.Saving documents 2 C550 2-73 Job History in Save page ! Detail If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is not accessible from other users. Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents. Settings when saving documents When [Save Document] is selected, the information of the user box where the document is to be saved is displayed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: User or account name who queued the job. Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Time when the job is queued. Org.: The number of originals. Result: Result of a job (Job Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User/Reset Modes). [↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one time, to switch the pages. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Touch the softkey to display each category of job. [Comm. List] Displays the Scan list, Fax TX list, and Fax RX list. At each list screen, the activity report, TX report, and RX report can be printed. [Detail] Displays the job result, error details, user name, document name, user box, queued time, and the number of original pages.Saving documents 2 C550 2-74 When saving a document, select “Scan Settings” or “Original Settings”. [Details] appears. Touch [Detail] to view scan settings and original settings. Detail - Check Scan Settings The basic scan setting, scan settings, and application settings can be checked. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →].Saving documents 2 C550 2-75 Detail - Check Original Settings The original settings can be checked. Settings when using documents When [Use Document] is selected, information of the selected user box is displayed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-76 Detail Touch [Document Details] in the Use Document screen to view the Registerd Time/User Name/Document Name/the No. of Pages/Job No. Touch [Preview] to view the preview image of the saved document. When multiple documents are selected, switch the preview page by touching [↑] [↓]. 2 Note For the procedure on viewing preview image, refer to “Preview” on page 2-78. Check Job Settings When [Send] or [Bind TX] is selected on the Use Document screen, [Check Job Settings] appears. Touch [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings: - Destination Settings - E-Mail SettingsSaving documents 2 C550 2-77 Check Job Settings - Destination Settings This screen displays the list of registered destinations. - To add a destination to the address book, touch [Store Address]. - To view the details of the destination on the screen, select the destination and touch [Details]. - To delete a destination, select the destination and touch [Delete]. ! Detail For details on address book registration, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings The document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages can be checked.Saving documents 2 C550 2-78 Preview When Use Document or File Document is selected, the image of the saved document can be previewed. Touch [Preview] to display the thumbnail image of the top page in the left panel. ! Detail With the documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be checked. The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Saving documents 2 C550 2-79 Preview - Detail To enlarge the preview image, touch [Detail]. The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. Preview - Detail (Print/Combine) When [Print] or [Combine] is selected while using documents, by touching [Detail], the page image of printing result can be previewed. ! Detail With documents containing multiple pages, an image for each page can be checked.Saving documents 2 C550 2-80 2 Note When selecting on the page directly, the image of the selected page is rotated by 180 degrees. Preview - Detail (Send/Bind TX) If [Send] or [Bind TX] is selected when using documents, by touching [Detail], the result of the page image to be sent can be previewed. Item Description [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If stored document contains multiple pages, touch [Prev. Page]/ [Next Page] to move to the previous/next page on the preview image. Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this key to rotate the page currently displayed by 180 degrees. [Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the stored document contains multiple pages. List of scanned pages appears. Select the desired page to rotate by 180 degrees. The rotation options in the list of scanned page are as follows: [Select Odd]: Rotates the images for odd number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select Even]: Rotates the images for even number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select All]: Rotates the images for all of pages by 180 degrees. [View Finishing] Touch this key to display the specified settings in the preview image by icons and text. When [View Finishing] is cancelled, the only image is displayed without icons or text.Saving documents 2 C550 2-81 2 Note When selecting on the page directly, the image of the selected page is rotated by 180 degrees. Item Description [Scan] This button appears if the optional fax kit has been installed. Touch this key to display the preview for [E-mail TX], [PC (FTP)], [SMB], and [WebDAV]. [Fax] This button appears if the optional fax kit has been installed. Touch this key to display the preview for sending G3 fax/IP address fax/ Internet fax. [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If stored document contains multiple pages, touch [Prev. Page]/ [Next Page] to move to the previous/next page on the preview image. Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this key to rotate the page currently displayed by 180 degrees. [Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the stored document contains multiple pages. List of scanned pages appears. Select the desired page to rotate by 180 degrees. The rotation options in the list of scanned page are as follows: [Select Odd]: Rotates the images for odd number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select Even]: Rotates the images for even number of pages by 180 degrees. [Select All]: Rotates the images for all of pages by 180 degrees. [View Finishing] Touch this key to display the specified settings in the preview image by icons and text. When [View Finishing] is cancelled, the image only is displayed without icons or text.3 Organizing user box documentsOrganizing user box documents 3 C550 3-2 3 Organizing user box documents 3.1 Overview of document organizing Available operations in the File Document screen The following operations can be performed from the File Document screen. From the File Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can be organized. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below. ! Detail Documents can be moved or copied between public user boxes, personal user boxes and group user boxes. When organizing documents in the Secure Print User Box, the ID and password for the confidential document must be entered. Operation Description Page reference Delete Data that is no longer needed, for example, documents that have already been printed or transmitted, can be deleted. p. 3-8 Edit Name The name of a saved document can be changed. p. 3-10 Move Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/ group user box. p. 3-12 Copy Document data currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. p. 3-14 Document Details The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked. p. 3-16 Public/personal/ group user boxes Annotation User Box Secure Print User Box Delete o o o Edit Name o o o Move o × × Copy o × × Document Details o o oOrganizing user box documents 3 C550 3-3 Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [File Document]. 3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. – The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-4 – The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-5 The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed. 2 Note If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect bpx password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Description of File Document screen As a default, thumbnails of the saved documents and the document names are displayed. The following information is displayed. To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. A thumbnail of the first page is displayed. The document name is displayed. The number of pages is displayed.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-6 Searching for a user box name The desired user box can be searched for by its name. 1 From the screen containing a list of the user boxes, touch [Search User Box]. The date/time when the document was stored is displayed. Touch to switch between displaying the list in ascending or descending order. The name of the user who stored the document and the mode when the document was registered are displayed. The document name is displayed.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-7 2 The user boxes for each index character appear. 3 Touch the button for an index character to display the list of user boxes registered with that index character. ! Detail A user box name can be searched for from the Save Document screen, Use Document screen or File Document screen. The personal user boxes and group user boxes that can be accessed when a user is logged on are also displayed.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-8 3.2 Deleting a document From the File Document screen, documents that are no longer needed, for example, documents that have already been printed, can be deleted. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be deleted. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. 2 Touch [Delete].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-9 3 Check the document information that appeared, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK] to delete the document. The documents are deleted.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-10 3.3 Changing the document name The name of a saved document can be changed. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be renamed. – A name cannot be changed if multiple documents are selected. 2 Touch [Edit Name].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-11 3 The current name appears. Type in the new name. 4 Touch [Start]. 2 Note The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP, SMB or WebDAV server. Specify a document name according to the conditions of the destination server when transmitting. The document name can also be changed when the document is transmitted.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-12 3.4 Moving a document Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. 2 Note A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be moved. 2 Touch [Move].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-13 3 Specify the user box where the document is to be moved. ? Is a password required for moving data to a different user box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 4 Check the information, and then touch [Start]. The data is moved, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed. 5 Touch [OK]. 2 Note The date and time that the document was moved is recorded under “Time Stored”.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-14 3.5 Duplicating a document Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. 2 Note A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be copied. 2 Touch [Copy].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-15 3 Specify the user box where the document is to be copied. ? Is a password required for copying data to a different user box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 4 Check the information, and then touch [Start]. The data is copied, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed. 5 Touch [OK]. 2 Note The date and time that the document was copied is recorded under “Time Stored”.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-16 3.6 Checking document details The details of saved documents can be checked from the touch panel. The following information can be checked from the Document Details screen. ! Detail The preview screen can be displayed by touching a button in the sub display area or by touching a button in the Document Details screen. Item Description Registered Time Displays the date and time that the document was stored. User Name Displays the mode (Scan, Copy or Print) and name of the user who stored the document. Document Name Displays the name of the document. No. of Pages Displays the number of pages in the document. Job No. Displays the job number when the document was stored. [Preview] button Touch this button to display the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. For details, refer to “Preview screen operations” on page 3-19.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-17 Check the details 2 Note Multiple documents can be selected. 1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be checked. 2 Touch [Document Details]. The Document Details screen appears.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-18 3 Check the details of the document. – To select multiple documents, touch [↑] and [↓] to display different screens. – To display the preview, touch [Preview]. – To perform the operation from the sub display area, touch [Preview] in the sub display area, and then touch [Detail]. 4 After checking the document, touch [Close].Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-19 Preview screen operations Touching [Enlarged Thumbnail View] in the Document Details screen displays the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. The image can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. The procedure for checking the image at a size of 4 times the normal size is described below. ! Detail With documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be checked. The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed. 1 The image is displayed at full size in the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. Touch [ ] twice. The image is displayed at a size 4 times the normal size.Organizing user box documents 3 C550 3-20 2 To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the right side and at the bottom of the image. – When the selection is moved to the right: – When the selection is moved down: 3 After checking the image, touch [Close].4 Printing a user box documentPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-2 4 Printing a user box document 4.1 Overview of document printing Available operations in the Use Document screen The following operations can be performed from the Use Document screen. From the Use Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can be printed and transmitted. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below. Operation Description Page reference Print Documents saved in user boxes in Copy mode, Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed. p. 4-6 Send Documents saved in user boxes in Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be sent by e-mail. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted. p. 5-24 Combine Multiple documents within the same user box can be combined and printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed. p. 4-66 Bind TX Multiple documents within the same user box can be combined and transmitted. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted. p. 5-52 Document Details The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked. p. 3-16 Public/personal/group user boxes Annotation User Box Secure Print User Box Encrypted PDF User Box Print o o o o Send o o × × Combine o × × × Bind TX o × × × Document Details o o o oPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-3 Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Use Document]. 3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. – The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-4 – The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-5 The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed. 2 Note If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Description of Use Document screen The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to “Description of File Document screen” on page 3-5. Searching for a user box name For details on searching for a user box name, refer to “Searching for a user box name” on page 3-6.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-6 4.2 Printing Available print settings Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. For details on combining multiple documents and printing, refer to “Combined printing” on page 4-66. Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. p. 4-19 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-7 To print a document 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed. 2 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 3 Select the print settings.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-8 4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/ Combine)” on page 2-79. 5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8. Changing the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. % In the Print screen, use the keypad to type in the desired number of copies. – The number of copies can be set between 1 and 9,999. – To reset the number of copies to “1”, press the [C] (clear) key. Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-9 % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided]. Specifying Finishing settings Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/ binding. Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Sort Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by sets. Group Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by page. Offset Select this setting to separate the sets or pages of the copies. If a finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out with each set shifted to separate it. If no finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. Staple Select one of these settings to bind copies with a staple in the corner (upper left or upper right) or with two staples. The stapling position can also be selected. Punch Select a setting to punch holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. Half-Fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-10 Center Staple & Fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. Tri-fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. Z-Fold (Fold/Bind: When FS- 608 is installed) (Fold: When FS-517/FS- 518 is installed) Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold one of the halves before feeding them out. Parameter DescriptionPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-11 ! Detail The feeding method when a finisher is installed can be changed from Administrator mode. For details on the Finishing settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. When a Fold/Bind setting is selected, “Sort” is automatically selected, and the “Group”, Offset, Staple and Punch settings are canceled. In order to carry out the Z-fold finishing process, the Z-folding unit must be installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). 2 Reminder In order to select a Fold/Bind setting, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 7-3/16 and 12-1/4 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 182 and 314 mm on the European (metric) model). The paper length must be between 10-1/8 and 18 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 257 and 458 mm on the European (metric) model). In order to use a Fold/Bind setting, optional finisher FS-608 must be installed. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Finishing].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-12 2 Touch [Sort] or [Group]. To separate the copies, touch [Yes] under “Offset”. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-13 – On the European (metric) model: 4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK]. – When the “Corner” Staple setting is selected:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-14 – When the “2 Position” Staple setting is selected: – When a Punch setting is selected: – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 6 If finisher FS-608 is installed, touch [Fold/Bind]. If finisher FS-517/FS- 518 is installed, touch [Fold].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-15 7 Touch [Yes], and then select the desired folding method. – If finisher FS-608 is installed – If finisher FS-517/FS-518 is installed 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-16 Adding a binding margin A binding margin can be added to the left or right side or to the top of the printed pages. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Page Margin]. 2 Touch [Yes]. 3 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then use the keypad to specify the width of the binding margin. – The width of the binding margin can be specified in 1/16-inch increments on the North American (inch) model (in 0.1 mm increments on the European (metric) model). – To set the binding margin to 0 mm, touch [None]. Parameter Description Margin Position Select the location where the binding margin is to be added. If “Auto” is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is less than 11-11/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (less than 297 mm on the European (metric) model). If the document length is more than 11-11/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (more than 297 mm on the European (metric) model), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. Adjust Value An area with a width between 1/16 and 3/4 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 20.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified. To specify a binding margin of 0 mm, touch [None]. Image Shift When a binding margin is created, the image can be shifted according to the position of the created binding margin. The image can be shifted between 1/16 and 10 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 250 mm on the European (metric) model) left, right, up or down, depending on the position of the binding margin. If the document is to be printed double-sided, touch [Change Back Shift] to also specify the shift on the back side of the pages.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-17 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 4 To move the image according to the binding margin, touch [Image Shift]. The Image Shift screen appears. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-18 – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-19 Adding cover pages (Cover Sheet) Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back. First, load the paper trays with the paper for the front cover page and the back cover page. Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Front Cover None Select this setting to add no front cover. Front (Copy) Select this setting to print the first page of the document onto the front cover page. If “2-Sided” is selected, the second page of the document is printed on the back of the front cover page. Front (Blank) Select this setting to add the front cover page in front of the first page of the document. Back Cover None Select this setting to add no back cover. Back (Copy) Select this setting to print the last page of the document onto the back cover page. If “2-Sided” is selected, the last two pages of the document are printed on the back cover page. Back (Blank) Select this setting to add the back cover page after the last page of the document. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORTPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-20 2 Note If a setting for the “Cover Sheet” function is to be specified when printing a copied document, either of the following conditions must be met when saving the document in a user box. A paper tray is specified. A Cover Sheet setting is specified. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. 2 Touch [Cover Sheet].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-21 3 Select the desired cover page format. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: – To select the post inserter tray, select “Front (Blank)” or “Back (Blank)”. 4 Select the paper trays loaded with the paper for the front and back cover pages. Touch [Paper].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-22 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front or back cover page. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-23 – On the European (metric) model: 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-24 Adding insertions (Insert Sheet) The document can be printed with other paper, such as colored paper, inserted for the specified pages. There are settings (“Copy” and “Blank”) for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with single-sided printing or double-sided printing, the document is printed as described below. Example: When page 6 is specified ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. Setting Description Copy (with “1-Sided” selected) The specified paper is inserted for the 6th page, and the 6th page of the document is printed onto it. Copy (with “2-Sided” selected) The back side of the 3rd page is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page, and a double-sided copy of the 6th and 7th pages of the document are printed onto it. Blank (with “1-Sided” selected) A specified paper is inserted after the 6th page. Blank (with “2-Sided” selected) The specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the printed document. If an odd-numbered page is specified, the back side is left blank. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 3 4 2 3 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 1 1 REPORTPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-25 1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. 2 Touch [Insert Sheet]. 3 Touch [Yes], and then specify the locations where the paper is to be inserted. – Touch a button, and then use the keypad to type in the page where the paper is to be inserted. – To arrange the entered page numbers in order, touch [Sort].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-26 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 4 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertions. Touch [Insert Paper]. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-27 – On the European (metric) model: 5 Select the insertion method. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: – To select the post inserter tray, select “Blank” under “Insert Type”.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-28 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertions, and then touch [OK]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-29 Inserting chapter title pages (Chapters) Settings can be specified for the function when printing double-sided pages. Pages, such as chapter title pages, that must be printed on the front side of the paper can be specified. ! Detail Pages can be specified at a maximum of 30 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. 3 7 7 8 6 2 6 4 4 5 3 3 3 7 7 8 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-30 2 Touch [Chapters]. 3 Touch [Yes], and then specify the pages to be printed on the front side of the paper. – Touch a button, and then use the keypad to type in the desired page number. – To arrange the entered page numbers in order, touch [Sort].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-31 4 To print the front side of the page on different paper, touch [Copy Insert] under “Chapter Paper”. – If “None” is selected, all pages of the document are printed on the same paper. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-32 5 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: – The post inserter tray cannot be selected in the Chapter Paper Settings screen. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-33 Printing the date/time (Date/Time) The printing date and time can be added to all pages of a document. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Date/Time]. Parameter Description Date Format Select the format for the date. Time Format Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-34 3 To insert the date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and time settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-35 – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-36 – On the European (metric) model: 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close]. Printing page numbers (Page Number) Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. With “Insert Sheet Setting”, settings can be selected to specify whether or not page numbers are printed on cover sheets and printed insertions. Parameter Description Starting Page Number Specify the starting page number. Starting Chapter Number Specify the starting chapter number. Page Number Type Select the format for the page number. Insert Sheet Setting Select whether or not page numbers are printed on inserted paper. Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-37 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. Setting Description Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover Select this setting to print the page numbers on the front and back cover pages also. Print on Back Cover Only Select this setting to not print the page number on the front cover page. Do Not Print Page Number Select this setting to not print the page numbers on the front and back cover pages. Insert Sheet (Copy) Print Page # Select this setting to print the page number on printed insertions also. Do Not Print # Select this setting to not print the page number on printed insertions. Skip the Page(s) Select this setting to count printed insertions as pages, but not print the page numbers on them. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print # Select this setting to not print the page number on blank insertions. Skip the Page(s) Select this setting to count blank insertions as pages, but not print the page numbers on them.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-38 2 Touch [Page Number]. 3 To insert page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page number settings. – Touching [Insert Sheet Setting] displays a screen for specifying settings. Touch the buttons for the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-39 – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-40 European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-41 Adding preset text or images (Stamp) Preset text, such as “URGENT”, can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Stamp]. Parameter Description Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp, such as “URGENT”, “DRAFT” or “DO NOT COPY”. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-42 3 To insert a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-43 then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-44 – On the European (metric) model: 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close]. Adding text and images to prevent copying (Copy Protect) Print hidden text on all pages of a document in order to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The following information can be inserted as copy protection. Type Description Registered Stamp Insert stamp images previously registered with the utility. Preset Stamp Insert preset text, such as “Invalid Copy”, “Copy” or “INTERNAL USE ONLY”, as preset stamps. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORTPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-45 ! Detail The printed serial number is the serial number of the machine. For details on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative. Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details, refer to the manual for the utility. The paper is divided into 8 blocks for copy protection, and the items within that area can be increased. The number of areas required for each item is listed below. ! Detail When text is arranged at a +45-degree angle (-45-degree angle), up to four areas are needed. To insert spaces, touch [Position]. To specify the following copy protection settings, touch [Detailed Settings]. Date/Time Insert the date and time that the document was registered. Other Insert the job number assigned to the document, the serial number or a distribution number. Job Number: Select whether to print the job number. Serial Number: Select whether to print the serial number of the machine. Distribution Control Number: Select whether to print the entered distribution numbers. Item Description Required number of areas Registered Stamp One stamp 1 Preset Stamp One stamp 1 Date/Time Date Format 1 Time Format 1 Other Job Number 1 Serial Number 1 Distribution Control Number 1 Parameter Description Text/Background Color Select the color (black, cyan or magenta) used to print the text and background. Type DescriptionPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-46 To perform the following operations, touch [Position]. - Changing the angle of text within the area (+45 degrees, 0 degrees (none) or -45 degrees) - Inserting spaces between copy protection - Changing the printing order of copy protection - Deleting copy protection or spaces 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Copy Protect]. Density Select the printing density (light, std. or dark). Copy Protect Pattern Select the pattern type and contrast when the document is copied. Text Size Select the size (minimal, std. or large) in which text, such as the date/ time, is printed. Pattern Overwrite Select whether the pattern is printed on top of or behind the document text. Background Pattern Select the pattern to be printed in the background. Parameter DescriptionPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-47 3 To apply copy protection, touch [Yes], and then specify the copy protection settings. – Touching [Preset Stamp] displays a screen for specifying the preset stamp settings. Touch the button for the desired stamp type, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Date/Time] displays a screen for specifying the date/time settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-48 – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying other settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. 4 To specify detailed copy protection settings, touch [Detailed Settings]. A screen for specifying settings appears. Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK]. – Text/Background ColorPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-49 – Density – Copy Protect Pattern – Text SizePrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-50 – Pattern Overwrite – Background Pattern 5 After finishing changing the settings, touch [Close]. 6 To change the arrangement of spaces, touch [Position].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-51 7 To arrange text at an angle, select the angle. – When text is arranged at an angle, up to four areas are needed. If five or more items are specified, delete an item before specifying the angle. 8 To change the arrangement or delete an item, touch [Change Pos./Delete]. – The Change screen appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-52 – To change the arrangement, select the copy protection item to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To insert a space, move o to the right of the location where the space is to be inserted, and then touch [Insert]. – To delete an item, select the item to be deleted. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-53 10 Touch [Close]. Adding repeated preset text or images (Stamp Repeat) Text or images can be repeatedly printed throughout all pages. The following information can be inserted as a repeating stamp. ! Detail The printed serial number is the serial number of the machine. For details on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative. Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details, refer to the manual for the utility. The paper is divided into 8 blocks for repeating stamps, and the items within that area can be increased. The number of areas required for each item is listed below. Type Description Registered Stamp Insert stamp images previously registered with the utility. Preset Stamp Insert preset text, such as “Invalid Copy”, “Copy” or “Private”, as preset stamps. Date/Time Insert the date and time that the document was registered. Other Insert the job number assigned to the document, the serial number or a distribution number. Job Number: Select whether to print the job number. Serial Number: Select whether to print the serial number of the machine. Distribution Control Number: Select whether to print the entered distribution numbers. Item Description Required number of areas Registered Stamp One stamp 1 Preset Stamp One stamp 1 Date/Time Date Format 1 Time Format 1 Other Job Number 1 Serial Number 1 Distribution Control Number 1Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-54 ! Detail When text is arranged at a +45-degree angle (-45-degree angle), up to four areas are needed. To insert spaces, touch [Position]. To specify the following stamp settings, touch [Detail Settings]. To perform the following operations, touch [Position]. - Changing the angle of text within the area (+45 degrees, 0 degrees (none) or -45 degrees) - Inserting spaces between stamps - Changing the printing order of stamps - Deleting stamps or spaces 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Text Color Select the color (black, cyan or magenta) used to print the text and background. Density Select the printing density (light, std. or dark). Text Size Select the size (minimal, std. or large) in which text, such as the date/ time, is printed. Pattern Overwrite Select “Front (Overwrite)”, “Transparent” or “Back” for printing the pattern.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-55 2 Touch [Stamp Repeat]. 3 To insert a repeating stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings. – Touching [Preset Stamp] displays a screen for specifying the preset stamp settings. Touch the button for the desired stamp type, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-56 – Touching [Date/Time] displays a screen for specifying the date/time settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying other settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK]. 4 To specify detailed repeating stamp settings, touch [Detail Settings]. A screen for specifying settings appears. Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-57 – Text Color – Density – Text SizePrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-58 – Pattern Overwrite 5 After finishing changing the settings, touch [Close]. 6 To change the arrangement of spaces, touch [Position].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-59 7 To arrange text at an angle, select the angle. – When text is arranged at an angle, up to four areas are needed. If five or more items are specified, delete an item before specifying the angle. 8 To change the arrangement or delete an item, touch [Change Pos./Delete]. The Change screen appears.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-60 – To change the arrangement, select the copy protection item to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To insert a space, move o to the right of the location where the space is to be inserted, and then touch [Insert]. – To delete an item, select the item to be deleted. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-61 10 Touch [Close]. Inserting a header/footer (Header/Footer) Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/ footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode. ! Detail For details on registering headers/footers, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the information can be checked or changed when printing. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Header Settings Select whether or not to print a header. If a header is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Footer Settings Select whether or not to print a footer. If a footer is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Pages Select the pages where the header/footer is to be printed (either all pages or 1st page only). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-62 2 Touch [Header/Footer]. 3 To print a header/footer, touch [Yes], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled. 4 To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/ Change Temporarily].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-63 The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears. 5 Under “Header Settings” or “Footer Settings”, touch [Print], and then specify the header/footer settings. – TextPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-64 – Date/Time – Other 6 Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and the text size. – Text ColorPrinting a user box document 4 C550 4-65 – Text Size – To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset]. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 8 Touch [Close].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-66 4.3 Combined printing Available combined printing parameters Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be printed together. Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified for the selected document. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings specified cannot be combined and printed. “Sort”, “Group” and “Tri-fold” cannot be specified with combined printing. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for offsetting, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-67 To print a document 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed. 2 Under “Action”, touch [Combine].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-68 3 Specify the combination order. – Select the two documents whose order is to be switched. – The documents are combined and printed in the order specified here. 4 Touch [OK].Printing a user box document 4 C550 4-69 5 Select the print settings. 6 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/ Combine)” on page 2-79. 7 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8.5 Sending a user box documentSending a user box document 5 C550 5-2 5 Sending a user box document 5.1 Overview of document transmissions Available document transmission operations Document data saved in a user box can be sent using four different methods. The data can easily be routed simply by registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers. 2 Note Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent. Transmission methods Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. Method Description E-mail Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment. PC (SMB) Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. FTP Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Document data is sent to the specified server on the network. Method Description Page reference Address book destination Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 5-8 Group destinations Multiple destinations can be registered together with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations. p. 5-9 Direct input With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when sending data to a destination that is not already registered. p. 5-13 Address search Select this method when an LDAP server is used. Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be searched for the address that corresponds to the specified conditions. p. 5-21Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-3 ! Detail Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with an Address search. Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions. Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box. 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Use Document].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-4 3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. – The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication. – The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-5 The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed. 2 Note If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Description of Use Document screen The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to “Description of File Document screen” on page 3-5. Searching for a user box name For details on searching for a user box name, refer to “Searching for a user box name” on page 3-6.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-6 To send a document 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent. 2 Under “Action”, touch [Send]. 3 Specify the destination and transmission settings.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-7 4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/ Bind TX)” on page 2-80. 5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on specifying the destination and transmission settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 5-8. 2 Note Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-8 5.2 Specifying the destination Selecting from the address book Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient from the already registered destinations. For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [Address Book]. – The index appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Index”. If “Address Type” is selected, the index of destination types is displayed. A list of registered destinations appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-9 3 Touch a destination button to select the address. – The corresponding address appears as the name of the registered destination when an index button is touched. – Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time. – Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under “Broadcast Destinations”. ! Detail The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to “Searching for a destination” on page 5-11. Selecting from a group destination “Group” refers to multiple destinations that are registered collectively. Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a group that has been registered in advance. For details on registering group destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. ! Detail The description below describes the procedure for specifying the group and sending the data, starting from the situation where “Address Book default” has been set to “Address Type” in [Custom Display Settings] in the User Settings screen. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-10 2 Touch [Group]. The registered group destinations appear. 3 Touch the button for the group destination. A list of destinations registered in the group appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-11 4 Select the destination where the data is to be sent, and then touch [OK]. – To select all destinations, touch [Select All]. – To deselect all destinations, touch [Reset]. – Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under “Broadcast Destinations”. Searching for a destination A search for the desired destination can be performed using any of the following methods. The following procedure describes how to perform a search. Method Description Index This button appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Address Type”. The index characters can be searched based on the character that was specified when the destination was registered. Address Type This button appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Index”. The destination types can be searched based on the type that was specified when the destination was registered. Search Type in the destination name or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. Address search An LDAP search can be performed if an LDAP server is being used, for example, for user management. Search the addresses registered on the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. A basic search, where a keyword is entered, and an advanced search, where multiple conditions are used to narrow down the search, are available.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-12 ! Detail In order to perform an Address search, settings for the Address server must be specified from Administrator mode. For details, refer to “Enabling LDAP” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. For details on performing an Address search, refer to “Selecting a destination with an Address search” on page 5-21. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [Address Book], and then touch [Search]. 3 Touch [Detail Search]. 4 Touch [Name] or [Address] to select the search to be performed.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-13 5 Type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [OK]. The Detailed Search screen appears again, and the search results are displayed. 6 Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. Directly specifying an e-mail destination 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-14 2 Touch [E-Mail] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the address of the destination. 3 Type in the address of the destination, and then touch [OK]. – To specify additional destinations, repeat steps 2 and 3. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 2 Note Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. Prefixes and suffixes must first be registered in Administrator mode.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-15 Directly specifying an SMB destination Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [PC (SMB)] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path. Parameter Description Host Name Specify the host name (in uppercase letters) or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. File Path Type the path to the destination folder in uppercase letters. User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Reference Check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-16 3 Enter the information for the destination, and then touch [OK]. – To check the contents of the shared folders, touch [Reference]. – To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 2 Reminder If more than the following number of computers or workgroups exist on the network (subnet) that this machine belongs to, browsing over the network may not be performed correctly. Workgroups: 128 Computers: 128 Directly specifying an FTP destination Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Host Name Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. File Path Specify the path to the destination folder. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-17 Detailed Settings 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [FTP] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path. Parameter Description Port Number Type in the port number. PASV Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Touch [Yes] or [No]. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Touch [Yes] or [No].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-18 3 Type in the destination information. – To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 4 To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then specify the settings. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-19 Directly specifying a WebDAV destination Settings can be specified for the following. Detailed Settings 2 Note If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear. 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and then touch [Send]. 2 Touch [WebDAV] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path. Parameter Description Host Name Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. File Path Type (in uppercase letters) the path to the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Parameter Description Port Number Type in the port number. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. SSL Settings Select whether or not SSL is used with transmissions.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-20 3 Type in the destination information. – To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”. 4 To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then specify the settings. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-21 Selecting a destination with an Address search If LDAP server settings are specified in Administrator mode, [Address Search] appears in the screen. ! Detail For details on the LDAP server settings, refer to “Enabling LDAP” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Restrict”, [Address Search] does not appear. The position of [Address Search] can be changed from the User Settings screen. For details, refer to “Address Book Default” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 1 Touch [Address Search]. 2 If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-22 3 Select the desired search type. – When there is only one LDAP server – When there are multiple LDAP servers 4 Specify the search conditions. – If “Search” was selected, type in the keyword to be searched for, and then touch [Start Search].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-23 – If “Advanced Search” was selected, select the search condition types and type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [Start Search]. 5 Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-24 5.3 Specifying the transmission settings Settings that can be specified In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings can be specified for the following. File Type Communication Settings ! Detail For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. The “Digital Signature” parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings. Application Parameter Description Page reference File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25 Parameter Description Page reference E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. p. 5-29 URL Notification Setting Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. p. 5-30 E-Mail Encryption This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent. p. 5-31 Digital Signature This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are sent. p. 5-32 Parameter Description Page reference Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 5-33 Send & Print Settings can be specified to print a document when it is sent. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing. p. 5-49Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-25 File Type File Type Select the file format for sending the data. The following six file formats are available. 2 Note The “JPEG” setting cannot be selected for a received fax saved in a user box. “JPEG” cannot be selected for Bind TX. A compression method can be selected when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Encryption settings If the “PDF” or “Compact PDF” File Type setting is selected, the encryption level and stamp combination method can be specified. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. Compact PDF Select this setting to compress the data more than with the PDF format. This is used with full-color scan data. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. Compact XPS Select this setting to compress the data more than the XPS format and save. Parameter Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Document Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-26 Detail Settings of Encryption If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed permission settings can be specified. Stamp Combine Method 2 Note The date/time, page number and header/footer can be combined as text. Stamps are combined as images. In addition, the grouping of the data to be sent can be specified. Scan Setting 2 Note “Single Page” cannot be selected for Bind TX. 1 Touch [File Type] in a screen for selecting a destination. Parameter Description Printing Allowed Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If “Encryption Level” is set to “High level”, “Low Resolution” appears. Enable copying of text, images and other content Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted. Change Allowed Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data. Setting Description Image Select this setting to insert the text as an image. Text Select this setting to insert the text as text. Setting Description Single Page Select this setting to send a single file for each page of the document. Multi Page Select this setting to send the entire document as a single file. This setting cannot be selected if the “JPEG” File Type setting is selected.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-27 2 Select the file format. 3 If “PDF” or “Compact PDF” was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary. – The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-28 4 Specify the encryption settings. 5 To specify the stamp combination method, touch [Stamp Composition]. 6 Select the desired stamp combination method. 7 Touch [OK]. 8 Select the scan setting. 9 Touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-29 E-Mail Settings (Communication Settings) When data is sent, an e-mail message containing the document name can be sent to the specified e-mail address. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note If “Change the “From” Address” (displayed by touching [System Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Restrict User Access], then [Restrict Access to Job Settings]) is set to “Restrict”, the From address cannot be entered directly. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [E-Mail Settings]. Parameter Description Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. The document name specified later appears as the document name, even if the document name was specified in the File Document screen. A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. Subject The text specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. Touch [Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 64 characters can be entered. From The e-mail address specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. Body The text specified from Utility mode is displayed. Touch [Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 256 characters can be entered.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-30 3 Specify the e-mail transmission settings. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. URL Notification Setting (Communication Settings) Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. ! Detail The destinations that can be specified for “URL Notification Setting” include FTP servers, SMB servers or WebDAV servers. This feature does not function during e-mail transmissions, even if a setting is specified. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [URL Notification Setting].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-31 3 Specify the e-mail address where notifications will be sent. – Select a registered e-mail address. – Touch [Direct Input], and then specify the e-mail address for the destination of URL notifications. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Close]. E-Mail Encryption (Communication Settings) A setting can be specified for this parameter when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent. ! Detail For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-32 2 Touch [E-Mail Encryption]. 3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. Digital Signature (Communication Settings) This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are sent. ! Detail For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. This parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings. 1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-33 2 To add a digital signature, touch [Digital Signature], and then select the digital signature. 3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. Date/Time (Application) The scanning date and time can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. Parameter Description Date Format Select the format for the date. Time Format Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-34 2 Touch [Stamp/Composition]. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. 4 To add a date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and time settings.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-35 – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-36 European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction. – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-37 Page Number (Application) Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Starting Page Number Specify the starting page number. Starting Chapter Number Specify the starting chapter number. Page Number Type Select the format for the page number. Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-38 3 Touch [Page Number]. 4 To add page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page number settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-39 – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-40 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-41 Stamp (Application) Preset text, such as “URGENT”, can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note If “File Type” is set to “PDF” or “Compact PDF”, the stamps are added as images. They cannot be added as text. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [Stamp/Composition]. Parameter Description Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp, such as “URGENT”, “CIRCULAR” or “DO NOT COPY”. Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed. Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-42 3 Touch [Stamp]. 4 To specify a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings. – Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-43 – Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK]. – Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. – To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-44 – On the North American (inch) model: – On the European (metric) model: 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. Header/Footer (Application) Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/ footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode. ! Detail For details on registering headers/footers, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the information can be checked or changed when printing. Settings can be specified for the following.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-45 1 In the Application screen, touch [Stamp/Composition]. 2 Touch [Header/Footer]. Parameter Description Header Settings Select whether or not to print a header. If a header is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Footer Settings Select whether or not to print a footer. If a footer is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Pages Select the pages where the header/footer is to be printed (either all pages or 1st page only). Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-46 3 To print a header/footer, touch [Yes], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled. 4 To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/ Change Temporarily]. – The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-47 5 Under “Header Settings” or “Footer Settings”, touch [Print], and then specify the header/footer settings. – Text – Date/TimeSending a user box document 5 C550 5-48 – Others 6 Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and the text size. – Text Color – Text Size – To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-49 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 8 Touch [Close]. Send & Print (Application) Settings can be specified to print a document when it is scanned. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. 2 Touch [Send & Print]. Parameter Description Copies Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A number between 1 and 999 can be specified. Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Staple Select whether or not the prints will be stapled. If they will be stapled, select the number of staples and the position.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-50 3 To print a document while sending it, touch [Yes], and then specify the desired settings. 4 To select the staple position, touch [Corner] or [2 Position], and then touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-51 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Touch [Close].Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-52 5.4 Bind TX Available combined sending parameters Multiple documents can be sent together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be sent together. In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings can be specified for the following. File Type Communication Settings Application To perform a combined transmission 1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent. Parameter Description Page reference File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25 Parameter Description Page reference E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. p. 5-29 URL Notification Setting Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. p. 5-30 Parameter Description Page reference Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 5-33, p. 5-37, p. 5-41Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-53 2 Under “Action”, touch [Bind TX]. 3 Specify the combination order. – Select the two documents whose order is to be switched. – The documents are combined and transmitted in the order specified here.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-54 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Specify the destination and transmission settings. 6 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/ Bind TX)” on page 2-80. 7 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-55 ! Detail For details on specifying the destination and transmission settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 5-24. 2 Note Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-56 5.5 Checking settings before sending Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area to display the list of destinations. In this area, the selected settings can be checked. To change a destination, select it in this area. Settings can be checked and changed with the following. 1 Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area. The Broadcast Destinations list appears. 2 Select the desired destination from the list of registered destinations. Item Description Destination Settings The list of destinations can be viewed or changed, and destinations can be added. An address that was directly typed in can also be registered. Check E-Mail Settings The e-mail settings can be checked.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-57 3 Touch [Check Job Settings]. The Check Job Detailed Settings screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then check or change the setting. – If a setting is changed, the changed destination moves to the end of the list. 5 After checking the settings, touch [Close]. Deleting unnecessary destinations The selected destination can be deleted. 1 Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area. The Broadcast Destinations list appears.Sending a user box document 5 C550 5-58 2 Select the destination to be deleted from the list of registered destinations. 3 Touch [Delete]. The destination is deleted.6 Printing/sending a system user box documentPrinting/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-2 6 Printing/sending a system user box document 6.1 Overview of system user boxes The operations available after touching [Use Document] can be performed with the system user boxes as shown below. ! Detail Documents saved in system user boxes can be deleted or the document names can be changed. For details, refer to chapter 3, “Organizing user box documents” on page 3-2. Type Description Print documents Send documents Secure Print User Box This user box contains documents that were saved from the printer driver with an ID and password specified. The ID and password must be entered in order to check the document contents. o × Annotation User Box This user box contains documents saved from Fax/Scan mode or Copy mode. Previously specified text can be added to the documents when they are printed or transmitted. o o Encrypted PDF User Box This user box contains encrypted PDF documents saved from PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print. o × ID & Print User Box This user box appears when user authentication settings have been specified. A document can be printed after the user has entered the user name and password from a computer on the network. o × External Memory This user box appears when the optional local interface kit is installed. A document saved on external memory connected to the USB interface can be printed. o ×Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-3 6.2 Secure Print User Box Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional Finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. p. 4-19 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-4 To print a document (Mode 1) Follow the procedure described below when “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Mode 1”. 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-5 3 Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Type in the ID for the confidential document, and then touch [OK]. 5 Type in the password for the confidential document, and then touch [OK]. A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-6 6 Select the document to be printed. 7 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 8 Select the print settings. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-7 ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8. To print a document (Mode 2) Follow the procedure described below when “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Mode 2”. 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-8 3 Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Type in the ID for the secured document, and then touch [OK]. A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed and then touch [Enter Password].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-9 6 Type in the password for the secured document, and then touch [OK]. 7 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 8 Select the print settings. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings,refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-5.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-10 6.3 Annotation User Box Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. ! Detail The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w). Available parameters Description Page reference Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8 Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-8 Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/binding. p. 4-9 Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. p. 4-19 Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 4-33Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-11 To print a document 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [Annotation User Box], and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-12 4 Select the desired box, and then touch [OK]. A list of documents appears. 5 Select the document to be printed. 6 Under “Action”, touch [Print].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-13 7 Select the print settings. 8 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/ Combine)” on page 2-79. 9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-8. Available transmission parameters Document data saved in user boxes can be sent using four different methods. Method Description E-mail Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment. PC (SMB) Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. FTP Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Document data is sent to the specified server on the network.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-14 2 Note Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent. Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. ! Detail Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with an Address search. Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions. In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings can be specified for the following. File Type Method Description Page reference Address book destination Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 5-8 Group destinations Multiple destinations can be registered together with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations. p. 5-9 Direct input With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when sending data to a destination that is not already registered. p. 5-13 Address search Select this method when an LDAP server is used. Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be searched for the address that corresponds to the specified conditions. p. 5-21 Parameter Description Page reference File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-15 Communication Settings Application To send a document 1 In the Annotation User Box screen, select the document to be sent. Parameter Description Page reference E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. p. 5-29 URL Notification Setting Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. p. 5-30 Parameter Description Page reference Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. p. 5-33 Send & Print Settings can be specified to print a document when it is sent. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing. p. 5-49 Stamp Element The format of previously added text or distribution numbers can be changed. p. 6-17Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-16 2 Under “Action”, touch [Send]. 3 Specify the destination and transmission settings. 4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen to check a preview image. – For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/ Bind TX)” on page 2-80. 5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings,refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-5.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-17 2 Note Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name. Changing the text The format for text or distribution numbers is first specified for documents saved in the Annotation User Box. This information can be changed when the document is sent. Settings can be specified for the following. 1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination. Parameter Description Secondary Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed. Density Select the density for the annotation numbers that are printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers that are printed. Print Position Select the printing position.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-18 2 Touch [Stamp Element]. The Change Text screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the setting. – Touch [Secondary Field], type in the text to be added, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-19 – Touch [Date/Time], select the format for the date and time to be printed, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Density], touch the button for the desired text density, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Number Type], select the format for the numbering, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-20 – Touch [Print Position], select the printing position, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-21 6.4 Encrypted PDF User Box In order to print a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, the password specified when the document was saved must be entered. ! Detail Documents are saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box by using PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print. For details on saving documents, refer to the manual for the corresponding software. 2 Note When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document. Printing 1 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-22 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK]. A list of documents appears. 4 Select the document to be printed.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-23 5 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. 6 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. Deleting 1 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-24 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the document to be deleted.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-25 5 Under “Action”, touch [Delete]. 6 Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-26 6.5 ID & Print User Box This user box appears if user authentication is applied. If an appropriate user is logged on this machine, documents can be printed. Document data, which is printed from a computer on the network by entering the user name and password, is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box. When documents are saved in ID & Print User Box, the following keys appear on the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and then touch the desired key. 2 Note For details on saving document data sent for print jobs from a computer to ID & Print User Box, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations]. ! Detail Even if user authentication is not applied or for print jobs saved by a public user, print jobs can also be saved in ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to “ID & Print Settings” on page 7-29. When printing is completed, the data in ID & Print User Box is deleted. Item Description [Begin Printing] A document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed without logging in. [Print & Login] A document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed when a user is logged in. [Login] Login only. After logging on, a document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed or deleted.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-27 Printing 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box]. 3 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-28 4 Select the document to be printed. 5 Under “Action”, touch [Print]. Deleting 1 Touch [Use Document]. 2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-29 3 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the document to be deleted. 5 Under “Action”, touch [Delete]. 6 Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-30 6.6 External Memory If the optional local interface kit is installed, a document saved on external memory can be printed from this machine. Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed. File types that can be printed - Only files with the format (extension) for PDF, JPEG, TIFF or XPS can be printed. - Files with the JPEG and XPS format cannot be printed double-sided and cannot have holes punched or be stapled. - PDF files up to version 1.6 can be printed with this machine. Available parameters Description Copies Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Color Select whether printing is in full color or in black and white. Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Binding Position Select the binding margin position for double-sided printing. Select a binding margin at the top, left or right side. Finishing For details on the settings that can be specified, refer to“Specifying Finishing settings” on page 4-9. Paper Select the paper drawer containing the paper to be printed on.Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-31 Document Details Select a file, and then touch [Document Details] to view information for the selected document, such as its modification date and the document name. To print a document 1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears. 2 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-32 3 Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory]. 4 Touch [OK]. – Of the saved files, only the names of files with a format that can be printed are displayed. – A maximum of 255 printable files can be displayed in the folder with the specified path. If there are more than 255 files in a single folder, it may take some time to display the file list. The configuration of the folders and files on the connected external memory is displayed. 5 Select the document to be printed. – The document to be printed can also be specified by typing in the path to the folder containing it. Touch [File Path], and then type in the path. – To open the folder containing the currently selected item, touch [Up]. – To view the contents of the folder, touch [Open].Printing/sending a system user box document 6 C550 6-33 – A maximum of 250 characters can be entered for the file path and file name. If the number of characters exceeds this limit, the file list cannot be displayed. 6 Touch [Print]. 7 Specify the print settings. 8 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel. To print an encrypted PDF file When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document.7 Specifying Utility mode parametersSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-2 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters 7.1 Settings that can be specified from Utility mode Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for setting the Utility mode parameters for the User Box functions. Utility mode parameters The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual. PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. Specifying settings with the utility is convenient since text can easily be typed in from your computer instead of with the machine’s control panel. Since some settings can only be specified with PageScope Web Connection, refer to the PageScope Web Connection User’s Guide for details. Parameter Description Page reference One-Touch/User Box Registration Create new user boxes. “Registering user boxes” on page 7-6 Administrator Settings Specify various settings, for example, for deleting documents from user boxes. “User Box Settings” on page 7-20 Specify limitations on the number of user boxes that can be registered for each user. “Maximum Number of User Boxes” on page 7-18 Specify settings for the ID & Print User Box. “ID & Print Settings” on page 7-29 Specify the password for the user box administrator. “User Box Administrator Setting” on page 7-31 Perform operations such as formatting the hard disk and deleting data. “HDD Setting” on page 7-34Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-3 7.2 User box permissions Types of users Users of various levels can use this machine. Other than machine administrators, user box administrators can use User Box functions. The following types of users can access the various user boxes. ! Detail To log on as the user box administrator, type “boxadmin” as the user name for user authentication and type the password specified in “User Box Administrator Setting” on page 7-31. Public user boxes and personal/group user boxes The operations indicated below can be performed with public user boxes, which can be accessed by all users, and with personal/group user boxes, which can only be accessed by specific users. *1 The operations can be performed only on user boxes created by the registered user. *2 User box administrators and administrators can perform operations without entering the password, even if a password has been set for the user box. Type Description Public user This user has access when user authentication settings have not been applied. Registered user These user are registered by the administrator when user authentication settings have been applied. User box administrator This user can log on as a box administrator when user authentication settings have been applied. This user can access all user boxes, regardless of whether a password has been specified. Administrator This user can manage the machine. This user can create, change or delete any user box, regardless of whether a password has been specified. Operation Create boxes View/download/ delete documents Change box settings Delete boxes User box type Public Personal/ group Public Personal/ group Public Personal/ group Public Personal/ group Public user o × o × o × o × Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o User box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o*2 × × × o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-4 7.3 Displaying settings screens Displaying the Administrator Settings screen 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [3 Administrator Settings], press the [3] key in the keypad. 3 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-5 – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The Administrator Settings screen appears. ! Detail If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” is set to “Mode 2” an incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on the “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-6 7.4 Registering user boxes New user boxes can be registered. The following types of user boxes can be registered. ! Detail If user authentication is canceled after personal user boxes are created, the personal user boxes become public user boxes. Bulletin board user boxes and relay user boxes can be created when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations]. If user authentication settings have been applied, be sure to type in the ID and password, and touch [Login] or press [Access] key. If authentication settings have not been applied, personal user boxes cannot be created. If optional fax kit FK-502 has been installed, confidential reception settings can be specified as advanced User Box functions. Type Description Public user boxes This shared user box can be accessed by everyone. Personal user boxes This user box for an individual can only be accessed by users that have logged on if user authentication settings have been applied. Group user boxes This user box can only be accessed by users who belong to the account and have logged on when account track settings have been specified. Annotation user boxes This user box is used when an image of the date/time or an annotation number is added to saved document data that is to be printed or transmitted. The type of text to be added can be specified when the document is being used. Annotation user boxes are registered in Administrator mode.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-7 Registering user boxes Settings can be specified for the following when registering. New screen 1/2 New screen 2/2 2 Reminder If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Parameter Description User Box No. The next available user box number is displayed. To specify a user box number, touch [User Box No.], and then use the keypad to type in the user box number (between 1 and 999999999). User Box Name Touch [User Box Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the user box name (20 characters or less). The same user box name can be specified for a multiple number of user boxes if the boxes have been given different user box numbers. Password Specify a password to limit access to the user box. Touch [Password], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the password (8 characters or less). Index Select the index characters. Type Depending on the user authentication and account track settings that have been specified, select “Public”, “Personal” or “Group”. If “Personal” was selected, specify the owner name. To change the owner, touch [Change Owner], and then select a different owner. If “Group” was selected, specify the owner account. In the Change Owner screen, select a different owner account. Parameter Description Auto Document Delete Time Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the user box. Confidential RX This parameter appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Select whether or not the confidential reception function is added to the user box. If the confidential reception function is added, type in the confidential reception password.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-8 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 3 Touch [2 Create User Box]. The Create User Box screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-9 4 Touch [1 Public/Personal User Box]. 5 Touch [New]. New screen 1/2 appears. 6 Specify the desired settings.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-10 7 Touch [Forward→]. New screen 2/2 appears. 8 Specify the desired settings. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 9 Touch [OK]. The user box is registered. ! Detail In the screen showing the list of user boxes, registered user boxes can be edited or deleted. To change the settings, select the user box, and then touch [Edit]. To delete a user box, select the user box, and then touch [Delete].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-11 Registering annotation user boxes Settings can be specified for the following when registering. New screen 1/3 New screen 2/3 New screen 3/3 2 Reminder If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters Parameter Description User Box No. The next available user box number is displayed. To specify a user box number, touch [User Box No.], and then use the keypad to type in the user box number (between 1 and 999999999). User Box Name Touch [User Box Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the user box name (20 characters or less). The same user box name can be specified for a multiple number of user boxes if the boxes have been given different user box numbers. Password Specify a password to limit access to the user box. Touch [Password], use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the password (8 characters or less). Parameter Description Count Up Select whether the count for the annotation number is formatted by jobs or by pages. Secondary Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed. Density Select the density for the annotation numbers that are printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers that are printed. Print Position Select the printing position. Primary Field Text can be added. A maximum of 40 characters can be entered. Parameter Description Auto Document Delete Time Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the user box.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-12 before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 Touch [3 One-Touch/User Box Registration] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [2 Create User Box] in the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen. 3 Touch [4 Annotation User Box].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-13 4 Touch [New]. New screen 1/3 appears. 5 Specify the desired settings. 6 Touch [Forward→]. New screen 2/3 appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-14 7 Specify the desired settings. The text can be specified in the corresponding screen. – Secondary Field – Date/TimeSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-15 – Density – Number Type – Print PositionSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-16 – Primary Field 8 Touch [Forward→]. New screen 3/3 appears. 9 Specify the desired settings. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 10 Touch [OK]. The user box is registered.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-17 ! Detail In the screen showing the list of user boxes, registered user boxes can be edited or deleted. To change the settings, select the user box, and then touch [Edit]. To delete a user box, select the user box, and then touch [Delete].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-18 7.5 Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify limitations on the number of user boxes that can be registered for each user. 1 Touch [3 One-Touch/User Box Registration] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [4 Maximum Number of User Boxes] in the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen. The Maximum Number of User Boxes screen appears. 3 Select a user type, and then select a user name. The maximum number of user boxes can be specified for the selected user.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-19 4 Specify the user box limitation settings. – A maximum between 0 and 1,000 user boxes can be specified. – If the maximum number of user boxes is set to “0”, new user boxes cannot be registered. – To specify no limit, touch [OFF] under “Max. No. of Use Boxes”. – To specify a limit, touch [ON] under “Max. No. of Use Boxes”, use the keypad to type in the maximum number of user boxes, and then touch [Apply]. 5 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-20 7.6 User Box Settings Displaying the User Box Settings screen 1 Touch [1 System Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [0 User Box Settings] in the System Settings screen. The User Box Settings screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-21 Delete Unused User Box Boxes containing no saved documents can be deleted as unused boxes. 1 Touch [1 Delete Unused User Box] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To delete the user boxes, touch [Yes].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-22 Delete Secure Print Documents All documents saved in the Secure Print User Box can be deleted. 1 Touch [2 Delete Secure Print Documents] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To delete the documents, touch [Yes].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-23 Auto Delete Secure Document Select the time until confidential documents are deleted after they are saved. 1 Touch [3 Auto Delete Secure Document] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To specify the time setting, touch [Yes], and then select the time period. – The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days. – To not delete the documents, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-24 Encrypted PDF Delete Time Select the time until encrypted PDF files are deleted after they are saved. 1 Touch [4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 To specify the time setting, touch [Yes], and then select the time period. – The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days. – To not delete the documents, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-25 ID & Print Delete Time Specify the length of time until documents are deleted from the ID & Print User Box after they are saved. ! Detail [ID & Print Delete Time] appears if user authentication settings have been specified. 1 Touch [5 ID & Print Delete Time] in the User Box Settings screen. 2 To automatically delete the documents, touch [Yes], and then select the time period.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-26 ! Detail The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days. 2 Note To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. Document Hold Setting Select whether or not documents are automatically deleted when they are transmitted or printed. 1 Touch [6 Document Hold Setting] in the User Box Settings screen. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 Specify the desired settings.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-27 – To not delete the document when it is printed or transmitted, touch [ON]. – To delete the document when it is printed or transmitted, touch [OFF]. External Memory Function Settings Select whether or not external memory connected to the machine can be used. ! Detail The default setting for saving a document to external memory is “OFF” (cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is “OFF” (cannot be saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator mode so that documents can be saved. Settings can be specified for the following. Parameter Description Save Document Select whether or not a scanned document can be saved on external memory when [Save Document] is touched in User Box mode. Print Document Select whether or not a document saved on external memory can be printed or sent when [Use Document] is touched in User Box mode.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-28 1 In the User Box Settings screen, touch [7 External Memory Function Settings]. 2 Specify the desired settings. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-29 7.7 ID & Print Settings Settings concerning the ID & Print User Box can be specified. Settings can be specified for the following. 2 Note Public user jobs are printed or stored when printing by a public user is permitted. Jobs without authentication are printed or stored when “Print without Authentication” is permitted. 1 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. 3 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. Parameter Description ID & Print “ON”: All the general print jobs and ID & Print jobs from the registered user are saved in the ID & Print User Box. “OFF”: The ID & Print jobs from the registered user are saved in the ID & Print User Box. General print jobs are output without being saved in the ID & Print User Box. Public User “Print Immediately”: Public user jobs or jobs without user authentication information are printed without being saved in the ID & Print User Box. “Save”: Public user jobs or jobs without user authentication information are saved in the ID & Print User Box.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-30 4 Touch [ID & Print Settings]. 5 Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-31 7.8 User Box Administrator Setting Select whether or not use by the box administrator is permitted. (The default setting is “Allow”.) When logging on as the box administrator, type “boxadmin” as the user name in the user authentication screen, and then type in the password specified in step 5. 0 If both user authentication and account track settings are not applied, a user box administrator cannot be specified. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on operations that can be performed by box administrators, refer to “User box permissions” on page 7-3. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [2 User Box Administrator Setting] in the Security Setting screen. The User Box Administrator Setting screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-32 3 Select whether a user box administrator will be specified. – To prohibit it, touch [Restrict], and then touch [OK]. – To allow it, touch [Allow], and then continue with step 4. 4 Type in the password for the user box administrator (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3. A screen for retyping the password appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-33 5 Type in the password again, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The password for the user box administrator is specified and use by the user box administrator is permitted. 2 Reminder If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-34 7.9 HDD Setting Various hard disk operations are available, such as those for erasing data from the hard disk and for checking the amount of free space on the hard disk. Settings can be specified for the following. ! Detail The following data is erased when the hard disk is formatted. Program destinations Address book destinations Authentication method settings User authentication settings Account track settings User boxes User box settings Documents in user boxes Secure print user box settings Bulletin board user box settings Parameter Description Check HDD Capacity The amount of hard disk space that is used and that remains can be checked. Overwrite Temporary Data Select whether mode 1 or mode 2 is used as the method for overwriting data on the hard disk. When the security kit is installed, select whether encryption or overwriting is given priority. Overwrite All Data All data can be overwritten. HDD Lock Password Specify the hard disk locking password HDD Encryption Setting Specify the setting for encrypting the data on the hard disk. A setting is required only when the optional security kit is installed. Format HDD Format the hard disk.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-35 Check HDD Capacity The amount of space on the hard disk can be checked. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [1 Check HDD Capacity] in the HDD Setting screen. The Check HDD Capacity screen appears. 4 Touch [Close]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The HDD Setting screen appears again.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-36 Overwrite Temporary Data The setting for overwriting data on the hard disk can be specified. (The default setting is “Mode 1”.) This machine destroys data by overwriting all data in the entire area where an image was stored when that image data on the hard disk is considered unnecessary. In addition, destroying the structure of data other than image data prevents the disclosure of the data in case the hard disk is stolen. 2 Reminder When the setting for giving priority to encryption or overwriting is changed, the hard disk must be formatted. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [2 Overwrite Temporary Data] in the HDD Setting screen. – Select “Encryption Priority” when performing high-level security encryption processing. However, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk differs depending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” is selected. Normally, “Encryption Priority” is selected. – If “Overwrite Priority” is selected, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk is performed depending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” is selected. Select this setting when the format of the data written to the hard disk is considered important. Setting Description Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with the letter “A” (0x61) → VerifiedSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-37 – When the security kit is not installed: – When the security kit is installed: The Overwrite Temporary Data screen appears. 4 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes], and then select the overwriting method. – If the security kit is installed, touch [Encryption Priority] or [Overwrite Priority]. 5 Touch [OK]. – If “Encryption Priority” and “Overwrite Priority” was changed, continue with step 6. The mode for overwriting temporary data is specified.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-38 6 If a message appears, asking whether to reformat the hard disk, touch [Yes]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [No]. 7 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. 8 If an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match, the Administrator Settings screen appears. In this screen, touch [Format HDD]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-39 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly. In order to enable the setting specified in the Overwrite Temporary Data screen, “Overwrite Temporary Data” must be set to “Yes”. Overwrite All Data The machine can be set to overwrite all data on the hard disk. The methods for overwriting data are described below. 2 Reminder Perform this operation before disposing of the machine. Before performing this operation, be sure to consult with your service representative. 2 Note The operation for Mode 1 takes approximately 40 minutes. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. Setting Description Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Overwritten with random 1- byte numbers → Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Verified Mode 4 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with random number Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0xaa Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0xaa → VerifiedSpecifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-40 – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [3 Overwrite All Data] in the HDD Setting screen. The Overwrite All Data screen appears. 4 Select the desired method for overwriting data on the hard disk, and then touch [Overwrite]. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to overwrite the data. 5 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To return to the Overwrite All Data screen without overwriting the data, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-41 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. All data on the hard disk is overwritten. 2 Reminder While the data is being overwritten, do not use the main power switch to turn the machine off and on. When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly. HDD Lock Password The password for locking the hard disk can be specified. The hard disk locking password is extremely important in order to protect the data on the hard disk. Keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. If the password is lost, significant restoration operations will be required for recovery.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-42 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [4 HDD Lock Password] in the HDD Setting screen. The HDD Lock Password screen appears. From this screen, the password can be changed or the hard disk locking password can be canceled. 4 Type in the password (20 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – Do not specify a password that is the same character repeated 20 times. – For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3. A screen for retyping the password appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-43 5 Type the password specified in step 4, and then touch [OK]. The message “Turn the main switch OFF and ON.” appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. The hard disk locking password is set. 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not be lost.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-44 HDD Encryption Setting If the security kit is installed, the machine can be set to encrypt the hard disk. ! Detail [HDD Encryption Setting] appears when security kit SC-503 is installed. If the encryption key is specified or changed, data saved on the hard disk may no longer be available. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [HDD Encryption Setting] in the HDD Setting screen. A message appears, requesting confirmation to specify the setting. 4 To encrypt the data, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The HDD Encryption Setting screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-45 5 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the new encryption key. To delete the entered encryption key, press the [C] (clear) key. The HDD Encryption Setting screen appears again. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-46 2 Note The encryption key must be registered by the machine’s administrator. The encryption key must contain 20 characters. Do not specify an encryption key that contains the same character repeated 20 times. Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that it will not be lost. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly. Format HDD The hard disk can be formatted. 2 Note When the hard disk is formatted, the data saved on the hard disk is erased. 1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to “Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4. 2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen. 3 Touch [Format HDD] in the HDD Setting screen. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to format the hard disk.Specifying Utility mode parameters 7 C550 7-47 4 To format the hard disk, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To return to the HDD Settings screen without formatting the hard disk, touch [No]. The hard disk is formatted. 5 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the changes to the settings. – To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/ Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off; otherwise, the machine may not function correctly.8 AppendixAppendix 8 C550 8-2 8 Appendix 8.1 Error message list If any of the following error messages appear, perform the operations described below. 2 Note For details on the network settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Message Cause and remedy Cannot connect to the network. A connection to the network could not be established. Check if the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, check that the Network Setting parameters on the Administrator mode have been correctly specified. The destination cannot be selected because the number of destinations has exceeded the max. number of broadcasting possible. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Image could not be saved in the User Box due to insufficient HDD capacity check log. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data again. The number of User Boxes has reached its maximum. The number of user boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary user boxes, and then try registering new boxes again. This user box has reached its maximum number of documents allowed. The number of documents that can be saved in a user box has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try saving the document again. The number of programmed jobs has reached the max. allowance. Wait until a programmed job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job.Appendix 8 C550 8-3 8.2 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen: Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size: Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols).Appendix 8 C550 8-4Appendix 8 C550 8-5 Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read. 1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON]. The keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 Note The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged.Appendix 8 C550 8-6 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch [←] and [→] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. List of Available Characters space Alphanumeric characters/ symbolsAppendix 8 C550 8-7 8.3 Glossary Term Definition 10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. Adobe® Flash® Software developed by Adobe Systems, Inc. (formaly developed by Macromedia, Inc.), and used to create data combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a keyboard and a mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact, and they can be accessed with the Web browser plug-in. anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering “anonymous” as the account name. Auto IP A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from the address space of 169.254.0.0. bit Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1. Bit-mapped Font Fonts that are represented by a set of dots to form the character. Dithering may occur if the character size is increased. BMP Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms. You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when saved. Byte Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Configured as 1 byte equals 8 bits. Compact PDF Compression method for reducing the data amount using the PDF format when converting color documents to data. The highest compression efficiency is achieved by identifying the text and image regions and using the resolution and compression method most appropriate for each region. The compact PDF format can be selected when converting documents to data using the scanning functions of this machine. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark variation is said to have a high contrast. Default The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is selected. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a “gateway” to access computers not on the same LAN Density An indication of the amount of darkness in the image Density Adjustment The function that adjusts the color tones of an output device, such as a printer or monitorAppendix 8 C550 8-8 DHCP Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies the network settings from the server. With collective management of the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid duplication of an address and you can build a network easily. Dither A method of using only black and white to create the illusion of different shades of gray. The process is simpler than with error diffusion; however, some irregularities may occur. DNS Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment. DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and understand IP addresses. DPI (dpi) Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet LAN transmission line standard File Extension The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file formats. The file extension is added after a period, for example, “.bmp” or “.jpg”. FTP Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network. Gradation The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases, smoother brightness variations can be reproduced. Grayscale Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information from black to white Halftone The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image through varying sizes of black and white dots Hard Disk Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be stored even if the power is turned off. HTTP Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips can be exchanged with the expressive form information. ID & Print Function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver when performing user authentication. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers on to a computer IP Address A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devices, including computers, which are connected to the Internet. JPEG Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is “.jpg”.) The compression ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as photographs. Term DefinitionAppendix 8 C550 8-9 Kerberos A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on the network. LAN Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/ IP network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used to access a database for managing environment information and the e-mail addresses of network users. Memory Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is turned off the data may or may not be erased. Multi-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains multiple pages OS Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling the system of a computer. PASV Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, preventing the file from being sent. PDF Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically formatted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the PostScript format, you can use the free Adobe Reader software to view documents. Pixel An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image. Plug-and-play Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a peripheral device is connected to a computer Port Number The number that identifies the transmission port for each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI Abbreviation for Pixels Per Inch. Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. This measurement indicates the number of image pixels contained within 1 inch. Preview A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print or scan job Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device Property Attribute information When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the file. Protocol The rules that allow computers to communicate with other computers or peripheral devices Proxy Server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections Term DefinitionAppendix 8 C550 8-10 Resolution Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print matter correctly Scanning With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen Frequency Indicates the density of dots used to create the image Single-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains only a single page SMB Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft Windows. SSL/TLS Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web server and browser. Subnet Mask The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are higher than the IP address. TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP addresses to identify each network device. Thumbnail A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file (the image displayed when the file was opened) TIFF Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is “.tif”.) Depending on the tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN The interface standard for imaging devices, such as scanners and digital cameras, and for applications, such as graphics software. In order to use a TWAIN-compliant device, the TWAIN driver is required. Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer USB Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer. Web Browser Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for viewing Web pages Term Definition9 IndexIndex 9 C550 9-2 9 Index 9.1 Index Numerics 1-Sided/2-Sided ...............................4-8 A Address search ..............................5-21 Administrator Settings screen ..........7-4 Annotation User Box ............6-10, 7-11 Auto Delete Secure Document .......7-23 B Background Adjustment ................2-52 Bind TX ...........................................5-52 Book Copy .....................................2-58 C Caution explanation .......................x-18 Changing document name .............3-10 Changing text .................................6-17 Chapters .........................................4-29 Check HDD Capacity .....................7-35 Check Job ......................................5-56 Check Job Settings ........................2-76 Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..........................................2-77 Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings ..........................................2-77 Color ...............................................2-50 Combined printing ..........................4-66 Control panel ....................................1-8 Copies ..............................................4-8 Copy protect ..................................4-44 Cover Sheet ...................................4-19 Creating user boxes .........................7-6 Current Jobs .................................. 2-69 D Date/Time ............................ 4-33, 5-33 Delete Secure Print Documents .... 7-22 Delete Unused User Box ............... 7-21 Deleting documents ........................ 3-8 Density .......................................... 2-49 Detail ............................................. 2-76 Detail - Check Original Settings .... 2-75 Detail - Check Scan Settings ........ 2-74 Detail explanation ...........................x-18 Digital Signature ............................ 5-32 Direct input .................................... 2-24 Document Details .......................... 3-16 Document Hold Setting ................. 7-26 Document names ............................ 2-4 Duplicating documents ................. 3-14 E E-Mail Encryption .......................... 5-31 E-Mail Settings .............................. 5-29 Encrypted PDF Delete Time .......... 7-24 Encrypted PDF User Box .... 2-38, 6-21 Entering text .................................... 8-3 Erase ............................................. 2-56 Error message list ............................ 8-2 F File Document ................................. 3-2 File Type .............................. 2-44, 5-25 Finishing .......................................... 4-9 Format HDD .................................. 7-46Index 9 C550 9-3 G Glossary ...........................................8-7 Group destinations ...........................5-9 H HDD Encryption Setting .................7-44 HDD Lock Password ......................7-41 HDD Setting ...................................7-34 Header/Footer ......................4-61, 5-44 I Icon ................................................1-12 ID & Print Delete Time ....................7-25 ID & Print Settings ..........................7-29 ID & Print User Box ........................6-26 Insert Sheet ....................................4-24 J Job History .....................................2-70 Job List ...........................................2-67 Job List - Delete .............................2-68 Job List - Job Details .....................2-68 L Left panel .......................................2-67 M Maximum Number of User Boxes .............................................7-18 Moving documents ........................3-12 N Note explanation ............................x-18 O Original Settings .............................2-64 Original Type ..................................2-40 Overwrite All Data ..........................7-39 Overwrite Temporary Data .............7-36 P Page Margin .................................. 4-16 Page Number ...................... 4-36, 5-37 Preview .......................................... 2-78 Previewing ..................................... 3-19 Print settings ................................... 4-6 Printing and saving ........................ 2-32 R Registered destinations ................... 5-8 Reminder explanation ....................x-18 Resolution ..................................... 2-43 S Saving copy documents ................ 2-13 Saving in User Box mode .............. 2-27 Saving scanned data ..................... 2-17 Scan Settings ................................ 2-39 Scan Size ...................................... 2-60 Searching for a destination ........... 5-11 Searching for user box name .......... 3-6 Secure Print User Box ........... 2-36, 6-3 Send & Print .................................. 5-49 Sending documents ........................ 5-2 Separate Scan ............................... 2-50 Settings when using documents ... 2-75 Sharpness ..................................... 2-54 Simplex/Duplex ............................. 2-42 Stamp .................................. 4-41, 5-41 Stamp Repeat ............................... 4-53 System user boxes .......................... 6-2 T Text entry ........................................ 8-3 Touch panel ................................... 1-11Index 9 C550 9-4 U URL Notification Setting .................5-30 Use Document .................................4-2 User authentication ..........................2-2 User Box Administrator Setting .....7-31 User box destinations ....................2-22 User box permissions ......................7-3 User Box Settings ..........................7-20 User’s guide conventions ...............x-18 User’s guides .................................x-20 Utility mode ......................................7-2 W Warning explanation ......................x-18Copyright A00J-9644-44 2006 2008. 4 http://konicaminolta.com User’s Guide [Advanced Function Operations]bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings].................................................................................................................. 3-4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-2 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-2 Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-5 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-5 [Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-6 [Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-7 [Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-7 4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Operating instructions........................................................................................................................ 4-9 Operation using the Touch Panel ...................................................................................................... 4-9 Operation using the Keypad .............................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10 4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-10 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-10bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-2 [Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-10 [Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-10 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Toolbar........................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13 List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [History]............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 [Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18 4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-21 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-22 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-5 5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-5 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-5 [File List]............................................................................................................................................. 5-6 5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-7 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-7 Deleting a document.......................................................................................................................... 5-9 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-3 6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-5 6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-7 Scanning a document........................................................................................................................ 6-7 Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-8 Retrieving a document from an external memory.............................................................................. 6-9 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-10bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-3 6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-11 [Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-11 [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-11 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-13 [Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-14 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-14 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-15 Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-16 Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-16 [Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-16 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-17 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-18 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-18 6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-19 6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-21 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-21 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-22 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-23 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2 Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-2 7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-3 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-4 7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-5 7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-7 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-2 Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-2 Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-2 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-3 [OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-4 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-2 Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-2 Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-2 Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-3 9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-4 9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-4 9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-5 9.3.3 [Language Setting]............................................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-7bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-4 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-7 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-7 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................... 9-8 [Default Tab Density Settings]............................................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings]............................................................................................................................ 9-9 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9 [Address Book Index Default] ............................................................................................................ 9-9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-10 [Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-11 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-12 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-12 Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-12 Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-13 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-2 10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-2 Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-2 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-2 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-4 10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-4 10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-5 10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-7 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-7 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book..................................... 10-8 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document................................................................. 10-9 10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 10-9 10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................... 10-9 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-2 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-31 Introductionbizhub 423/363/283/223 1-2 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively, please read this User's Guide. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. User's guide CD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on user box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions [Trademarks/Copyrights] This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub 423/363/283/223 1-4 1.2 Use conditions 1 1.2 Use conditions Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP. Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country where this machine is used. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users. i-Option LK-103 v2 may not be available depending on the area. For details, contact your service representative.bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations.bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-6 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 d Reference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.3.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y).2 Overviewbizhub 423/363/283/223 2-2 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function The following describes the overview of each function. Reference - To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required. - A Hard Disk must be installed in the MFP in order to use the advanced function. - For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. - To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application. 2.1.1 Supported function table The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications. 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel. - The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as application keys. - Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added function. - To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed. For details, refer to page 3-2. Web Browser Image panel PDF processing Searchable PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-103 v2 o o o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o obizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below. Reference - When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used. Function Overview Reference Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 in the MFP. By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents. Also, through a Web browser, you can operate PageScope Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes. p. 4-2 p. 5-2 Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 in the MFP. Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading to sending a document. You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using PageScope Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel. p. 6-2 PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 in the MFP. Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function. p. 7-2 Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions. p. 8-2 My Panel This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. p. 9-2 My Address This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. p. 10-23 Assigning Application Keysbizhub 423/363/283/223 3-2 3.1 Overview 3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel. 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys. Reference - The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 in the MFP. - The My Panel function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. No. Name Description 1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key. If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details, refer to page 3-3. 2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-4. 1 2 3bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Overview 3 3.1.2 [Application Menu] Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu]. To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from the [Application Menu]. 3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-4. No. Name Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 3-4 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed. 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings]. 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [System Settings]. 5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings]. 6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function.bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 7 Select a function to be assigned. 8 Press [OK]. The function is assigned to the application key.4Web Browser Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 4-2 4.1 Overview 4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations. - Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet. - Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet. - Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet or intranet. - Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using PageScope Web Connection. - When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. d Reference For details on using PageScope Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-2. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-2. 4.1.2 Specifications Specifications for Web Browser The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Item Specifications Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup language HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2 Supported script language Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript) Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2 Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier Supported SSL/TLS versions SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Supported character codes Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859- 1), Unicode (UTF-8) Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering PDF viewer Adobe® Reader ® LE Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Overview 4 Restrictions on Flash Player There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser. - The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported. - The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported. - The context menu is not supported. - The print function of Flash is not supported. - The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported. - The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported. - The favorite function of Flash is not supported. - The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported. - The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed. Reference - If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed. - When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17. d Reference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. [Web Browser Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Network Settings]. 5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting]. 6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK]. Reference - If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-6 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. [Function Permission] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track]. 5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration]. 6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit]. % If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public]. 7 Press [Function Permission]. 8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. Reference - This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Web Browser Setting]. - Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User Access]. - If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser. The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required. Reference - For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative. [Web browser contents access] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Security Settings]. 5 Press [Security Details]. 6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-8 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4 Basic operation 4.4.1 Screen components The Web browser screen has the following components. Reference - When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11. No. Name Description 1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always displayed on the Web Browser screen. For details, refer to page 4-12. 2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen. Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen. 3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using the tab located at the bottom of the screen. Press [e] in the active tab to close the window. 4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents. If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed. 1 4 3 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.2 Operating instructions Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad of the Control Panel. Reference - Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort. Operation using the Touch Panel Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. - To select an item, press a desired item. - If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it. - If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen. - To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar. Operation using the Keypad You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-10 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.3 How to enter text If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. Entering text Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen. - To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift]. - You can also enter numbers using the Keypad. Reference - To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number. - To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel. - To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo]. - Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. - When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears. 4.4.4 Screen display mode There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen. [Normal] This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. (The default is set to [Normal]. ) [Just-Fit Rendering] The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. [Smart-Fit Rendering] The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed. d Reference For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser. Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume. - To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel. - To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel. - Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-12 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5 Toolbar The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure various settings. 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar. Icon Name Description Back Brings you back to the previous page. Next Brings you to the next page. Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents. If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops. Home Displays the page registered as the home. By default, "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" is registered. For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16. [Favorites] - [List] Displays the list of registered favorites. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Favorites] - [Add] Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL. For details, refer to page 4-14. [History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then. For details, refer to page 4-14. [Print] Prints the currently displayed contents. For details, refer to page 4-15. [Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-15.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List] Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you to access the corresponding URL. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. List of favorites Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add] (Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. ) Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press [OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites. - To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen. - It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title. Reference - For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user. Item Description [List View]/[Thumbnail View] Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view. [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of favorites. Item Description [Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window. [Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite. Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Up] Brings you above the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Down] Brings you below the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Delete] Deletes the selected favorite. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-14 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.4 [Address] Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address. Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press [OK] or [Open New Window]. Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold up to 100 input history records. Reference - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all data entries. - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user. 4.5.5 [History] Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each user. [Display History] Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. Item Description [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display history between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of display history. Item Description [Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window. [Delete] Deletes the selected display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.6 [Print] Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.5.7 [Menu] Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-16. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-16 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu screen, and enter the administrator password. 4.6.1 [Page Operation] In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. 4.6.2 [Display] In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display. Item Description [Use for Home Page] * Registers the displayed page as the home page. [Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the list displays the corresponding page. Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. [Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is. [Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display size. Press the key to adjust the page display size. Item Description [Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering], and [Smart-Fit Rendering]. For details, refer to page 4-10. [Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents. [Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents. • [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]).bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings] * Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security] * Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies] * Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache] * Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy] * Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information] * Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log] * Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-18 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-20 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse...] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-22 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts.5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function)bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-2 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-2. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.2 Screen components 5 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta.com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-6 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-7. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-8 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents)] check box to select all documents.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-10 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted.6 Image Panelbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-2 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. d Reference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel 6 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. d Reference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-16. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-7. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-10. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-11. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-14. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-15. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List]bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-16. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-17.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixedbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-8 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-10 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. d Reference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-17. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNGbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-12 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-14 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-16 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. d Reference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytesbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-20 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. d Reference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-22 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted.7 PDF Processing Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-2 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-3). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-4). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-7). d Reference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties 7 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level.bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-6 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-2. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.4 Direct Print 7 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. d Reference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations].8 Searchable PDF functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-2 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. d Reference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-4. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 ptbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted.bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. d Reference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-4. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized.9 My Panel Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 9-2 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. d Reference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information d Reference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-2. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. d Reference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-21. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-12. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. d Reference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-13. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-6. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-6. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-7. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-9. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-11. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-12. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-12. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-13.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-6 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-8 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. d Reference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. d Reference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-10 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-12 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing].bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description10 My Address functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 10-2 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. d Reference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. d Reference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-6 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. d Reference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-8 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search].11 Indexbizhub 423/363/283/223 11-2 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing ....................................................................5-2 Acquiring my panel ......................................................9-3 Address book ............................................................10-4 Application key ....................................................3-2, 3-4 Application menu ........................................................3-3 C Cache ..........................................................................5-2 Cellular phone/PDA .........................................6-10, 6-17 Customizing ..............................................3-4, 6-21, 9-5 D Deleting .......................................................................5-9 Display mode of web browser ...................................4-10 Displaying ..................................................................4-19 E Entering text in web browser ....................................4-10 External memory .......................................................6-15 F Flash player .................................................................4-3 G Group ........................................................................10-5 I Image panel ...................................... 2-3, 6-2, 6-3, 6-21 Image panel operation ................................................6-5 J Just-fit rendering .......................................................4-10 L Logging in ....................................................................5-4 Logging out .................................................................5-4 M Main menu ...................................................................9-4 My address ........................................................2-3, 10-2 My address book ............................................10-2, 10-9 My address book acquisition ....................................10-3 My panel ......................................................2-3, 9-2, 9-4 My panel settings ........................................................9-5 O OCR .............................................................................8-3 Opening user boxes ....................................................5-5 Operating web browser ...............................................4-9 P PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-2 PDF processing .................................................. 2-3, 7-2 Photo .........................................................................6-18 PIN code ....................................................................6-17 Print ...........................................................................6-14 Printing ............................................................. 4-18, 5-7 Public address book ..................................................10-2 R Restriction of web browser .........................................4-5 Restrictions on my address .......................................10-3 Restrictions on my panel .............................................9-3 S Saving ........................................................................4-20 Scanning ......................................................................6-7 Screen components of image panel ...........................6-4 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-3 Screen components of web browser ..........................4-8 Searchable PDF .......................................... 2-3, 8-2, 8-4 Send tray ...................................................................6-16 Smart-fit rendering ....................................................4-10 Speaker .....................................................................4-11 Specifications ................................................... 4-2, 6-18 Specifications for web browser ...................................4-2 T Toolbar ......................................................................4-12 U Upload .......................................................................4-21 User box ............................................................. 5-5, 6-8 W Web browser .............................................. 2-3, 4-2, 4-4 Web browser information ..........................................4-17 Web browser settings ................................................4-16bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.2 Index by button 11 11.2 Index by button A Access log .................................................................4-17 Access to the Web browser contents .........................4-7 Address Book (Personal) ...........................................10-4 Address Book Index Default .......................................9-9 Application key 1 .........................................................3-2 Application key 2 .........................................................3-3 Application Key Settings .............................................3-4 Application menu ........................................................3-3 Application menu key ..................................................3-2 Authentication information ........................................4-17 C Cache ........................................................................4-17 Cellular Phone ...........................................................6-10 Color Selection Settings ............................................9-12 Combine Documents ................................................6-12 Cookie .......................................................................4-17 Copier Settings ............................................................9-7 Copy to Personal Addr ..............................................10-7 Copy to Shared Addr ................................................10-8 D Default Address Book ...............................................9-10 Default Address Type ................................................9-10 Default Tab ................................................9-7, 9-9, 9-11 Default Tab Density Settings .......................................9-8 Destination List ..........................................................6-15 Digital ID ......................................................................7-5 Direct Print ..................................................................7-7 Document Settings ....................................................6-13 Document Source List .................................................6-8 Document/Page ....................................6-11, 6-12, 6-13 E Easy Setting ................................................................9-8 Edit Document ...........................................................6-11 Encryption ...................................................................7-4 External memory ...............................................6-9, 6-15 F Favorites (Add) ..........................................................4-13 Favorites (View) .........................................................4-13 Function Permission ....................................................4-6 G Group ........................................................................10-5 H History .......................................................................4-14 I Initial Screen Settings ................................................9-13 Input Address ............................................................4-14 L Language Setting ........................................................9-6 M Main Menu Settings ...................................................9-12 Manage windows ......................................................4-17 Measurement Unit Settings .........................................9-6 Menu ..........................................................................4-16 My Panel Settings ........................................................9-5 O OCR operation setting .................................................8-3 P Page Operation .........................................................4-16 Password .....................................................................7-4 PDF Document Properties ...........................................7-3 Photo/Icon .................................................................6-19 Preview ......................................................................6-11 Print ...........................................................................4-15 Print Settings .............................................................6-14 Proxy .........................................................................4-17 R Return to Scan Dest ..................................................6-13 S Scan ............................................................................6-7 Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................9-9 Security ......................................................................4-17 Settings .....................................................................4-17 Shortcut key ........................................... 9-7, 9-10, 9-11 U User Box Settings ......................................................9-11 V View ...........................................................................4-16 W Web browser setting ...................................................4-5Copyright A1UD-9586AF-00 2010 2010. 1 http://konicaminolta.com magicolor 1650EN User’s Guide A034-9571-03Ax-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a magicolor 1650EN. You have made an excellent choice. Your magicolor 1650EN is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows, Macintosh and Linux environments. Trademarks KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. magicolor and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.x-2 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. 2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. 3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. 4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. 6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor. 8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. 9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above. 10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.x-3 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries. About Adobe Color Profile ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS CONTRACT CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. 1. DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, “Adobe” means Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110. “Software” means the software and related items with which this Agreement is provided. 2. LICENSE Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Adobe hereby grants you the worldwide, non-exclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use, reproduce and publicly display the Software. Adobe also grants you the rights to distribute the Software only (a) as embedded within digital image files and (b) on a standalone basis. No other distribution of the Software is allowed; including, without limitation, distribution of the Software when incorporated into or bundled with any application software. All individual profiles must be referenced by their ICC Profile description string. You may not modify the Software. Adobe is under no obligation to provide any support under this Agreement, including upgrades or future versions of the Software or other items. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you under the terms of this Agreement. You do not acquire any rights to the Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement. 3. DISTRIBUTION If you choose to distribute the Software, you do so with the understanding that you agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Adobe against any losses, damages or costs arising from any claims, lawsuits or other legal actions arising out of such distribution, including without limitation, your failure to comply with this Section 3. If you distribute the Software on a standalone basis, you will do so under the terms of this Agreement or your own license agreement which (a) complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement; (b) effectively disclaims all warranties and conditions, express or implied, on behalf of Adobe; (c) effectively excludes all liability for damages on behalf of Adobe; (d) states that any provisions that differ from this Agreement are offered by you alone and not Adobe and (e) states that the Software is available from you or Adobe and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange. Any distributed Software will include the Adobe copyright notices as included in the Software provided to you by Adobe.x-4 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Adobe licenses the Software to you on an “AS IS” basis. Adobe makes no representation as to the adequacy of the Software for any particular purpose or to produce any particular result. Adobe shall not be liable for loss or damage arising out of this Agreement or from the distribution or use of the Software or any other materials. ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE, EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTY, CONDITION, REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION, ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW, CUSTOM, USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INTEGRATION, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. The provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement, howsoever caused, but this shall not imply or create any continued right to use the Software after termination of this Agreement. 5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL ADOBE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS WHATSOEVER OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS, EVEN IF AN ADOBE REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS, DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN YOUR JURISDICTION. ADOBE’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE. Nothing contained in this Agreement limits Adobe’s liability to you in the event of death or personal injury resulting from Adobe’s negligence or for the tort of deceit (fraud). Adobe is acting on behalf of its suppliers for the purpose of disclaiming, excluding and/or limiting obligations, warranties and liability as provided in this Agreement, but in no other respects and for no other purpose. 6. TRADEMARKS Adobe and the Adobe logo are the registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States and other countries. With the exception of referential use, you will not use such trademarks or any other Adobe trademark or logo without separate prior written permission granted by Adobe. 7. TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated. Adobe has the right to terminate this Agreement immediately if you fail to comply with any term hereof. Upon any such termination, you must return to Adobe all full and partial copies of the Software in your possession or control. 8. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS If any part of the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the United States Export Administration Act or any other export law, restriction or regulation (the “Export Laws”), you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software. All rights to use the Software are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement.x-5 9. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws in force in the State of California as such laws are applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. This Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. All disputes arising out of, under or related to this Agreement will be brought exclusively in the state Santa Clara County, California, USA. 10. GENERAL You may not assign your rights or obligations granted under this Agreement without the prior written consent of Adobe. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Adobe, its agents, or employees, but only by an instrument in writing signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. When conflicting language exists between this Agreement and any other agreement included in the Software, the terms of such included agreement shall apply. If either you or Adobe employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or relating to this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees. You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete and exclusive statement of your agreement with Adobe which supersedes any prior agreement, oral or written, between Adobe and you with respect to the licensing to you of the Software. No variation of the terms of this Agreement will be enforceable against Adobe unless Adobe gives its express consent, in writing, signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) This ICC Profile (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) characterizes Japanese offset press on Coated paper and is fully compatible with ICC profile format. About “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” This is the standard for color reproduction of sheet-fed offset press on Coated paper made by TOYO INK MFG.CO., LTD. (“TOYO INK”). This standard is made from printing test with using TOYO INK’s sheet-fed offset printing inks and TOYO INK’s own printing conditions. “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” is compatible with “JAPAN COLOR”. Agreement 1. The reproduction of images on a printer or a monitor using this ICC Profile do not completely match the TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper. 2. Any and all copyrights of this ICC Profile shall remain in TOYO INK; therefore you shall not transfer, provide, rent, distribute, disclose, or grant any rights in this ICC Profile to any third party without the prior written consent of TOYO INK. 3. In no event will TOYO INK its directors, officers, employees or agents be liable to you for any consequential or incidential, either direct or indirect, damages(including damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like) arising out of the use or inability to use this ICC Profile. 4. TOYO INK shall not be responsible for answering any question related to this ICC Profile.x-6 5. All company names and product names used in this document is the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holder. This ICC Profile made by GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker and granted TOYO INK certain license to distribute by GretagMacbeth AG. TOYO Offset Coated 2.1 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004 DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("LICENSE AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE, INCLUDING THE DIC STANDARD SFC_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFM_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFU_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFC_FM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_AM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_FM2.0, DIC ABILIO SFC_AM1.0, DIC HY-BRYTE SFC_AM1.0, DIC STANDARD WEBC_AM2.1, DIC STANDARD WEBC_FM2.1, DIC NEWSCOLOR_AM1.0, DIC NEWSCOLOR_FM1.0, PROVIDED BY DIC HEREWITH, AND ANY CORRESPONDIMG ONLINE OR ELECTRONC DOCUMENTATION AND ALL UPDATES OR UPGRADES OF THE ABOVE THAT ARE PROVIDED TO YOU (COLLECTIVELY, THE "PROFILE"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR, IF ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY, AN ENTITY) AND DIC CORPORATION, A JAPANESE COMPANY ("DIC"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO USE THE PROFILE AND CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THESE TERMS, YOU MAY NOT USE THE PROFILE. 1. License Grant DIC grants you a gratis non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use the Profile and to allow your employees and authorized agents, if any, to use the Profile, solely in connection with their work for you, subject to all of the limitations and restrictions in this License Agreement. 2. Ownership The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Profile. You will own the rights in the media containing the recorded Profile, but DIC retains all right, title and interest, including all copyright and intellectual property rights, in and to, the Profile and all copies thereof. All rights not specifically granted in this License Agreement, including all copyrights, are reserved by DIC. 3. Term a. This License Agreement is effective until terminated. b. You may terminate this License Agreement by notifying DIC in writing of your intention to terminate this License Agreement and by destroying, all copies of the Profile in your possession or control. c. DIC may terminate this License Agreement without prior notice to you if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement (either directly or through your employees or agents), retroactive to the time of such failure to comply. In such event, you must immediately stop using the Profile and destroy all copies of the Profile in your possession or control. d. All provisions in this License Agreement relating to warranty disclaimers (Section 5) and the limitation of liability (Section 6) shall survive any termination of this License Agreement.x-7 4. License Method and Restrictions a. You may install and use the Profile on a single desktop computer; provided, however, that, notwithstanding anything contrary contained herein, you may not use the Profile on any network system or share, install or use the Profile concurrently on different computers, or electronically transfer the Profile from one computer to another or over a network. b. You may not make or distribute copies, fix, alter, merge, modify, adapt, sublicense, transfer, sell, rent, lease, gift or distribute all or a portion of the Profile, or modify the Profile or create derivative works based upon the Profile. c. You acknowledge that the Profile is not intended for any usage which may cause death or physical injury or environmental damage and agree not to use the Profile for such usage. d. You shall not use the Profile to develop any software or other technology having the same primary function as the Profile, including but not limited to using the Profile in any development or test procedure that seeks to develop like software or other technology, or to determine if such software or other technology performs in a similar manner as the Profile. e. DIC and other trademarks contained in the Profile are trademarks or registered trademarks of DIC in Japan and/or other countries. You may not remove or alter any trademark, trade names, product names, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Profile. This License Agreement does not authorize you to use DIC’s or its licensors’ names or any of their respective trademarks. 5. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER a. THE PROFILE IS PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, AND ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND COONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. DIC PROVIDES NO TECHNICAL SUPPORT, WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES FOR THE PROFILE. b. DIC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND QUIET ENJOYMENT. YOU SHALL ASSUME AND BE FULLY LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RISKS IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THE PROFILE. DIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROFILE IS FREE OF DEFECTS OR FLAWS OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, AND IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FORCORRECTING OR REPAIRING ANY DEFECTS OR FLAWS, FOR FEE OR GRATIS. NO RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WILL BE CONFERRED ON YOU UNLESS EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY DIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, COVER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE PROFILE AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF DIC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 7. General a. This License Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan, without giving effect to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible, and the remaining provisions of x-8 this License Agreement will remain in full force and effect. You hereby consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of Tokyo District Court to resolve any disputes arising under this License Agreement. b. This License Agreement contains the complete agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings, whether oral or written. You agree that any varying or additional terms contained in any written notification or document issued by you in relation to the Profile licensed hereunder shall be of no effect. c. The failure or delay of DIC to exercise any of its rights under this License Agreement or upon any breach of this License Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or of the breach. For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents Contents x-9 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer .......................................................... 1-2 Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2 Printer Parts ................................................................................................ 1-4 Front View............................................................................................. 1-4 Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-5 Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6 Rear View with Options......................................................................... 1-7 Printer Driver CD/DVD ................................................................................... 1-8 PostScript Drivers ....................................................................................... 1-8 PCL Drivers................................................................................................. 1-8 PPD Files .................................................................................................... 1-8 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD .......................................................... 1-9 Utilities......................................................................................................... 1-9 Documentation.................................................................................... 1-10 System Requirements ................................................................................. 1-11x-10 Contents 2 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 2-1 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 2-2 Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 2-4 Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-4 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 2-5 Windows Server 2008/Vista.................................................................. 2-5 Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 2-5 Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 2-5 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver .............................................. 2-6 Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 2-6 OK......................................................................................................... 2-6 Cancel................................................................................................... 2-6 Apply ..................................................................................................... 2-6 Help....................................................................................................... 2-6 Favorite Setting..................................................................................... 2-6 Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)........................................... 2-7 Basic Tab .................................................................................................... 2-8 Layout Tab .................................................................................................. 2-8 Cover Page Tab.......................................................................................... 2-8 Watermark/Overlay Tab.............................................................................. 2-8 Quality Tab.................................................................................................. 2-9 Other Tab.................................................................................................... 2-9 Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 2-10 3 Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only) .................................................. 3-1 Working with the Status Monitor .................................................................. 3-2 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3-2 Operating Environment ............................................................................... 3-2 Opening the Status Monitor ........................................................................ 3-2 Using the Status Monitor............................................................................. 3-2 Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts .............................................................. 3-3 Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert ...................................................... 3-3 Closing the Status Monitor ........................................................................... 3-3 4 Printer Control Panel and Configuration Menu .......................................... 4-1 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 4-2 Control Panel Indicators and Keys.............................................................. 4-2 Toner Supply Indicators .............................................................................. 4-4 Configuration Menu Overview ...................................................................... 4-5 Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-5 MAIN MENU................................................................................................ 4-6Contents x-11 PRINT MENU........................................................................................ 4-6 PAPER MENU ...................................................................................... 4-8 QUALITY MENU ................................................................................. 4-13 INTERFACE MENU ............................................................................ 4-17 SYSTEM DEFAULT............................................................................ 4-22 SERVICE MENU................................................................................. 4-26 LANGUAGE MENU................................................................................... 4-27 5 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 5-1 Print Media ..................................................................................................... 5-2 Media Types ................................................................................................... 5-3 Plain Paper.................................................................................................. 5-3 Thick Stock.................................................................................................. 5-4 Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-5 Labels.......................................................................................................... 5-6 Letterhead................................................................................................... 5-7 Postcards .................................................................................................... 5-7 Printable Area ................................................................................................ 5-8 Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-9 Page Margins.............................................................................................. 5-9 Loading Media .............................................................................................. 5-10 Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)........................................................................ 5-10 Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-10 Other Media ........................................................................................ 5-13 Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 5-13 Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead........................ 5-16 Tray 2........................................................................................................ 5-18 Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-18 Duplexing ..................................................................................................... 5-21 Output Tray .................................................................................................. 5-22 Media Storage .............................................................................................. 5-23 6 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-1 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-2 About Toner Cartridges............................................................................... 6-2 Replacing a Toner Cartridge................................................................. 6-5 Removing All Toner Cartridges........................................................... 6-12 Replacing the Imaging Cartridge............................................................... 6-16 Replacing the Fuser Unit........................................................................... 6-19 7 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-1 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-2 Cleaning the Printer ....................................................................................... 7-4 Exterior........................................................................................................ 7-4 Interior......................................................................................................... 7-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Roller ........................................................... 7-5x-12 Contents Cleaning the Print Head Window .......................................................... 7-9 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 ....................................... 7-18 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment.......................... 7-20 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers ...................................................... 7-22 8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 8-2 Printing a Configuration Page ...................................................................... 8-2 Preventing Media Misfeeds ........................................................................... 8-4 Understanding the Media Path ..................................................................... 8-5 Clearing Media Misfeeds .............................................................................. 8-5 Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures................................... 8-6 Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer................................................ 8-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1............................................... 8-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2............................................... 8-14 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option ............................. 8-17 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ..................................................... 8-19 Solving Other Problems .............................................................................. 8-21 Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................... 8-25 Status, Error, and Service Messages ......................................................... 8-31 Standard Status Messages....................................................................... 8-31 Error Messages (Warning)........................................................................ 8-32 Error Messages (Operator Call)................................................................ 8-34 Service Messages..................................................................................... 8-36 9 Installing Accessories ................................................................................... 9-1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-2 Tray 2 .............................................................................................................. 9-3 Installing Tray 2........................................................................................... 9-3 Duplex Option ................................................................................................ 9-6 Installing Attachment................................................................................... 9-6 Installing the Duplex Option ........................................................................ 9-8 A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical Specifications ...............................................................................A-2 Printer..........................................................................................................A-2 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-5 Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-6 What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-6Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Space Requirements To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. Front View 496 mm (19.5") 100 mm (3.9") 396 mm (15.6") 707 mm (27.8") 100 mm (3.9") 380 mm (14.9") 520 mm (20.5") 127 mm (5.0") 245 mm (9.6") 275 mm (10.8") 100 mm (3.9") Side ViewGetting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-3 " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. Side View with Options 922 mm (36.3") 100 mm (3.9") 435 mm (17.1") 637 mm (25.0") 157 mm (6.2") 130 mm (5.1") 245 mm (9.6") 392 mm (15.4") (when Tray 2 and the duplex option are installed) 100 mm (3.9") Side View with Options 919 mm (36.2") 100 mm (3.9") 435 mm (17.1") 582 mm (22.9") 157 mm (6.2") 127 mm (5.0") 245 mm (9.6") 337 mm (13.3") (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 100 mm (3.9")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Printer Parts The following drawings illustrate the parts of your printer referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1—Output tray 2—Control panel 3—Front cover 4—Dust cover 5—Tray 1 (Multipurpose tray) 6—Top cover 7—Fuser unit 8—Fuser separator levers 9—Fuser cover lever 10—Imaging cartridge 11—Toner cartridge 1 2 3 4 6 5 8 8 7 10 11 9 7 11 10Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-5 Rear View 1—Power switch 2—Power connection 3—USB port 4—10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet Interface port 3 4 2 11-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Front View with Options (when Tray 2 is installed) 1—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when Tray 2 and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Attachment 1 1 2 1 2Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-7 Rear View with Options (when Tray 2 and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Attachment 1 2 1 21-8 Printer Driver CD/DVD Printer Driver CD/DVD PostScript Drivers PCL Drivers PPD Files " For details on the installation of the Windows printer drivers, refer to the Installation Guide. Operating System Use/Benefit Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/ 10.5) These files are required in order to use the printer driver for each operating system. For details of the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. Macintosh OS X Server (10.2/10.3/ 10.4/10.5) Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD 1-9 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD Utilities Utility Use/Benefit Status Monitor (Windows only) The current status of the printer in addition to the status of consumables and error information can be viewed. For details, refer to chapter 3 “Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only)” . PageScope Net Care Device Manager Printer management functions such as status monitoring and network settings can be accessed. For details, refer to the PageScope Net Care Device Manager User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Network Setup Using the TCP/IP and IPX protocols, basic network printer settings can be specified. For details, refer to the PageScope Network Setup User Manual on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Plug and Print This utility automatically detects a new printer connected to the network and creates a print object on the Windows print server. For details, refer to the PageScope Plug and Print Quick Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope NDPS Gateway This network utility enables printers and KONICA MINOLTA multifunctional products to be used in an NDPS environment. For details, refer to the PageScope NDPS Gateway User Manual on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for sending PDF and TIFF files directly to a printer to be printed. For details, refer to the PageScope Direct Print User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-10 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD Documentation Documentation Use/Benefit Installation Guide This manual provides details on the initial operations that must be performed in order to use this printer, such as setting up the printer and installing the drivers. User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using the drivers and control panel and replacing consumables. Reference Guide This manual provides details on installing the Macintosh and Linux drivers and on specifying settings for the network, and the printer management utility. Service & Support Guide The Need Assistance sheet provides information on product support and servicing.System Requirements 1-11 System Requirements „ Personal computer – Pentium 2: 400 MHz (Pentium 3: 500 MHz or higher is recommended) – PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended) – Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor „ Operating System – Microsoft Windows Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic /Home Premium /Ultimate/Business / Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 1 or later; Service Pack 2 or later is recommended), Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later) – Mac OS X (10.2.8 or later; We recommend installing the newest patch), Mac OS X Server (10.2 or later) – Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2 „ Free hard disk space – Approximately 20 MB of free hard disk space for printer driver and Status Monitor – Approximately 128 MB of free hard disk space for image processing „ RAM 128 MB or more „ CD/DVD-ROM drive „ I/O interface – 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface port – USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port " For details on the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-12 System RequirementsUsing the Printer Driver2-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you should “declare” the options in the driver. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) 1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows: – (Windows Server 2008/Vista) From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Properties. – (Windows XP/Server 2003) From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Properties. – (Windows 2000) From the Start menu, choose Settings and then Printers to display the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Properties. 2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip to step 9. 3 Select the Configure tab. 4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8. 5 Click the Refresh to automatically configure installed options. " The Refresh is available only if bi-directional communication is available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out. 6 From the Device Options list, select an option, one at a time, and then select Enable or Disable from the Settings menu. 7 Click Apply. 8 Select the General tab. 9 Click Printing Preferences. The Printing Preference dialog box appears.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 2-3 10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, on the appropriate tabs. 11 Click Apply. 12 Click OK to exit from the Print preference dialog box. 13 Click OK to exit from the Properties dialog box.2-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary. " You must have administrator privileges in order to uninstall the printer driver. " If the User Account Control window appears when uninstalling on Windows Server 2008/Vista, click the Allow button or the Continue button. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) 1 Close all applications. 2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows: – (Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003) From the Start menu, choose All programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver. – (Windows 2000) From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver. 3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be deleted, and then click the Uninstall button. 4 Click Uninstall. 5 Click OK, and restart your computer. 6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 2-5 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) Windows Server 2008/Vista 1 From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Printing Preferences. Windows XP/Server 2003 1 From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences. Windows 2000 1 From the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers to display the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.2-6 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Common Buttons The buttons described below appear on each tab. OK Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made. Cancel Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made. Apply Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box. Help Click to view the help. Favorite Setting This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings, specify the desired settings, and then click Add. Specify the settings described below, and then click OK. „ Name: Type in the name of the settings to be saved. „ Icon: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings. The selected icon appears in the drop-down list. „ Sharing: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by other users logged onto the computer. „ Comment: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved. Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To change the registered setting, click Edit. In addition, predefined settings can be selected. The predefined settings are those for "2-up", "Photo" and "Grayscale". Select Defaults from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to their default values.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-7 „ Printer View Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Paper View button (when a tab other than the Quality tab is selected) or the Quality View button (when the Quality tab is selected). " This button does not appear on the Advanced tab. „ Paper View Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button. " This button does not appear on the Quality tab. „ Quality View Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the Quality tab. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button. " This button appears only when the Quality tab is selected. „ Default Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults. " This button does not appear on the Advanced tab. " When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed. Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only) The Advanced Tab allows you to „ Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing functions (such as booklet printing) „ Specify the PostScript output method „ Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed „ Print a mirror image „ Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data2-8 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Basic Tab The Basic Tab allows you to „ Specify the orientation of the media „ Specify the size of the original document „ Select the output media size „ Zoom (expand/reduce) documents „ Specify the paper source „ Specify the type of media „ Specify the number of copies Layout Tab The Layout Tab allows you to „ Print several pages of a document on the same page (N-up printing) „ Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify booklet printing (when the duplex option is installed) „ Rotate the print image 180 degrees „ Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify duplex (double-sided) printing (when the duplex option is installed) „ Adjust the binding margin „ Adjust the printing position (PCL printer driver only) Cover Page Tab The Cover Page Tab allows you to „ Print front and back cover pages and separator pages „ Specify the paper tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages and separator pages Watermark/Overlay Tab " Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form. In addition, if settings have been specified for “N-up” or “Booklet” in the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the specified settings.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-9 The settings in the "Watermark" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows you to „ Select the watermark to be used „ Create, edit or delete watermarks „ Print a frame around watermarks „ Print transparent (shaded) watermarks „ Print the watermark on only the first page „ Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages The settings in the "Overlay" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows you to „ Select the form to use „ Add or delete overlay files „ Create a form (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL printer driver only) „ Display the form information (PCL printer driver only) „ Print the form on All Pages, First Page, Even Pages and Odd Pages „ Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL printer driver only) Quality Tab The Quality Tab allows you to „ Switch between color and grayscale printing „ Specify the printer color settings (Quick Color) „ Specify the resolution for the printout „ Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only) „ Select whether or not economy printing is used „ Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded „ Print using the printer's fonts Other Tab The Other Tab allows you to „ Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing2-10 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver „ Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not hide overlay files (PCL printer driver only) „ Send a notification by e-mail when printing is finished „ Shows the version information for the printer driver Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions. „ Server and client combinations Server: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista Client: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista „ Functions with limitations applied Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover Page, Back Cover Page, Separator Page, Create Overlay, Print Overlay, WatermarkUsing the Status Monitor (Windows Only)3-2 Working with the Status Monitor Working with the Status Monitor Introduction The Status Monitor shows information about the current status of the printer. The Status Monitor can be installed from the Utilities and Documentation CD/ DVD. For details on the installation, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. Operating Environment The Status Monitor can be used on computers running Windows Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 connected to the printer using the Ethernet connection. Opening the Status Monitor Use one of the following steps to open the Status Monitor: „ Windows Vista/XP/Server 2003—From the Start menu, choose All Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon displayed in the taskbar. „ Windows 2000—From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon displayed in the task bar. Using the Status Monitor Status Tab „ Select Printer—Selects the printer whose status is displayed. In addition, the messages that appear in the message window of the selected printer are displayed. „ Graphic—Normally, the Konica Minolta logo is displayed. When a printer error is detected, a graphic representation of the printer is shown, and the location of the problem is indicated. When the background of the printer graphic is red or yellow, there is an error and the job has been interrupted. „ Advanced Options—Click Advanced Options to display the Advanced Options dialog box. From the Advanced Options dialog box, select whether the Status Monitor automatically starts when the operating system is started and whether error notifications are sent by e-mail. „ Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts 3-3 „ Printer Alerts—Displays text messages that alert you of conditions such as low toner. „ Recovery Instructions—Provides you with explanations of what you need to do in order to correct problems and recover from error conditions. Consumables Tab Displays the usage status (approximate percentage remaining) of each toner consumables. „ Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box. „ Refresh—Rechecks the supplies and displays their status. " Click Help to display windows containing explanations of the Status Monitor functions. Refer to this help for detailed information. " The percentages remaining for the consumables displayed using the Status Monitor may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts When the Status Monitor detects a printing problem, the icon on the Windows task bar changes from green (normal) to yellow (warning), orange or red (error), depending on the severity of the printer problem. Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert When the Status Monitor notifies you of a printing problem, double-click its icon on the Windows task bar to open the Status Monitor. The Status Monitor identifies what type of error has occurred. Closing the Status Monitor Click Close to close the Status Monitor window. To exit Status Monitor, right-click the Status Monitor icon in the taskbar, and then click Exit.3-4 Closing the Status MonitorPrinter Control Panel and Configuration Menu4-2 About the Control Panel About the Control Panel The control panel, located on the top of the printer, allows you to direct the printer’s operation. In addition, it displays the current status of the printer, including any condition that needs your attention. Control Panel Indicators and Keys No. Indicator Off On 1 The printer is not ready to accept data. The printer is ready to accept data. 2 No problem. The printer requires operator attention (usually accompanied by a status message in the message window.) Ready Error Cancel 8 MESSAGE WINDOW 3 1 2 6 5 4 7 Ready ErrorAbout the Control Panel 4-3 No. Indicator Function 3 „ Moves up in the menu structure „ Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls upward through the available characters 4 „ Moves right in the menu structure „ Moves right through the available menu choices 5 „ Moves down in the menu structure. „ Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls downward through the available characters 6 „ Moves left in the menu structure „ Moves left through the available menu choices 7 „ Cancels the currently displayed menu choice „ Allows you to cancel one or all print jobs that are currently being printed or processed: 1. Press the Cancel key. 2. Press the ) or * keys to select either CANCEL JOB/CURRENT or CANCEL JOB/ALL 3. Press the Menu Select key. The print job(s) is (are) cancelled. 8 „ Enters the menu system „ Moves down in the menu structure „ Selects the displayed menu choice Cancel4-4 About the Control Panel Toner Supply Indicators The indicators shown below will appear, indicating the amount of toner that remains in the yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) toner cartridges. I D L EConfiguration Menu Overview 4-5 Configuration Menu Overview The configuration menu accessible from the control panel is structured as shown below. Menu " If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the user password or administrator password must be entered to display the main menu. The displayed menu is different according to the authority of the entered password. For details on the default passwords, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on page 4-22. PRINT MENU PAPER MENU INTERFACE MENU SYSTEM DEFAULT SERVICE MENU QUALITY MENU IDLE LANGUAGE MAIN MENU4-6 Configuration Menu Overview MAIN MENU PRINT MENU With this menu, printer information, such as the configuration page and the demo page, can be printed. " All factory default values are shown in bold. MENU MAP Settings YES/NO Prints the menu map. CONFIGURATION Settings YES/NO Prints the configuration page. STATISTICS PAGE Settings YES/NO Prints the statistics page such as the number of pages printed. POSTSCRIPT PCL MENU MAP DIRECTORY LIST CONFIGURATION FONT LIST DEMO STATISTICS PAGE PRINT MENUConfiguration Menu Overview 4-7 " The amounts remaining for the supplies status and coverage information displayed using the statistics page may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. FONT LIST POST SCRIPT Settings YES/NO Prints the PostScript font list. PCL Settings YES/NO Prints the PCL font list. DIRECTORY LIST Settings YES/NO Prints the directory list of the flash. DEMO Settings YES/NO Prints the demo page.4-8 Configuration Menu Overview PAPER MENU With this menu, the media used for printing can be managed. " * This menu item appears only if the duplex option is installed. ** These menu items appear only if an optional lower feeder unit is installed. TRAY 1 MODE TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE MEDIA TYPE TRAY2 ** MEDIA SIZE CUSTOM SIZE AUTO CONTINUE INPUT TRAY PAGE RECOVERY DUPLEX * ORIENTATION LENGTH (xx) WIDTH (xx) PAPER MENU TRAY CHAINING ** MAP ** LOGICAL TRAY 0 MODE LOGICAL TRAY 9 ~Configuration Menu Overview 4-9 " All factory default values are shown in bold. INPUT TRAY TRAY 1 MODE Settings AUTO/CASSETTE When printing from Tray 1, select whether the paper size and paper type set from the printer driver or the MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE settings set by selecting MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY 1 in the control panel have priority. If AUTO is selected, the printer driver settings have priority during printing. If CASSETTE is selected, printing is performed when the printer driver settings and the control panel settings are all the same. TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE Settings LETTER/LEGAL/ EXECUTIVE/A4/A5/B5/ B5(ISO)/G LETTER/ STATEMENT/FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/G LEGAL/C6/DL/ J-POSTCARD/KAI 16/ KAI 32/16K/SP FOLIO/ OFICIO/CUSTOM Select the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 1. "The default setting for North America is LETTER. The default setting for all other regions is A4. MEDIA TYPE Settings PLAIN PAPER/LABELS/ LETTERHEAD/ENVELOPE/ POSTCARD/THICK1/ THICK2 Select the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 1. TRAY2 MEDIA SIZE Settings LETTER/A4 Select the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. "The default setting for North America is LETTER. The default setting for all other regions is A4.4-10 Configuration Menu Overview CUSTOM SIZE WIDTH (xx) Settings 92-216 mm (3.63-8.50 inch)* * With inch measurements, the decimal point does not appear in the message window. For example, 3.63 inches appears as 363. Specify the width of the custom-sized paper loaded into Tray 1. "On the model for North America, the settings appear in inches and the menu item appears as WIDTH(IN). On the models for all other regions, the settings appear in millimeters and the menu item appears as WIDTH(MM). LENGTH (xx) Settings „ With plain paper 195-356 mm (7.69-14.01 inch)* „ With thick stock 184-297 mm (7.24-11.70 inch)* * With inch measurements, the decimal point does not appear in the message window. For example, 7.69 inches appears as 769. Specify the length of the custom-sized paper loaded into Tray 1. "On the model for North America, the settings appear in inches and the menu item appears as LENGTH(IN). On the models for all other regions, the settings appear in millimeters and the menu item appears as LENGTH(MM).Configuration Menu Overview 4-11 AUTO CONTINUE Settings ON/OFF If OFF is selected, an error occurs if the size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. If ON is selected, no error occurs if the size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. TRAY CHAINING Settings YES/NO If YES is selected and the specified paper tray runs out of paper during printing, a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is automatically selected so printing can continue. If NO is selected and the specified paper tray runs out of paper, printing stops. MAP MODE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used. LOGICAL TRAY 0-9 Settings PHYSICAL TRAY 1/ PHYSICAL TRAY 2 Specify whether jobs received from another manufacturer’s printer driver are printed using Tray 1 or Tray 2. PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default only for LOGICAL TRAY 2. The default for all other logical trays is PHYSICAL TRAY 1. DUPLEX Settings OFF/SHORTEDGE/LONGEDGE If LONGEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for long-edge binding. If SHORTEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for short-edge binding. ORIENTATION Settings PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE Specify the orientation of the media.4-12 Configuration Menu Overview PAGE RECOVERY Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the page is printed again after recovering from a paper misfeed. If ON is selected, the page that was misfed is printed again. If OFF is selected, printing continues with the next page without printing the misfed page.Configuration Menu Overview 4-13 QUALITY MENU With this menu, settings for the print quality can be specified. BLACK CYAN MAGENTA TONER OUT ACTION REPLACE TONER AIDC REQUEST AIDC QUALITY MENU YELLOW P/H CLEAN UP MODE REMOVE ALL IMAGE REFRESH ECONOMY PRINT DUPLEX SPEED4-14 Configuration Menu Overview " All factory default values are shown in bold. REPLACE TONER BLACK Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the black toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. CYAN Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the cyan toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. MAGENTA Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the magenta toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. YELLOW Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the yellow toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. REMOVE ALL Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the printer enters REMOVE ALL mode. This mode is used when removing all toner cartridges. For details on removing all toner cartridges, refer to “Removing All Toner Cartridges” on page 6-12. TONER OUT ACTION Settings STOP/CONTINUE If STOP is selected, printing stops when the toner cartridge is empty. If CONTINUE is selected, printing continues even if the toner cartridge is empty. However, the printing result are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops.Configuration Menu Overview 4-15 AIDC REQUEST AIDC Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, image adjustments are performed. "The AIDC function consumes toner. MODE Settings ON/OFF If ON is selected, the image adjustments are applied. If OFF is selected, image adjustments are not applied. P/H CLEAN UP Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the printer enters P/H CLEAN UP mode. P/H CLEAN UP mode is a mode that allows the user to clean the print head window more easily. The print head window is not cleaned automatically. For details on cleaning the print head window, refer to “Cleaning the Print Head Window” on page 7-9. IMAGE REFRESH Settings YES/NO Use when thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on images. "The IMAGE REFRESH function consumes toner. ECONOMY PRINT Settings ON/OFF Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by reducing the amount of toner that is used. If ON is selected, the amount of toner used is reduced when printing. If OFF is selected, the amount of toner used is not reduced when printing.4-16 Configuration Menu Overview DUPLEX SPEED Settings AUTOMATIC/SPEED/QUALITY Select the print speed for double-sided printing. If AUTOMATIC is selected, the print speed is automatically selected. If SPEED is selected, the print speed has priority; however, the print quality may decrease. If QUALITY is selected, the print quality has priority; therefore, the print speed will decrease while the print quality may increase.Configuration Menu Overview 4-17 INTERFACE MENU With this menu, interface settings can be specified. The printer must be rebooted after any setting in the ETHERNET menu (for example, the TCP/IP address) is changed. Therefore, the following message appears when the configuration menu is exited (the + key is repeatedly pressed) after a setting has been changed. Select YES, and then press the Menu Select key to reboot the printer. Otherwise, turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again after a few seconds. ETHERNET * INTERFACE MENU TCP/IP ENABLE IPV4 DHCP/BOOTP IPV4 ADDRESS DEFAULT ROUTER SUBNET MASK ENABLE AUTO IP IPV6 ENABLE IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP IDENTIFIER4-18 Configuration Menu Overview " * If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to display this menu. For details on the default administrator password, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on page 4-22. IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE ETHERNET SPEED DISABLE 802.1X PS PROTOCOL ENABLE JOB TIMEOUT USB ENABLE AUTO GLOBAL PREFIX DISABLE FILTERS DISABLE IPSECConfiguration Menu Overview 4-19 " All factory default values are shown in bold. ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, TCP/IP is enabled. If NO is selected, TCP/IP is disabled. IPV4 DHCP/ BOOTP Settings YES/NO Select whether or not the IP address is automatically acquired. If YES is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired. If NO is selected, the IP address is not automatically acquired. IPV4 ADDRESS Settings 192.168.001.002 Set the IPv4 address for this printer on the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value. If the IP address is manually specified, DHCP/BOOTP is automatically set to NO. DEFAULT ROUTER Settings 000.000.000.000 Specify the IPv4 address of the router if one is on the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value. SUBNET MASK Settings 000.000.000.000 Specify the subnet mask for the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value.4-20 Configuration Menu Overview ENABLE AUTO IP Settings YES/NO Select whether or not the IPv4 address is automatically acquired when DHCP/BOOTP and PING, ARP are not functioning or when there is no response. If YES is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired. If NO is selected, the IP address is not automatically acquired. IPV6 ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IPv6 is enabled. If NO is selected, IPv6 is disabled. IDENTIFIER Displays the Link-Local address. ENABLE AUTO Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, auto configuration of IPv6 is enabled. If NO is selected, auto configuration of IPv6 is disabled. GLOBAL PREFIX Displays the global address. IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, HTTP is enabled. If NO is selected, HTTP is disabled. DISABLE FILTERS Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, filter is disabled. DISABLE IPSEC Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IPsec is disabled.Configuration Menu Overview 4-21 IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE Settings AUTO/802.2/802.3/ETHER II/SNAP Specify the protocol used with NetWare. ETHERNET SPEED Settings AUTO/100 FULL DUPLEX/100 HALF DUPLEX/10 FULL DUPLEX/10 HALF DUPLEX Specify the transmission speed for the network and the transmission method for bi-directional transmission. DISABLE 802.1X Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IEEE802.1x function is disabled. PS PROTOCOL Settings BINARY/QUOTED BINARY Select whether PostScript jobs are received in the binary format or the quoted format. USB ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, USB is enabled. If NO is selected, USB is disabled. JOB TIMEOUT Settings 0-60-999 Specify the length of time (in seconds) until the print job being received is timed out when USB is being used.4-22 Configuration Menu Overview SYSTEM DEFAULT With this menu, settings can be specified to adjust the operation of the printer, such as the time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode. " If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to display this menu. PRINT QUALITY EMULATIONS DEFAULT AUTO DEFAULT ERROR PAGE PCL LINE TERMINATION FONT PITCH SIZE FONT NUMBER POINT SIZE SYMBOL SET STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE DATE & TIME ENERGY SAVER SYSTEM DEFAULT COLOR MODE POSTSCRIPTConfiguration Menu Overview 4-23 " All factory default values are shown in bold. PRINT QUALITY Settings HIGH/STANDARD Select the image quality for prints. COLOR MODE Settings COLOR/GRAYSCALE Specify whether printing is in full color or grayscale. "The color mode setting specified from the printer driver has priority over the setting specified for this menu item. FORMAT ERASE FLASH RESTORE/SAVE RESTORE FACTORY SAVE CUSTOM RESTORE CUSTOM SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE SET ADMIN PASSWD SET USER PASSWD4-24 Configuration Menu Overview EMULATIONS DEFAULT Settings AUTOMATIC/POSTSCRIPT/PCL5/ PCL XL/HEX DUMP Specify the printer control language. If AUTOMATIC is selected, the printer automatically selects the printer control language from the data stream. AUTO DEFAULT Settings PCL5/POSTSCRIPT Select the printer description language when it cannot be identified from the data. POSTSCRIPT ERROR PAGE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not an error page is printed when a PostScript error occurs. PCL LINE TERMINATION Settings CR=CR LF=CRLF/ CR=CR LF=LF/ CR=CRLF LF=LF/ CR=CRLF LF=CRLF Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. FONT PITCH SIZE Settings 44-1000-9999 Specify the bitmap font size in the PCL language. FONT NUMBER Settings 0-32767 Specify the font used with the PCL language. The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list. For details on printing the font list, refer to “PRINT MENU” on page 4-6. POINT SIZE Settings 400-1200- 99975 Specify the outline font size in the PCL language. SYMBOL SET Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language. The default setting is PC8.Configuration Menu Overview 4-25 STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE Settings YES/NO Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. If YES is selected, the startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. If NO is selected, the startup page is not printed. DATE & TIME Settings yyyymmdd:hhmmss Set the date and time on the time-of-day (TOD) clock. The settings appear in the following order: year, month, day:hour, minutes, seconds. ENERGY SAVER Settings 15 MINUTES/30 MINUTES/1 HOUR/ 2 HOURS Specify the length of time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode. "2 HOURS is displayed only on 120 V units. SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the menus are protected with a password. If ON is selected, all menus are protected with a password. SET USER PASSWD Settings: 1 Specify the user password for displaying the user menus. The specified password is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECRITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON. The password can contain a maximum of 16 characters. "Empty passwords are not allowed.4-26 Configuration Menu Overview SERVICE MENU With this menu, the service representative can adjust the printer and perform maintenance operations. This menu cannot be used by the user. SET ADMIN PASSWD Settings: the last four digits of the printer serial number Specify the administrator password for displaying the administrator menus. The specified password is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/ SECRITY/CONFIG/ENABLE is set to ON. The password can contain a maximum of 16 characters. "Empty passwords are not allowed. FORMAT ERASE FLASH Settings YES/NO Select whether or not to initialize the flash RAM. If YES is selected, the flash RAM is initialized. RESTORE /SAVE RESTORE FACTORY Settings YES/NO Select whether or not all menu items are reset to their initial settings. If YES is selected, all menu items are reset to their initial settings. SAVE CUSTOM Settings YES/NO Select whether or not all changed menu settings are saved. If YES is selected, all changes are saved. RESTORE CUSTOM Settings YES/NO Select whether or not menu items are reverted to the previously saved settings. If YES is selected, the menu items revert to the previously saved settings.Configuration Menu Overview 4-27 LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH/FRENCH/ GERMAN/SPANISH/ ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/DUTCH/CZECH/ JAPANESE/POLISH The display language of the message window can be changed to the required language. The default setting is English. The language selections appear in the message window in the corresponding language. For example, GERMAN appears as DEUTSCH.4-28 Configuration Menu OverviewMedia Handling5-2 Print Media Print Media Specifications " For custom sizes, use the printer driver to specify the settings within the ranges shown in the above table. Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Inch Millimeter Letter 8.5 x 11.0 215.9 x 279.4 1/2 Yes Legal 8.5 x 14.0 215.9 x 355.6 1 No Statement 5.5 x 8.5 140.0 x 216.0 1 No Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184.0 x 267.0 1 No A4 8.2 x 11.7 210.0 x 297.0 1/2 Yes A5 5.9 x 8.3 148.0 x 210.0 1 No B5 (JIS) 7.2 x 10.1 182.0 x 257.0 1 No B5 (ISO) 6.9 x 9.8 176.0 x 250.0 1 No Folio 8.3 x 13.0 210.0 x 330.0 1 No SP Folio 8.5 x 12.69 215.9 x 322.3 1 No Foolscap 8.0 x 13.0 203.2 x 330.2 1 No UK Quarto 8.0 x 10.0 203.2 x 254.0 1 No Government Letter 8.0 x 10.5 203.2 x 266.7 1 No Government Legal 8.5 x 13.0 216.0 x 330.0 1 No Envelope DL 4.3 x 8.7 110.0 x 220.0 1 No Envelope C6 4.5 x 6.4 114.0 x 162.0 1 No Japanese Postcard 3.9 x 5.8 100.0 x 148.0 1 No 16K 7.7 x 10.6 195.0 x 270.0 1 No Kai 16 7.3 x 10.2 185.0 x 260.0 1 No Kai 32 5.1 x 7.3 130.0 x 185.0 1 No Oficio Mexico 8.5 x 13.5 215.9 x 342.9 1 No Custom Size, Minimum** 3.6 x 7.7 92.0 x 195.0 1 No Custom Size, Maximum** 8.5 x 14.0 216.0 x 356.0 1 No Notes: * Tray 1 = Multipurpose Tray 2 = Plain paper only ** With thick stock The minimum size is 3.6 x 7.25 inch (92.0 x 184.0 mm). The maximum size is 8.5 x 11.7 inch (216.0 x 297.0 mm).Media Types 5-3 Media Types Before purchasing a large quantity of special media, do a trial print with the same media and check the print quality. Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. For a list of approved media, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com. Plain Paper Use plain paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office paper. Note Do not use the media types listed below. These could cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, or damage to the printer. DO NOT use media that is „ Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper, digitally gloss- coated media, and colored paper that has been treated) „ Carbon backed „ Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-sensitive paper, heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper) „ Cold-water-transfer paper „ Pressure sensitive „ Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy film, and postcards) „ Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine „ Dusty „ Wet (or damp) Capacity Tray 1 Up to 200 sheets, depending on the paper weight Tray 2 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Plain paper Weight 60 to 90 g/m² (16 to 24 lb bond) Duplexing Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed.5-4 Media Types " Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does not adhere well to moist or wet paper. „ Layered „ Adhesive „ Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled „ Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn „ Too slick, too coarse, or too textured „ Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back „ Too thin or too thick „ Stuck together with static electricity „ Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous „ Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C [356°F]) „ Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles) „ Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons „ Acidic „ Any other media that is not approved Thick Stock Paper thicker than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. Test all thick stock to ensure acceptable performance and to ensure that the image does not shift. Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 thick stock sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Thick 1 (91 to163 g/m2 ) Thick 2 (164 to 209 g/m2 ) Weight 91 to 209 g/m² (25 to 55.9 lb) Duplexing Not supportedMedia Types 5-5 DO NOT use thick stock that is „ Mixed with any other media in Tray 1 (as this will cause printer misfeeding) Envelopes Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded. Use envelopes that are „ Envelope C6 or Envelope DL (Other envelope sizes are not supported.) „ Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints, sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps " Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based glue avoids this problem. „ Approved for laser printing „ Dry DO NOT use envelopes that have „ Sticky flaps „ Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing „ Transparent windows „ Too rough of a surface „ Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes „ Been presealed Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 envelopes, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Envelope Duplexing Not supported5-6 Media Types Labels A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and a carrier sheet: „ The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification. „ The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface. You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels. Use label sheets that are „ Recommended for laser printers DO NOT use label sheets that „ Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed „ Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive " Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media misfeeds to occur. „ Are precut or perforated Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 label sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Labels Duplexing Not supported Full-page labels (uncut) Do not use OK to use Shiny backed paperMedia Types 5-7 Letterhead Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Postcards Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 sheets, depending on their size and thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Letterhead Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 postcards, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Postcard Duplexing Not supported5-8 Printable Area Use postcards that are „ Approved for laser printers DO NOT use postcards that are „ Coated „ Designed for inkjet printers „ Precut or perforated „ Preprinted or multicolored „ Folded or wrinkled " If the postcard is warped, press on the warped area before putting it in Tray 1. Printable Area The printable area on all media sizes is up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges of the media. Each media size has a specific printable area (the maximum area on which the machine can print clearly and without distortion). This area is subject to both hardware limits (the physical media size and the margins required by the machine) and software constraints (the amount of memory available for the full-page frame buffer). The printable area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media. " When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations apply. z The printable area is 339.6 (13.4") mm from the leading edge of the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the leading edge.) z The bottom margin is 16.0 mm (0.63"). a a a a Printable Area a=4.2 mm (0.165")Printable Area 5-9 Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs depending on the envelope type. " The envelope print orientation is determined by your application. " With the Envelope DL size (long edge feeding), the nonprintable areas on the left and right sides are 6 mm. Page Margins Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may lose part of your image (due to printable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the printable area for optimum results. a=4.2 mm (0.165") Non-printable area Non-guaranteed printable area Guaranteed printable area Front side (can be printed) Back side (cannot be printed) a a a a5-10 Loading Media Loading Media How do I load media? Take off the top and bottom sheets of a ream of paper. Holding a stack of approximately 200 sheets at a time, fan the stack to prevent static buildup before inserting it in a tray. Note Although this printer was designed for printing on a wide range of media types, it is not intended to print exclusively on a single media type except plain paper. Continuous printing on media other than plain paper (such as envelopes, labels, or thick stock) may adversely affect print quality or reduce engine life. When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it with the new media, even the edges, then reload it. Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds. Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray) For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1, refer to “Print Media” on page 5-2. Loading Plain Paper 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.Loading Media 5-11 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load paper above the ▼ mark. Up to 200 sheets (80 g/m2 [21 lb]) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time.5-12 Loading Media 4 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 5 Reattach the dust cover. 6 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.Loading Media 5-13 Other Media When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (for example, Envelope, Label, or Thick Stock) in the driver for optimum print quality. Loading Envelopes 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Remove any media from the tray. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.5-14 Loading Media 4 Load the envelopes flap side down in the tray. " Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a media misfeed may occur. " Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time. " For envelopes with the flap (Envelope C6 or Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap side inserted first. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the envelopes. 6 Reattach the dust cover.Loading Media 5-15 7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.5-16 Loading Media Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Remove any media from the tray. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 4 Load the media face up in the tray. " Up to 50 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time.Loading Media 5-17 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the media. 6 Reattach the dust cover. 7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.5-18 Loading Media Tray 2 Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be loaded in Tray 2. Loading Plain Paper 1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible. 2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it. 3 Remove the lid from Tray 2.Loading Media 5-19 4 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the 100% line. Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2 [21 lb]) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 6 Reattach the lid to Tray 2. 100% 75 505-20 Loading Media 7 Reinsert Tray 2 into the printer.Duplexing 5-21 Duplexing Select paper with high opacity for duplex (double sided) printing. Opacity refers to how effectively paper blocks out what is written on the opposite side of the page. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable. Duplex (Double sided) printing can be done automatically with the duplex option installed and selected. Note Only Letter/A4 plain paper, 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb bond) can be autoduplexed. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Duplexing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterhead is not supported. How do I autoduplex? You should verify that the duplex option is physically installed on the printer to successfully duplex the job. Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex printing. The following Binding Position settings are available. If “Short Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the top. If “Long Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the sides. 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 35-22 Output Tray In addition, if “N-up” has been set to “Booklet”, autoduplex printing is performed. The following Order settings are available when “Booklet” is selected. 1 Load plain paper into the tray. 2 From the printer driver, specify the layout for duplex printing. 3 Click OK. " With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front side is printed. Output Tray All printed media is output to the face-down output tray on top of the printer. This tray has a capacity of approximately 100 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2 (21 lb) paper. " If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your printer may experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup. If “Left Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a left-bound booklet. If “Right Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a right-bound booklet. 1 1 2 3 3 3 1 1 2Media Storage 5-23 Media Storage How do I store media? „ Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up too much and cause misfeeding. „ If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface. „ Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat (above 35°C [95°F]), and dust. „ Avoid media leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position. Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 5-24 Media StorageReplacing Consumables6-2 Replacing Consumables Replacing Consumables Note Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in voiding your warranty. About Toner Cartridges Your printer uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan. Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the printer or on yourself. " Install only new toner cartridges in your printer. If a used toner cartridge is installed, then toner remaining amount may not be accurate. " The toner is nontoxic. If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. If you get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. " Refer to the following URL for recycling information. US: printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp Europe: www.konicaminolta.eu/printing-solutions/more-information/ clean-planet.html Other regions: printer.konicaminolta.com Note Do not use refilled toner cartridges or unapproved toner cartridges. Any damage to the printer or quality problems caused by a refilled toner cartridge or unapproved toner cartridge will void your warranty. No technical support is provided to recover from these problems.Replacing Consumables 6-3 When replacing a toner cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can find your machine type and the toner cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine. " For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges. Printer Type Printer Part Number Toner Cartridge Type Toner Cartridge Part Number AM A034 012 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05F Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AF Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GF High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01F High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06F High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CF High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HF EU A034 022 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05H Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AH Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GH High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01H High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06H High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CH High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HH AP A034 042 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05K Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AK Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GK High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01K High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06K High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CK High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HK GC A034 082 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05N Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AN Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GN High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01N High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06N High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CN High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HN6-4 Replacing Consumables Keep toner cartridges: „ In their packaging until you’re ready to install them. „ In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat). The maximum storage temperature is 35° C (95° F) and the maximum storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur, degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for about one hour before use. „ Level during handling and storage. Do not hold, stand or store cartridges on their ends or turn them upside down; the toner inside the cartridges may become caked or unequally distributed. „ Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.Replacing Consumables 6-5 Replacing a Toner Cartridge Note Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP, the message X TONER OUT/ REPLACE XXXX (where “X” and “XXXX” represent the color of the toner) appears when a toner cartridge becomes empty. Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge. " If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, the printing can continue even after the message "X TONER OUT" has appeared; however, the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. If printing is continued and the toner becomes empty, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops. For details on the setting, refer to “QUALITY MENU” on page 4-13. 1 Check the message window to see which color toner cartridge needs replacing. " If the machine detects that a toner cartridge is empty (X TONER OUT or X TONER LIFE END appears), the empty toner cartridge is automatically moved so that it can be replaced. If you wish to change the toner cartridge, use ether operation described below to switch the printer to REPLACE TONER. Press Key Until Display Reads X TONER OUT REPLACE XXXX or X TONER LIFE END MENU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU6-6 Replacing Consumables × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER REPLACE TONER BLACK Press until appropriate color (X) is displayed. REPLACE TONER X X *YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR AND REPLACE X TONER Press Key Until Display ReadsReplacing Consumables 6-7 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. 3 Check that the toner cartridge to be replaced has been moved to the front. " You can identify the toner cartridge by the color of the handle. 4 Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " Do not manually rotate the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not rotate the carousel with force, otherwise it may be damaged.6-8 Replacing Consumables Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. Note Dispose of the empty toner cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge. For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 6-2. 5 Prepare a new toner cartridge. 6 Shake the cartridge a few times to distribute the toner. " Make sure that the toner roller cover is securely attached before shaking the toner cartridge.Replacing Consumables 6-9 7 Remove the cover from the toner roller. " Do not touch or scratch the toner roller. 8 Align the shaft on each end of the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge. " Before inserting the toner cartridge, make sure that the color of the toner cartridge to be installed is the same as the label on the toner cartridge carousel.6-10 Replacing Consumables Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. 9 Press in the toner cartridge until it locks into place. 10 Close the front cover.Replacing Consumables 6-11 " The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the toner cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top or front cover before the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.6-12 Replacing Consumables Removing All Toner Cartridges Note Be careful not to spill toner while removing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. By using the REMOVE ALL mode, all toner cartridges can be removed. Follow the procedure described below to use the REMOVE ALL mode. 1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the REMOVE ALL mode. Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MANU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER REPLACE TONER BLACK REPLACE TONER REMOVE ALLReplacing Consumables 6-13 " It is not possible to exit REMOVE ALL mode before the operation is finished (even if the Cancel key is pressed). If the printer has incorrectly been switched to REMOVE ALL mode, open, then close the front cover four times to exit REMOVE ALL mode. 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. REMOVE ALL *NO REMOVE ALL YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR AND REMOVE M TONER Press Key Until Display Reads6-14 Replacing Consumables 3 Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " Do not manually rotate the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not rotate the carousel with force, otherwise it may be damaged. Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration.Replacing Consumables 6-15 4 Close the front cover. 5 Follow the same procedure to remove the cartridges for the cyan, black, then yellow toners.6-16 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Imaging Cartridge When replacing an imaging cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can find your machine type and the imaging cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine. " For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge. 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically. Printer Type Printer Part Number Part Name Imaging Cartridge Part Number AM A034 012 Imaging Cartridge A0VU 011 EU A034 022 A0VU 0Y1 AP A034 042 A0VU 0Y1 GC A034 082 A0VU 0Y1Replacing Consumables 6-17 Note Dispose of the used imaging cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the imaging cartridge. 3 Prepare the new imaging cartridge. Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. 4 Slowly insert the new imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish installing the imaging cartridge.6-18 Replacing Consumables 5 Carefully close the top cover. " The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the imaging cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top cover before the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.Replacing Consumables 6-19 Replacing the Fuser Unit For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA fuser unit for your specific printer type. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord. Note There are extremely hot parts within the printer. Before replacing the fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the printer, and then check that the fusing section has reached room temperature, otherwise, you may get burnt. 2 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover.6-20 Replacing Consumables 3 Push the blue handles back as far as possible. 4 Grab the blue handles and lift the fuser unit to remove it. Note Do not touch the matching connectors of the fuser unit and the machine.Replacing Consumables 6-21 5 Prepare a new fuser unit. 6 Pull the fuser separator levers forward as far as possible.6-22 Replacing Consumables 7 Remove the fuser separator material, and then return the fuser separator levers to their original positions. Note Be careful not to touch the paper exit sensor and the surface of the fuser roller in the fuser unit. 8 While lifting the fuser unit with the blue handles (one on each side), vertically insert the fuser unit.Replacing Consumables 6-23 Note Do not touch the paper exit sensor on the fuser unit. Note Do not touch the matching connectors of the fuser unit and the machine. M6-24 Replacing Consumables 9 After the fuser unit is firmly installed, flip the blue handles down toward you. 10 Carefully close the top cover. 11 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer.Maintaining the Printer7-2 Maintaining the Printer Maintaining the Printer CAUTION Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of the printer’s covers and the interior of the printer body. Handle the printer with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the inside or outside of the printer, printer performance and print quality will suffer, so the printer should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following guidelines in mind. WARNING! Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. CAUTION The fuser unit is hot. When the top cover is opened, the fuser unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time). „ Be careful when cleaning the inside of the printer or removing media misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot. „ Do not place anything on top of the printer. „ Use a soft cloth to clean the printer. „ Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. „ Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the printer. „ Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small inconspicuous area of your printer to check the solution’s performance. „ Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning pads. „ Always close the printer’s covers gently. Never subject the printer to vibration. „ Do not cover the printer immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait until it cools down.Maintaining the Printer 7-3 „ Do not leave the printer’s covers open for any length of time, especially in well-lit places; light may damage the imaging cartridge. „ Do not open the printer during printing. „ Do not tap media stacks on the printer. „ Do not lubricate or disassemble the printer. „ Do not tilt the printer. „ Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may damage the printer and cause the print quality to deteriorate. „ Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked too high, your printer may experience media misfeeds and excessive media curl. „ Keep the printer level to avoid toner spillage. „ When lifting the printer, grasp the areas shown in the figure. „ Before moving the printer, remove the dust cover, and fold up Tray 1. „ If the optional lower feeder unit, attachment and duplex option are installed, remove them and move them separately. „ If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. „ Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you plug in the printer. 15.1 kg 33.3 lbs7-4 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Printer CAUTION Be sure to turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning. However, be sure to turn on the printer when cleaning the print head window. Exterior Ready Error Cancel Control Panel Ventilation Grill Printer ExteriorCleaning the Printer 7-5 Interior Cleaning the Media Feed Roller 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically.7-6 Cleaning the Printer Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge horizontally as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight). 3 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. BOTTOM VIEWCleaning the Printer 7-7 CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller.7-8 Cleaning the Printer 4 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge. 5 Carefully close the top cover.Cleaning the Printer 7-9 Cleaning the Print Head Window 1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the P/H CLEAN UP mode. Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MENU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER × 3 QUALITY MENU P/H CLEAN UP P/H CLEAN UP *YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR REMOVE TONER7-10 Cleaning the Printer " To exit P/H CLEAN UP mode, press the Cancel key. 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. 3 The magenta toner cartridge has been moved to the position from where it can be replaced. Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " When the magenta toner cartridge is removed, a gap is created within the printer so that the print head window can easily be cleaned.Cleaning the Printer 7-11 Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. 4 Close the front cover. " The toner cartridge rotate within the printer. 5 After the toner cartridges have finished rotating, open the top cover.7-12 Cleaning the Printer 6 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically. Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge horizontally as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight).Cleaning the Printer 7-13 7 Clean the print head window by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. BOTTOM VIEW7-14 Cleaning the Printer Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller. 8 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.Cleaning the Printer 7-15 9 Close the top cover. 10 After the toner cartridges have finished rotating, open the front cover.7-16 Cleaning the Printer 11 Align the shaft on each end of the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge. Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration.Cleaning the Printer 7-17 12 Press in the magenta toner cartridge until it locks into place. 13 Close the front cover.7-18 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers for Tray 2. 1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Lift the printer off of Tray 2 and temporarily place it on a sturdy flat surface. 4 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-19 5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on top of Tray 2. 6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-20 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers for the attachment. 1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Lift the printer off of the attachment and temporarily place it on a sturdy flat surface. 4 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-21 5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on top of the attachment. 6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-22 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers 1 Open the duplex cover. 2 Clean the feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 3 Carefully close the duplex cover.Troubleshooting8-2 Introduction Introduction This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving printer problems you may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help. Printing a Configuration Page Print a configuration page to verify the printer is configured correctly. Printing the configuration page page 8-2 Preventing media misfeeds page 8-4 Understanding the media path page 8-5 Clearing media misfeeds page 8-5 Solving problems with media misfeeds page 8-19 Solving other problems page 8-21 Solving problems with printing quality page 8-25 Status, error, and service messages page 8-31 Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MENU MAIN MENU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU PRINT MENU MENU MAP PRINT MENU CONFIGURATIONPrinting a Configuration Page 8-3 CONFIGURATION YES The configuration page prints and the printer goes back to IDLE. Press Key Until Display Reads8-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds Preventing Media Misfeeds Make sure that... Media matches the printer specifications. Media is flat, especially on the leading edge. The printer is on a hard, flat, level surface. You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity. You always adjust the media guides in Tray 1 after inserting the media (a guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and printer damage). You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side). Avoid... Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled. Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking together). Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time. Overfilling the trays. Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 100-sheet capacity— misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 100 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 8-5 Understanding the Media Path Understanding the printer’s media path will help you locate media misfeeds. 1 Output tray 2 Imaging cartridge 3 Toner cartridge carousel 4 Tray 1 5 Tray 2 (optional) 6 Fuser unit 7 Duplex option Clearing Media Misfeeds To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any piece of media left in the printer, whether large or small, can obstruct the media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed. Note The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media. Make sure not to spill any toner inside the printer. CAUTION Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on. If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel window persists, open and close the printer’s top cover. This should clear the misfeed message. 1 6 7 2 3 4 58-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures Media Misfeed Message Page Reference CHECK TRAY1 PAPER (Displaying alternately) PRESS MENU/SELECT This message appears in the following cases. z When no media is loaded in Tray 1 z When a misfeed has occurred in Tray 1 With the first case, load media into the tray, and then press the Menu Select key. With the second case, refer to page 8-13. PAPER JAM FUSER page 8-7 PAPER JAM EXIT page 8-7 PAPER JAM TRANSFER page 8-7 PAPER JAM TRAY2 OPEN TOP COVER page 8-14 PAPER JAM DUPLEX page 8-17Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically.8-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontally horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight).Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-9 3 Push the fuser separator levers back as far as possible. CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention.8-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds 4 Remove any misfed media. " If a media misfeed occurs near the fuser unit, pull out the media from below the fuser unit, as shown in the illustration at the right. " If the media cannot be removed from below the fuser unit, raise the fuser unit cover, and then remove the media from above the fuser unit. " Remove the dust cover from Tray 1 and remove the media. M MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-11 Note Do not touch the paper exit sensor on the fuser unit. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller. M8-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds 5 Return the fuser separator levers to their original positions. 6 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge. 7 Carefully close the top cover. MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " If the media cannot be removed, instead of pulling it with extreme force, clear the media misfeed according to the procedure described in “Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer” on page 8-7. 3 Reattach the dust cover. 4 Press the Menu Select key.8-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2 1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible. 2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it. 3 Remove any misfed paper. " If necessary, remove the dust cover from Tray 1 and close the tray.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-15 4 Remove the lid from Tray 2, and then remove all paper from the tray. 5 Fan the paper, and align its edges. 6 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 7 Load the media in Tray 2, and attach the lid.8-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds 8 Reinsert Tray 2. 9 Open and close the top cover to clear the misfeed message.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-17 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option 1 Open the duplex cover. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " Always remove the misfed media in the feed direction as shown only. " If the media misfeed occurs at the bottom feed slot and the media does not stick out enough to be removed, turn the dial at the right in the direction of the arrow until the media can be pulled out.8-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds 3 Close the duplex cover.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 8-19 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds " Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked, repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re using unsupported print media. Symptom Cause Solution Several sheets go through the printer together. The front edges of the media are not even. Remove the media and even up the front edges, then reload it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Media misfeed message stays on. Top cover needs to be opened and closed again to reset the printer. Open and close the top cover again. Some media remains misfed in the printer. Recheck the media path and make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media. Duplex option misfeeds. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Only Letter/A4 plain paper and recycled paper can be autoduplexed if the duplex option is installed and the media type is set properly in the driver. Make sure that you have not mixed media types in Tray 1. Do not duplex envelopes, labels, thick stock, postcard, or letterheads. Media is still being misfed. Recheck the media path inside the duplex option and make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media.8-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Media is misfeeding. The media is not correctly positioned in the tray. Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray. The number of sheets in the tray exceeds the maximum allowed. Remove the excess media and reload the correct number of sheets in the tray. The media guides are not correctly adjusted to the media size. Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1 to match the size of the media. Warped or wrinkled media is loaded in the tray. Remove the media, smooth it out, and reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use that media. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Custom-sized media, envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads are loaded in Tray 2. Special media must be loaded in Tray 1 only. The recommended label sheet is facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the label sheets according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Envelopes are facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the flaps facing down. If the flaps are on the long edge (Envelope C6 and Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap edge toward the printer and the flap side facing down. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The media feed roller is dirty. Clean the media feed roller. For more details, refer to “Cleaning the Media Feed Roller” on page 7-5. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-21 Solving Other Problems " To order KONICA MINOLTA consumables, go to www.q-shop.com. Symptom Cause Solution Printer power is not on. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the printer, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the printer. Something is wrong with the outlet connected to the printer. Plug another electrical appliance into the outlet and see whether it operates properly. The power switch is not correctly turned on (I position). Turn the power switch off (O position), then turn it back to the on (I position). The printer is connected to an outlet with a voltage or frequency that does not match the printer specifications. Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical Specifications”. The control panel displays X TONER LOW much sooner than expected. One of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. You printed with heavy toner coverage. See specifications in appendix A, “Technical Specifications”. You can’t print the configuration page. The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded with media, in place, and secure. There is a media misfeed. Clear the media misfeed.8-22 Solving Other Problems Printing takes too much time. The printer is set to a slow printing mode (for example, thick stock). It takes more time to print with special media. When using regular paper, make sure that the media type is set properly in the driver. The printer is set to power saving mode. It takes time for printing to start in power saving mode. The job is very complex. Wait. No action needed. A toner cartridge for a different region is installed (X INCORRECT is displayed in the message window). Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge approved for your specific printer. Blank pages are printed. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or empty. Check the toner cartridges. The image will not print correctly or not at all, if a cartridge is empty. The wrong media is being used. Check that the media type set in the driver matches the media loaded in the printer. Printer returned to IDLE before the configuration menu was changed. The printer was in the configuration menu structure without a selection being made within two minutes. When in the configuration menu structure, select your choice within 2 minutes. Not all pages print. The Cancel key was pressed. Make sure no one pressed the Cancel key while your job was printing. The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with media, in place, and secure. A document is printed with an overlay file which has been created by a non-suitable driver. Print the overlay file using a suitable driver. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-23 Printer resets or turns off frequently. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the printer, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the printer. A system error occurred. Contact Technical Support with the error information. You are experiencing duplex problems. Media or settings are not correct. For autoduplexing, make sure that you have a duplex option installed. Make sure that you are using correct media. „ Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed. „ Do not duplex envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, letterheads, or plain paper with a size other than Letter/A4. „ Make sure that you have not mixed media types in Tray 1. Make sure the duplex option is installed and declared in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab). In the printer driver (Layout tab), choose “Double-sided”. You hear unusual noises. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. The tray is not installed correctly. Remove the tray that you are printing from and reinsert it completely into the printer. There is a foreign object stuck inside the printer. Turn off the printer and remove the object. If you cannot remove it, contact Technical Support. The web-based utility cannot be accessed. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator’s password is incorrect. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator password has a 1-character minimum and a 16-character maximum. For details of the PageScope Web Connection administrator password, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/ DVD. Symptom Cause Solution8-24 Solving Other Problems Media is wrinkled. The media is moist from humidity or having water spilled on it. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media feed roller or fuser unit is defective. Check them for damage. If necessary, contact Technical Support with the error information. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The date and time is not correctly maintained on the printer. The backup battery has reached the end of its service life. Contact Technical Support. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-25 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Symptom Cause Solution Nothing is printed, or there are blank spots on the printed page. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check if any is damaged. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity for media storage. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media set in the printer driver mismatches the media loaded in the printer. Load the correct media in the printer. The power source does not match the printer specifications. Use a power source with the proper specifications. Several sheets are being fed at the same time. Remove the media from the tray and check for static electricity. Fan plain paper or other media, and replace it in the tray. Media is not set properly in the tray(s). Remove the media, tap it to straighten it out, return it into the tray, and realign the media guides. Entire sheet is printed in black or color. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.8-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Image is too light; there is low image density. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace with new, dry media. There is not much toner left in the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Image is too dark. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Image is blurred; background is lightly stained; there is insufficient gloss of the printed image. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-27 The print or color density is uneven. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective or low. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. Irregular print or mottled image appears. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity in the media storage area. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. There is insufficient fusing or the image comes off when rubbed. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Symptom Cause Solution8-28 Solving Problems with Printing Quality There are toner smudges or residual images. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or installed incorrectly. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. There are toner smudges on the back side of the page (whether or not it has been duplexed). The media path is dirty with toner. Print several blank sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Abnormal areas (white, black, or color) appear in a regular pattern. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-29 Image defects. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. A toner cartridge may be leaking. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Lateral lines or bands appear on image. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. The media path is dirty with toner. Print several sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on images. Toner is not evenly adhering to the media. Perform IMAGE REFRESH. (On the control panel menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/IMAGE REFRESH, then select YES.) If the problem persists, contact your vendor or authorized service provider. Colors look drastically wrong. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and verify that the toner is distributed evenly on each cartridge roller, and reinstall the toner cartridges. One or more of the toner cartridges may be low or empty. Check the control panel for an X TONER LOW or X TONER OUT message. If necessary, replace the specified toner cartridge. Symptom Cause Solution8-30 Solving Problems with Printing Quality If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information. For contact information, refer to the Need Assistance Sheet. Colors are not registering properly; colors are mixed or have pageto-page variation. The imaging cartridge is not correctly seated. Remove the imaging cartridge and reinstall it. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The color has a poor reproduction or has poor color density. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Perform AIDC. (On the control panel menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/AIDC/REQUEST AIDC, then select YES.) Symptom Cause SolutionStatus, Error, and Service Messages 8-31 Status, Error, and Service Messages Status, error, and service messages are displayed in the control panel message window. They provide information about your printer and help you locate many problems. When the condition associated with a displayed message has changed, the message is cleared from the window. Standard Status Messages This message... means... do this... CALIBRATING Whenever you replace a toner cartridge or reboot the printer after making environmental changes, the printer automatically pauses to do an Auto-Image Density Control (AIDC) cycle. This process is provided to make reliable printer operation with optimum output quality possible. No action needed. CANCELLING JOB The job is being cancelled. ENERGY SAVER The printer is in Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption during periods of inactivity. In addition, the machine will return to its normal operating condition when any key on the control panel is pressed. IDLE The printer is on and ready to receive data. INITIALIZING The printer is being initialized. PRINTING The printer is printing.8-32 Status, Error, and Service Messages Error Messages (Warning) PROCESSING The printer is processing data. No action needed. magicolor 1650 STARTING PRINTER The printer is being started up. PORT AUTH ACTIVE The IEEE802.1x port is being authorized. WARMING UP The printer is warming up. REFRESHING The printer is adjusting the toner distribution. This message... means... do this... CHECK TRAY1 PAPER (Displaying alternately) PRESS MENU/SELECT Tray 1 is empty. Load the media into Tray 1, and then press the Menu Select key. Media has misfed in Tray 1. Remove the misfed media. I/C END The imaging cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace the imaging cartridge. "Printing can continue, however, the printing result are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "I/C LIFE END" appears and printing stops. I/C LOW The imaging cartridge is near the end of its life. Prepare a new imaging cartridge. TRAY 2 IS EMPTY Tray 2 is empty. Load the media into Tray 2. This message... means... do this...Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-33 TRAY 2 OPEN Tray 2 cassette is not installed or is not fully closed. Close Tray 2 or print from another tray. VIDEO I/F ERROR A video interface error occurred in the printer. Turn off the printer. After a few seconds, turn on the printer. X INCORRECT The X toner cartridge is an unapproved type. Install a KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge of the appropriate type (AM, EU, AP or GC). See page 6-3. X MEMORY ERROR A memory error occurred in the toner cartridge. Re-install the specified toner cartridge. X TONER LOW The X toner cartridge is nearly empty. Prepare the specified color toner cartridge. X TONER OUT (Ready Indicator: On. Error Indicator: Off) The X toner cartridge is empty. (If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE.) Replace the toner cartridge. "Printing can continue, however, the printing results are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops. This message... means... do this...8-34 Status, Error, and Service Messages Error Messages (Operator Call) This message... means... do this... AUTH TIMEOUT The user is automatically logged off due to IEEE802.1x port authorization. Reauthorize the IEEE802.1x port, and then log on. AIDC ERROR AIDC sensor error. Open and close front cover to automatically clean AIDC parts. BELT ERROR The printer detected incorrect image position on the image transfer belt. Check the cyan and black toner cartridges and replace them if they have run out. If the error has not been recovered by this procedure, please call Technical Support. DUPLEX UNIT PANEL OPEN Duplex cover is open. Close the duplex cover. DOWNLOAD IMAGE INVALID While updating code, an error has occurred. The user should attempt the upgrade process again. I/C LIFE END The imaging cartridge is reached the end of its life. Replace the imaging cartridge. PAPER JAM DUPLEX Media has misfed in the duplex option. Locate and remove the misfeed. PAPER JAM EXIT Media has misfed in the fuser area. PAPER JAM FUSER PAPER JAM TRANSFER Media has misfed in the transfer roller area. This type of misfeed means that the media did not make it to the paper exit area. PAPER JAM TRAY 2 Media has misfed while being pulled from Tray 2. Locate and remove the misfeed.Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-35 PUT "SIZE" "TYPE" IN TRAY 1 The size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. Load the correct paper on Tray1, and press the Menu Select key, then specify the size and type of the paper. PUT “SIZE” “TYPE” IN TRAY 2 The paper size set from the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. „ Open Tray 2 and keep correct paper size. Then close Tray 2. „ Specify the correct paper size in the MAIN MENU/ PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY2/MEDIA SIZE menu. TOP COVER OPEN The printer’s top cover is open. Close the top cover. The imaging cartridge is not installed. Install the imaging cartridge. A imaging cartridge incompatible with the machine is installed. Replace the imaging cartridge with a correct one. X TONER LIFE END The X toner cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace the toner cartridge. "If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE. X TONER MISSING The X toner cartridge is not installed. Install a X toner cartridge. X TONER OUT REPLACE XXXX (Ready Indicator: Off. Error Indicator: On) The X toner cartridge is empty. (If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP.) Replace the toner cartridge. "If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, printing can continue. However, the printing results are not guaranteed. This message... means... do this...8-36 Status, Error, and Service Messages Service Messages These messages indicate a more serious error that can only be corrected by a customer service engineer. If one of these messages appears, turn the printer off, then turn it on again. If the problem persists, contact your local vendor or authorized service provider. This service message... means... do this... SERVICE CALL XXXX An error has been detected with the item indicated “XXXX” in the service message. Reboot the printer. This often clears the service message, and printer operation can resume. If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.Installing Accessories9-2 Introduction Introduction Note Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty. This chapter provides information about the following accessories. Note Installing accessories always requires that the printer and accessories are turned off and unplugged during installation. " For details on the available options, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com. Tray 2 500-sheet tray Duplex Option Auto duplexing "In order for the duplex option to be installed, Tray 2 must be installed on the printer. Duplex Option and Attachment Auto duplexing "The attachment is an interface unit for installing the duplex option on the machine. "During installation, install the attachment before installing the duplex option.Tray 2 9-3 Tray 2 If Tray 2 is installed, up to 500 additional sheets of A4/Letter-size paper can be loaded. Installing Tray 2 Note Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.9-4 Tray 2 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Prepare Tray 2. " Be sure to place Tray 2 on a level surface. 4 Lift the printer and place it on top of Tray 2, making sure that the positioning pins on Tray 2 correctly fit into the holes in the bottom of the printer. 5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 6 Load paper into Tray 2. For details on loading paper, refer to “Tray 2” in “Loading Plain Paper” on page 5-18. 7 Insert Tray 2 into the printer. 8 Reconnect all interface cables.Tray 2 9-5 9 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer. 10 Declare the Tray 2 in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab, see page 2-2).9-6 Duplex Option Duplex Option Duplex (Double Sided) printing can be performed automatically with the duplex option installed. See “Duplexing” on page 5-21. In order for the duplex option to be installed, either of the following must be installed on the printer. z Tray 2 z Attachment " If Tray 2 is installed, it is not necessary to install the attachment. In this case, skip “Installing the Attachment”, and continue with “Installing the Duplex Option” on page 9-8. Installing Attachment If the attachment is installed, the duplex option can be installed. (The attachment cannot be used by itself; it must be used together with the duplex option.) Note Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. Duplex option AttachmentDuplex Option 9-7 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Prepare the attachment. " Be sure to place the attachment on a level surface. 4 Lift the printer and place it on top the attachment, making sure that the positioning pins on the attachment correctly fit into the holes on the bottom of the printer. 5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. Next, install the duplex option.9-8 Duplex Option Installing the Duplex Option " The illustrations in the following installation procedure show the printer with Tray 2 installed; however, the installation procedure would be the same if the attachment was installed. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the tape affixed to the rear cover. 3 Prepare the duplex option.Duplex Option 9-9 4 Install the duplex option. Align the duplex option with its installation position, and then push down on the bottom of the duplex option until it locks into place. Note When attaching the duplex option, attach the bottom of the option first. If the duplex option is attached incorrectly, it may be damaged. 5 Open the duplex cover. While holding the duplex option against the printer, tighten the screws inside the cover to complete the installation of the duplex option.9-10 Duplex Option 6 Reconnect all interface cables. 7 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer. 8 Declare the duplex in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab, see page 2-2).AppendixA-2 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Printer Type Desktop full color laser beam printer Printing system Dual laser diode with polygon mirror Developing system Mono component development system Fusing system Heat roller system Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bits or 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 1 bit First print Simplex „ Monochrome: 13.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 22.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) Duplex „ Monochrome: 26.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 35.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) Print speed Simplex „ Monochrome: 20.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Duplex „ Monochrome: Tray 1: 8.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Tray 2: 13.2 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Warm-up time Avg. 45 secondsTechnical Specifications A-3 Media sizes Tray 1 „ Paper width:92 to 216 mm (3.6 to 8.5") „ Paper length: Plain paper: 195 to 356 mm (7.7 to 14.0") Thick stock 1/2: 184 to 297 mm (7.25 to 11.7") Tray 2 (Optional) A4/Letter Paper/Media Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 ; 16 to 24 lb bond) Envelope Thick stock 1 (91 to 163 g/m2 ) Thick stock 2 (164 to 209 g/m2 ) Postcard Letterhead Label sheet Input capacity Tray 1 „ Plain paper: 200 sheets „ Envelope: 10 envelopes „ Label/Letterhead/Postcard/Thick Stock: 50 sheets Tray 2 (Optional) Plain paper: 500 sheets Output capacity Output tray: 100 sheets (A4, Letter) Operating temperature 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) Operating humidity 15 to 85% Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz 220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Power consumption 120 V: 1000 W or less 220 to 240 V: 1060 W or less Energy Saver Mode: 18.5 W or less Amperage 120 V: 8.4 A or less 220 to 240 V: 4.4 A or less A-4 Technical Specifications Acoustic Noise Printing: 50 dB or less (monochrome) 49 dB or less (color) Standby: 29 dB or less External dimensions Height: 275 mm (10.8") Width: 396 mm (15.6") Depth: 380 mm (14.9") Weights 11.9 kg (without consumables) 15.1 kg (with consumables) Interface USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant, 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX Ethernet Standard memory 256 MBTechnical Specifications A-5 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart User-Replaceable Service-Replaceable " The values listed in the above table indicate the number of pages for simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage. The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method, such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example, thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and humidity of the operating environment. Item Average Life Expectancy (in Simplex Pages) Toner cartridge Starter Cartridge = 500 pages (Y, M, C) 1,000 pages (K) Replacement Cartridge = Standard-capacity: 1,500 pages (Y, M, C) High-capacity: 2,500 pages (Y, M, C, K) Imaging cartridge Monochrome: 45,000 pages (Continuous) 10,000 pages (1 page per job) Full color: 11,250 pages (Continuous) 7,500 pages (1 page per job) Fuser unit 50,000 pages Item Average Life Expectancy Transfer roller 50,000 pagesA-6 Our Concern for Environmental Protection Our Concern for Environmental Protection As an ENERGY STAR ® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR product? An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.Index Index A-7 A Accessories Duplex option ..............................9-6 Tray 2 ..........................................9-3 C Configuration menu .....................4-5 Consumables Fuser Unit .................................6-19 Imaging Cartridge .....................6-16 Toner cartridge ...........................6-2 Control panel ................................4-2 D Duplexing ....................................5-21 Duplex option ..............................9-6 E Envelope ....................................... 5-5 Error messages .......................... 8-32 L Labels ........................................... 5-6 Letterhead .................................... 5-7 Loading media ........................... 5-10 M Maintenance ................................. 7-2 Media Clearing misfeeds ...................... 8-5 Loading .................................... 5-10 Path ............................................ 8-5 Preventing misfeeds ................... 8-4 Printable area ............................. 5-8 Media misfeed Duplex option ........................... 8-17A-8 Index Interior .........................................8-5 Tray 2 ........................................8-14 Media path .....................................8-5 Media storage .............................5-23 Media type Envelope .....................................5-5 Labels .........................................5-6 Letterhead ...................................5-7 Plain paper ..................................5-3 Postcard ......................................5-7 Thick stock ..................................5-4 Message window ..........................4-2 Messages ....................................8-31 Misfeed problems .......................8-19 Clearing ......................................8-5 Media path ..................................8-5 Preventing ...................................8-4 O Output tray ..................................5-22 P Page margins ................................5-9 Plain paper ....................................5-3 Postcard ........................................5-7 Preventing media misfeeds .........8-4 Print quality .................................8-25 Printable Area ...............................5-8 Printer Parts ...........................................1-4 Printer driver .................................2-6 Advanced tab ..............................2-7 Basic tab .....................................2-8 Cover page tab ...........................2-8 Displaying ...................................2-5 Layout tab ...................................2-8 Other Tab ....................................2-9 Quality Tab .................................2-9 Uninstalling .................................2-4 Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............2-8 S Service messages ......................8-36 Status Monitor ..............................3-2 Closing ....................................... 3-3 Opening ...................................... 3-2 Using .......................................... 3-2 T Thick stock ................................... 5-4 Tray 2 ............................................ 9-3 Troubleshooting .......................... 8-1 User’s Guide [Copy Operations]bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 2 Part names and their functions 2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS................................................................................................ 2-2 2.1.2 bizhub C452....................................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2 Main Body........................................................................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) ........................................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) ......................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.3 Main bodyInside............................................................................................................................... 2-11 bizhub C652/C552/C452 ................................................................................................................. 2-11 bizhub C652DS/C552DS ................................................................................................................. 2-13 2.2.4 Control panel.................................................................................................................................... 2-14 Adjusting the angle of the control panel .......................................................................................... 2-15 2.2.5 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 2-18 2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516............................................................ 2-18 2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 ...................................................................................................................... 2-20 2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 ..................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 ......................................................................................................................... 2-22 2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603................... 2-23 2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504...................................................................................................................... 2-25 2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 ................................................................................................ 2-26 3 Using this machine 3.1 Turning on or off the machine ....................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Basic copy operations.................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Placing originals................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-4 Placing the original on the original glass ........................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.2 Basic copy operations ....................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions ......................................................................................... 3-6 Functions that cannot be combined .................................................................................................. 3-8 4 Control Panel Keys Control panel and functions............................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key..................................................... 4-4 The [Start] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4 The [Stop] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-2 The [Interrupt] key .............................................................................................................................. 4-4 The [Reset] key .................................................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key ........................................... 4-5 The [Copy] key ................................................................................................................................... 4-5 The [Fax/Scan] key ............................................................................................................................ 4-5 The [User Box] key............................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key ................................................................................................................ 4-6 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key................................................................................................................. 4-7 4.5 The [Access] key............................................................................................................................. 4-8 Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track)................. 4-8 Using the machine during non-scheduled hours............................................................................. 4-10 4.6 The [Power Save] key ................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.7 The [Accessibility] key.................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key............................................................................................................. 4-14 4.9 The [Guidance] key ....................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key ........................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key .................................................................................................................... 4-18 Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) ................................................................... 4-18 Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) ............................................ 4-19 5 Copy Function 5.1 Basic................................................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Color .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.1.2 Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 Configuring a custom size ................................................................................................................. 5-6 Configuring wide paper...................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.1.3 Zoom.................................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.1.4 Duplex/Combine ................................................................................................................................ 5-8 5.1.5 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.1.6 Post Inserter..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 Keys on control panel ...................................................................................................................... 5-12 Finishing using Post Inserter............................................................................................................ 5-13 5.1.7 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 5-13 5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF .............................................................................................................................. 5-14 5.2 Original Setting.............................................................................................................................. 5-15 Copying mixed originals .................................................................................................................. 5-16 Copying Z-folded originals............................................................................................................... 5-17 5.3 Quality/Density .............................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.4 Application..................................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert............................................................................................................. 5-21 OHP Interleave................................................................................................................................. 5-21 Cover Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 5-22 Insert Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 5-23 Insert Image ..................................................................................................................................... 5-24 Chapters .......................................................................................................................................... 5-26 Program Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 5-27 5.4.2 Edit Color ......................................................................................................................................... 5-29 Neg./Pos. Reverse ........................................................................................................................... 5-29 Mirror Image..................................................................................................................................... 5-30 Background Color............................................................................................................................ 5-31 Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 5-31 5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat .......................................................................................................................... 5-33 Book Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 5-33 Image Repeat................................................................................................................................... 5-34 Poster Mode .................................................................................................................................... 5-35 Booklet Original................................................................................................................................ 5-36 5.4.4 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 5-37 5.4.5 Image Adjust .................................................................................................................................... 5-39bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-3 5.4.6 Booklet............................................................................................................................................. 5-40 5.4.7 Erase ................................................................................................................................................ 5-41 Frame Erase..................................................................................................................................... 5-41 Non-Image Area Erase..................................................................................................................... 5-42 5.4.8 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 5-43 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 5-44 Page Number................................................................................................................................... 5-45 Stamp............................................................................................................................................... 5-47 Copy Protect.................................................................................................................................... 5-48 Copy Guard...................................................................................................................................... 5-49 Password Copy................................................................................................................................ 5-50 Stamp Repeat .................................................................................................................................. 5-51 Header/Footer.................................................................................................................................. 5-53 Watermark........................................................................................................................................ 5-54 Overlay............................................................................................................................................. 5-55 Registered Overlay........................................................................................................................... 5-56 5.4.9 Card Copy........................................................................................................................................ 5-59 5.4.10 Save in User Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60 5.5 Left panel display .......................................................................................................................... 5-61 5.5.1 Job List ............................................................................................................................................ 5-62 5.5.2 Check Job........................................................................................................................................ 5-64 6 User Settings 6.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Custom Display Settings ................................................................................................................ 6-6 6.3 Copier Settings................................................................................................................................ 6-8 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.5 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.6 Change Password......................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................ 6-14 6.8 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.9 Register Authentication Information........................................................................................... 6-16 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-18 7 Administrator Settings 7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Power Save Settings.......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Output Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.1.3 Date/Time Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ......................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.1.6 Restrict User Access.......................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.7 Expert Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 7-9 Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................ 7-13 Centering.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 7-14 Center Staple Position ..................................................................................................................... 7-14 Half-Fold Position ............................................................................................................................ 7-15 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 7-15 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment................................................................................................. 7-16 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ............................................................................................ 7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 7-17 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment...................................................................................................... 7-17 Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-17 Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment............................................................................... 7-18 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 7-18 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 7-19 Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor........................................................................................................ 7-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-4 Color Registration Adjust................................................................................................................. 7-20 Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.1.8 List/Counter ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22 7.1.9 Reset Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-23 7.1.10 User Box Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-24 7.1.11 Standard Size Setting ...................................................................................................................... 7-24 7.1.12 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings ................................................................................................................ 7-26 7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings............................................................................................................ 7-26 7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ................................................................................................. 7-27 7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting............................................................................................................... 7-27 7.1.17 Page Number Print Position............................................................................................................. 7-28 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings.................................................................................................. 7-29 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration.............................................................................................. 7-30 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................ 7-31 7.4.1 General Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-32 7.4.2 User Authentication Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-34 7.4.3 Account Track Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-37 7.4.4 Print without Authentication............................................................................................................. 7-38 7.4.5 Print Counter List ............................................................................................................................. 7-38 7.4.6 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations....................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting....................................................................................................... 7-41 7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ................................................................................................. 7-41 7.5 Network Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6 Copier Settings.............................................................................................................................. 7-43 7.7 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 7-45 7.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.9 System Connection....................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.10 Security Settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.1 Administrator Password................................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels .......................................................................................................... 7-50 7.10.4 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 7-51 7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode................................................................................................................. 7-54 Required settings............................................................................................................................. 7-54 Settings to forcibly changed ............................................................................................................ 7-54 7.10.6 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.10.7 Function Management Settings....................................................................................................... 7-56 7.10.8 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-57 7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting ................................................................................................ 7-57 7.11 License Settings............................................................................................................................ 7-58 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........................................................................ 7-59 8 Maintenance 8.1 Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.1 Checking the paper............................................................................................................................ 8-2 Replenishment message.................................................................................................................... 8-2 Precautions regarding the use of paper ............................................................................................ 8-2 Paper storage..................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Loading paper.................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Loading paper into trays 1 and 2....................................................................................................... 8-3 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4....................................................................................................... 8-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-5 Loading paper into the bypass tray ................................................................................................... 8-5 Loading paper into the LCT ............................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2 Consumables................................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.1 Checking comsumables .................................................................................................................... 8-8 Replacement message ...................................................................................................................... 8-8 Checking consumables status......................................................................................................... 8-10 Viewing counters.............................................................................................................................. 8-10 Checking the total number of pages printed ................................................................................... 8-11 8.3 Cleaning procedure ...................................................................................................................... 8-12 Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)................................................................................................ 8-12 Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)...................................................................................... 8-12 Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) ..................................................................................... 8-13 Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller........................................................................... 8-13 Housing, document pad .................................................................................................................. 8-14 9 Troubleshooting 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)...................................... 9-2 Problems that cannot be corrected by the user ................................................................................ 9-2 9.2 Troubleshooting table..................................................................................................................... 9-4 Simple troubleshooting...................................................................................................................... 9-4 Main messages and their remedies ................................................................................................... 9-8 Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen ................................................................................... 9-10 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated....................................................................................................... 9-12 Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire ........................................................................................... 9-12 Cleaning the print head.................................................................................................................... 9-13 10 Authentication unit (biometric type) 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................................ 10-2 10.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 10-5 Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 10-5 Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 10-6 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 10-7 Setup................................................................................................................................................ 10-7 User registration............................................................................................................................. 10-11 10.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 10-17 When 1-to-many authentication has been specified ..................................................................... 10-17 When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified............................................................................ 10-18 11 Authentication unit (IC card type) 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) ..................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 11-2 11.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 11-4 Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 11-4 Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 11-6 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 11-6 Setup................................................................................................................................................ 11-7 User registration............................................................................................................................. 11-11 11.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 11-15 When IC card authentication is enabled........................................................................................ 11-15 When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled ............................................ 11-16 12 Specifications 12.1 Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 12-2 Paper types and paper capacities ................................................................................................... 12-2 12.2 Machine specifications................................................................................................................. 12-4 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452.................................................................................... 12-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-6 Automatic duplex unit...................................................................................................................... 12-7 Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452).................................................... 12-7 Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS).................................................... 12-7 12.3 Options........................................................................................................................................... 12-8 Large capacity unit LU-301.............................................................................................................. 12-8 Large capacity unit LU-204.............................................................................................................. 12-8 Finisher FS-526................................................................................................................................ 12-9 Saddle stitcher SD-508.................................................................................................................. 12-10 Punch kit PK-516........................................................................................................................... 12-11 Job Separator JS-602.................................................................................................................... 12-12 Z-Folding Unit ZU-606................................................................................................................... 12-12 Post Inserter PI-505 ....................................................................................................................... 12-13 Finisher FS-527.............................................................................................................................. 12-13 Saddle stitcher SD-509.................................................................................................................. 12-14 Punch Kit PK-517 .......................................................................................................................... 12-15 Job Separator JS-504.................................................................................................................... 12-15 Job Separator JS-603.................................................................................................................... 12-16 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101.................................................................................. 12-16 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102.................................................................................. 12-17 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 ..................................................................................... 12-17 13 Appendix 13.1 Colors............................................................................................................................................. 13-2 Hue, brightness, and saturation....................................................................................................... 13-2 Red, green, and blue........................................................................................................................ 13-4 13.2 Image quality ................................................................................................................................. 13-5 Contrast, copy density, and sharpness ........................................................................................... 13-5 Color balance (CMYK) ..................................................................................................................... 13-6 13.3 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 13-7 14 Index 14.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 14-2 14.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 14-61 Introductionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-2 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. User's guide CD manuals Overview Copy Operations This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting Enlarge Display Operations This manual describes details on operating procedures of enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function Print Operations This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Configuring the printer driver Box Operations This manual describes details on the boxed functions using the hard disk. • Saving data in User Boxes • Retrieving data from User Boxes • Printing and transferring data from User Boxes Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • Scan to E-Mail, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV and Web Service • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax Fax Driver Operations This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX Network Administrator This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. Advanced Function Operations This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image Panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address function Trademarks/Copyrights This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. dReference This symbol indicates a reference. A procedural operation is illustrated.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or the computer screen, power switch, etc. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y).2 Part names and their functionsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-2 2.1 Options 2 2 Part names and their functions 2.1 Options 2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS No. Name Description 1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS" throughout the manual. 2 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 3 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 4 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 5 6 2 3 1 4 10 8 9 7 15 16 18 19 20 17 12 11 13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-3 2.1 Options 2 6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages. 8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled color printer. 10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11- size (A4 -size) paper. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size (A3-size) paper. To change the paper size, contact your service representative. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual. 13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes. 15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. 16 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 Installed onto the finisher to allow Z folding or punching. 17 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Installed onto the finisher to allow Fold/Bind. Referred to as the saddle stitcher throughout the manual. 18 Finisher FS-526 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 19 Punch kit PK-516 Installed onto the finisher to punch holes. 20 Post Inserter PI-505 Installed onto the finisher to enable insertion of a cover sheet into copied sheets. This unit also allows you to manually operate the finisher (only the lower tray is available). 21 Job Separator JS-602 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body. 22 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected. 23 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned. 24 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit. 25 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit. 26 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit contains a speaker. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 27 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-4 2.1 Options 2 28 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine. 29 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy. This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying. 30 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to be used on the control panel. 31 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings when distributing a PDF document using the scan or User Box function. 32 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 33 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function. 34 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of this machine. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-5 2.1 Options 2 2.1.2 bizhub C452 No. Name Description 1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C452" throughout the manual. 2 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 3 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 4 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages. 8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled color printer. 10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-size (A4 -size) paper. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 2 3 1 4 16 11 9 10 8 13 12 14 15 5 6 7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-6 2.1 Options 2 11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size (A3-size) paper. To change the paper size, contact your service representative. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual. 13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes. 15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. 16 Job Separator JS-504 Install this unit onto the Output Tray of the main unit to offset the printed papers. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Job Separator through the manual. No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body. 17 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected. 18 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned. 19 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit. 20 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit. 21 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit contains a speaker. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 22 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 23 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine. 24 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy. This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying. 25 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to be used on the control panel. 26 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings when distributing a PDF document using the scan or User Box function. 27 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 28 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function. 29 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of this machine. 30 Heater HT-508 Install this unit into the tray to dehumidify the paper. Dehumidifying prevents paper in the tray from absorbing moisture. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-7 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2 Main Body 2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) No. Name 1 Control panel 2 Left-side cover release lever 3 Left-side cover 4 Lateral guide 5 ADF 6 Original tray 7 Original output tray 8 Sub power switch 9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 10 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 (For compact keyboard) 11 Automatic duplex unit release lever 12 Automatic duplex unit 5 9 10 16 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1 4 6 7 8 11 14 13 12 15 17 18 19 22 20 21 30 2 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-8 2.2 Main Body 2 13 Upper right-side door 14 Upper right-side door release lever 15 Bypass tray door 16 Bypass Tray 17 Bypass tray door release lever 18 Lower right-side door 19 Lower right-side door release lever 20 Paper-empty indicator 21 Total counter 22 Main power switch 23 Tray 4 24 Tray 3 25 Tray 2 26 Tray 1 27 Lower front door 28 Upper front door 29 Output tray 30 Status indicator No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-9 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) The illustration above shows the main unit with an optional video interface kit, fax kit, and mount kit. No. Name 1 Finisher connector 2 Filter 3 Power cord 4 Power switch for dehumidifying heater 5 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) 6 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) 1 2 13 10 11 12 9 8 4 3 7 5 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-10 2.2 Main Body 2 7 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) 8 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) 9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 10 RS-232C port 11 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 12 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T) 13 Ozone filter No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-11 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.3 Main bodyInside bizhub C652/C552/C452 No. Name 1 Original glass 2 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit cover lever 4 Print head glass cleaning tool 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 7 10 11 12 13 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-12 2.2 Main Body 2 5 Waste toner box 6 Imaging unit 7 Charger-cleaning tool 8 Imaging unit release lever 9 Toner cartridges 10 Slit glass 11 Original scales 12 Jam removal dial 13 Slit glass cleaner No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-13 2.2 Main Body 2 bizhub C652DS/C552DS No. Name 1 Original glass 2 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit cover lever 4 Print head glass cleaning tool 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 7 10 11 12 13 14 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-14 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.4 Control panel 5 Waste toner box 6 Imaging unit 7 Charger-cleaning tool 8 Imaging unit release lever 9 Toner cartridges 10 Slit glass (front) 11 Original scales 12 Opening and closing guide 13 Slit glass cleaner 14 Slit glass (back) No. Name No. Name 1 Stylus pen 2 Touch panel 3 Main power indicator 4 Sub power switch 5 Function key 6 Data indicator 1 2 3 5 4 8 7 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-15 2.2 Main Body 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel You can adjust the angle of the control panel of this machine among three levels. You can also tilt the control panel to the left. Use the control panel at an angle convenient to use. NOTICE When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel. 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull the control panel up or down. You can tilt the angle of the control panel to one of the three positions. 2 To tilt the control panel to the left or right, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left or right. 7 Keypad 8 Brightness adjustment dial No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-16 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.5 Touch panel When the machine has been turned on and is ready to begin the copy operation, the basic settings screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly press the desired button appearing in the screen. The basic settings screen can be switched between the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab. The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab; however, the functions that can be set are the same. This manual describes procedures for configuring settings from the Basic tab. The Quick Copy tab displays the setting items of the Basic tab on one screen, which is useful for configuring multiple settings. NOTICE Do not apply excessive pressure on the touch panel. Such impact may leave a flaw on the panel, inviting damage to the touch panel. When operating in the touch panel, never press down on the touch panel with force or with a pointed object such as a mechanical pencil. Basic tab Quick Copy tab No. Name 1 Message display area 2 Functions/settings display area 3 Icon/shortcut key display area 4 Toner supply indicators 5 Left panel 6 Check Job 7 Job List 8 Copier setting button (arrow) 3 2 5 7 6 4 1 3 2 5 7 8 4 1 9bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-17 2.2 Main Body 2 dReference To switch the basic settings screen: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Tab]. To configure color selection settings for buttons and tabs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Color Selection Settings] . 9 Color settings No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-18 2.3 Option 2 2.3 Option 2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516 No. Name 1 Output tray 2 2 Output tray 1 3 Front door 1 26 20 19 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 23 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 25 24bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-19 2.3 Option 2 * Press the output tray switch to move folded and center stapled paper to the end of the folding output tray. 4 Horizontal transport unit cover 5 Jam removal dial [FN8] 6 Guide lever [FN7] 7 Guide lever [FN9] 8 Jam removal dial [FN6] 9 Jam removal dial [FN5] 10 Guide lever [FN3] 11 Guide lever [FN4] 12 Punch kit 13 Punch scrap box 14 Guide lever [FN10] 15 Recessed pull 16 Jam removal dial [FN11] 17 Saddle stitcher 18 Output belt 19 Output tray switch * 20 Folding output tray 21 Jam removal dial [FN2] 22 Guide lever [FN1] 23 Staple replacement door 24 Guide lever [FN13] 25 Guide lever [FN14] 26 Exit cover No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-20 2.3 Option 2 2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 No. Name 1 Finishing tray 2 Job separator cover 1 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-21 2.3 Option 2 2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 No. Name 1 Z folding/conveyance unit 2 Guide lever [FN1] 3 Punch scrap box 4 Front door 5 Guide lever [FN6] 6 Guide lever [FN7] 7 Guide lever [FN8] 8 Recessed pull [FN2] 9 Jam removal dial [FN5] 1 2 4 3 5 8 9 7 11 10 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-22 2.3 Option 2 2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 10 Guide lever [FN3] 11 Jam removal dial [FN4] No. Name No. Name 1 Post inserter control panel 2 Lower tray paper guide 3 Lower Tray 4 Upper Tray 5 Upper Tray paper guide 6 Upper unit release lever 6 1 3 4 5 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-23 2.3 Option 2 2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-24 2.3 Option 2 No, Name 1 Output tray 2 2 Output tray 1 3 Front door 4 Horizontal transport unit cover 5 Stapler 6 Guide lever [FN3] 7 Jam removal dial [FN2] 8 Guide lever [FN1] 9 Guide lever [FN4] 10 Staple holder 11 Punch scrap box 12 Saddle stitcher 20 17 18 19 15 16bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-25 2.3 Option 2 2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504 13 Jam removal dial [FN6] 14 Recessed pull [FN5] 15 Transport unit 16 Punch kit 17 Job separator 18 Staple cartridge 19 Recessed pull [FN7] 20 Folding output tray No, Name No. Name 1 Jam removal dial 2 Eject assist lever 3 Output tray 2 4 Tray extension 5 Output tray 1 1 2 3 4 5bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-26 2.3 Option 2 2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 No. Name 1 Jam removal cover 2 Upper door 3 Paper take-up roller 4 Paper-empty indicator 5 Release lever 1 3 2 5 4 1 3 2 5 43 Using this machinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-2 3.1 Turning on or off the machine 3 3 Using this machine 3.1 Turning on or off the machine This machine has two power controls: the [main power switch] and [sub power switch]. The [main power switch] turns on or off all functions of the machine. Normally, keep the [main power switch] on. The [sub power switch] turns on and off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. Turning [sub power switch] off causes the machine to enter power-saving mode. 0 When the [sub power switch] is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen appears to indicate that the machine is starting up. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears in the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. 0 A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [sub power switch] is turned on. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. 0 The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on and before any settings are configured from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings configured from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed. The jobs yet to be printed will be deleted. 0 Settings that have not been registered and jobs in the printing queue are cleared when the [main power switch] and [sub power switch] are turned off. 0 To turn the [main power switch] on immediately after turning it off, wait for 10 or more seconds before turning it on again. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] while images are being scanned, transmitted, or received. Data being scanned or communicated will be deleted. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] during the copying or printing process. If you turn it off, a paper jam may occur. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable of the compact keyboard while this machine is turned on. Do not also connect another medium to the USB port for the compact keyboard. 1 To turn the power on, open the main power switch cover, and then press n on the [main power switch]. 2 Close the main power switch cover. 3 Press the [sub power switch]. Check that the touch panel is turned on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-3 3.1 Turning on or off the machine 3 4 To turn the power off, press the [sub power switch], then the [main power switch]. dReference To change the default settings for Copy: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Copy Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-4 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 3.2 Basic copy operations The following procedures describe how to set the original and the basic copy operations. 3.2.1 Placing originals Place the original in the ADF or on the original glass. Select the optimal position for setting the original according to the type of the original to be copied. - Using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed and scanned automatically, one page at a time from the top. The ADF can also be used to automatically scan 2-sided originals. - When using the original glass, place the original directly on the original glass for scanning. This method is suited for originals in the form of a book and the like that cannot be fed through the ADF. Load the original, and configure settings for relevant functions as needed. Loading the original into the ADF The following types of originals should not be loaded into the ADF. If loaded, paper may be jammed or the original may be damaged. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn originals - Highly translucent or transparent originals , such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper - Coated originals such as carbon-backed paper - Originals printed on paper thicker than 55-7/8 lb (210 g/m2 ) - Originals printed on paper thicker than 34-1/16 lb (128 g/m2 ) for 2-sided printing - Originals that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Originals that are bound in a book or booklet form - Originals with pages bound together with glue - Originals with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Originals with binder holes - Originals that have just been printed with this machine 1 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of the original. 2 Load the original face up in the original tray and arrange according to the scanning order. Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back side of the machine. % Do not load more than 100 sheets or up to the point where the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Such an action may cause an original paper jam or damage to the original. It may also invite machine failure. However, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. % If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight, causing it to jam or become damaged. % If the document is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the document toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the document orientation. 3 Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-5 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 Placing the original on the original glass 0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 15°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 15°, the correct document size may not be detected. 0 Do not place an original weighing more than 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) on the original glass. Furthermore, do not use a strong force to press down on a book or any other form of original that must be spread on the original glass. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur. 0 For thick books or large objects, perform scanning without closing the ADF. When a document is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the original glass surface where light may be emitted through. Note, however, that the light coming through the original glass is not a laser beam, and will not expose the user to the related hazards. 0 When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, you do not have to close the ADF to copy the original. Place the original anywhere on the original glass. The area surrounding the original text will be excluded from the copy. For details, refer to page 5-42. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Place the original face down on the original glass. % Load the original by placing it so that its top side faces the back side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. % For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original. % For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a book or a magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. % When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, the original can be placed anywhere on the original glass. 4 Close the ADF. 3.2.2 Basic copy operations The following procedure describes the basic copy operations. 1 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and load them face up in the ADF. % The original should be placed face down on the original glass. 2 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire. % If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number. 3 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and copied. % To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. % A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that the next original can be scanned.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-6 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 % If an original with copy guard patterns embedded is scanned, the copy operation is stopped and the job is discarded. % If an original with a password embedded by the password copy function is scanned, the copy operation starts after you enter the password. % If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned at the same time, you will need to enter a password for each original. 3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions This section describes copy operations using combination of functions. 1 Load the original. 2 Press [Original Setting]. % For details on original setting, refer to page 5-15. 3 Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. % For details on the Duplex/Combine settings, refer to page 5-8.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-7 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 4 Press [Basic] and then configure settings for respective functions. % For details on color setting, refer to page 5-4. % For details on paper size setting, refer to page 5-5. % For details on magnification setting, refer to page 5-7. % For details on image quality of originals, refer to page 5-18. % For details on copy density setting, refer to page 5-18. % For details on the setting not to rotate images, refer to page 5-14. 5 Press [Application] and then configure settings for respective functions. % For setting for the application functions, refer to page 5-20. 6 Press [Basic] ö [Finishing]. % For details on copy finishing and folding/binding, refer to page 5-10.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-8 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 7 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details]. % For details on checking job settings, refer to page 5-64. 8 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire. % If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number. 9 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and copied. % To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. % A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that the next original can be scanned. Functions that cannot be combined Some settings cannot be combined with each other. If they are combined improperly, the settings will be given priorities in either of the two ways described below. - The setting configured last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting configured first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)4 Control Panel Keysbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-2 4 4 Control Panel Keys This section describes the functions of the keys on the operation panel. Control panel and functions Press the keys on the operation panel to use the Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box or other functions. No. Name Description Page 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. You can configure various settings by directly touching the touch panel. - 2 Power indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the [main power switch]. - 3 [Sub power switch] Turns on or off machine operations. When turned off, the machine is in the power-saving mode. - 4 [Power Save] Enters Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. p. 4-11 5 [Mode Memory] Allows you to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. p. 4-7 6 [Utility/Counter] Switches to the Utility screen or the Meter Count screen. p. 4-6 7 [Reset] Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel. p. 4-4 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-3 4 8 [Interrupt] Switches to Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode" appears in the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. p. 4-4 9 [Stop] Temporarily stops the operation while copying, scanning or printing. p. 4-4 10 [Proof Copy] Allows you to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel. p. 4-18 11 [Start] Starts the copy, scan or fax operation. p. 4-4 12 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. Lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. - 13 [C] (Clear) Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad. p. 4-17 14 Keypad Allows you to enter the number of copies to be produced, the zoom ratio, and various other setting values. - 15 [Guidance] Switches to the Guidance screen. You can display descriptions of the functions and operating procedures. p. 4-15 16 [Enlarge Display] Enters Enlarge Display mode. If you are using PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen will not be available. p. 4-14 17 [Accessibility] Switches to the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. p. 4-12 18 [Access] If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. p. 4-8 19 [Brightness] dial Allows you to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. - 20 [User Box] Enters User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". p. 4-5 21 [Fax/Scan] Enters Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". p. 4-5 22 [Copy] Enters Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode. ) While the machine is copying, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. p. 4-5 No. Name Description Pagebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-4 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key 4 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key The [Start] key % Start the copy, scan or fax operation. Press this key again to restart a suspended job. % When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the copy operation cannot begin. (Check that no warning or message is displayed in the touch panel.) The [Stop] key % Press the [Stop] key while copying to temporarily stop the scanning or printing operation. % To resume a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key. % To delete a temporarily stopped job, select a job in the suspended job list in the screen, and press the [Delete] key. The [Interrupt] key Press this key to start a new copy job with different copy settings by suspending the current job in process. This is convenient when you need to make copies urgently. 0 The [Interrupt] key cannot be operated while an original is being scanned. 0 Pressing the [Interrupt] key restores the default settings. 1 Load the original. 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and printing of the current job is suspended. 3 Configure the copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. 5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The Interrupt indicator goes off and the interrupting copy settings are canceled. The copy settings return to those specified before the interrupting copying job. The [Reset] key Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel. % Press the [Reset] key. The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-5 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key 4 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key This machine operates in Copy, Fax/Scan and User Box modes, from which the user can select a desired function. The indicator on the selected key lights up in green. The [Copy] key % Enters Copy mode. The basic settings screen appears. The [Fax/Scan] key % Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". The [User Box] key % Enters User Box mode. For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-6 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key 4 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key Press the [Utility/Counter] key to display the Utility screen. You can configure the machine settings and check its use status in the Utility menu screen. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key. Settings One-Touch/User Box Registration Allows you to register items related to the fax/scanner and User Boxes operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]". User Settings Provides setting items that can be operated by the user. Administrator Settings Provides setting items that can only be operated by the administrator of the machine. Check Consumable Life Allows you to check the status (usage level) of consumables. Banner Printing Allows you to select whether to enable or disable printing on long sheets of paper. This menu item appears when the optional finisher is not installed. For details on long paper print, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Device Information Displays information about this machine. Function Version: Allows you to check the function version of the currently installed firmware. Check the function version of this machine and of the printer driver. Ensure that they match before using this machine. IPv4 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv4 address. IPv6 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv6 address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-7 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key 4 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key Combine frequently used copy settings into programs and register them with this machine. These programs can easily be recalled as programs. 0 Up to 30 programs can be registered. 0 To register a program, configure the copy settings to be registered before pressing the [Mode Memory] key. % Press the [Mode Memory] key. dReference To prohibit modification and deletion of copy programs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Copy Program Lock Settings]. To delete a copy program: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Delete Saved Copy Program]. Settings Recall Copy Program Select the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. Register Program • From the copy program buttons displayed in the screen, press the button you want to register copy settings with, and then press [Register Program]. • Enter the registration name, and then press [OK]. Check Program settings Press this button to check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program button. Edit Name Press this button to rename the registration name of the selected copy program button. After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Edit Name] will not be displayed. Delete Press this button to delete the selected program button. After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Delete] will not be displayed.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-8 4.5 The [Access] key 4 4.5 The [Access] key If the administrator has configured user authentication settings/account track settings, only the users who have been registered or the users whose accounts have been registered can use this machine. If the administrator has configured a usage schedule, a user can use the machine by entering a password for non-business hours. Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track) 0 With the user authentication/account track functions enabled, only the users who enter passwords for users or for accounts can use this machine. 0 Thus, the number of copies among others can be managed by user/account. 0 Contact the administrator for information on the user name, account name, password and server name. 0 The login page that appears may vary depending on the user authentication/account track settings. 0 The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the User Authentication/Account Track is set to [Do Not Synchronize], complete user authentication, and then log in by using the Account Track screen. 0 If MFP authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 0 After copying is completed, press the [Access] key to log out from the machine. 0 To get permission to use the machine, you can use an authentication unit (biometrics type/IC card type) for authentication. 0 The account, which sets the use of this machine to suspend in Account Track Settings, cannot log in to this machine. The users, who belong to the suspended account, cannot also log in to this machine. 0 If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, check with your server administrator for information on the login procedure. % Press the [Access] key. Screen for user authentication Screen for account trackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-9 4.5 The [Access] key 4 dReference To configure user authentication/account track: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track]. Settings User Authentication Performs the user authentication procedure to use this machine. Public User Access Allows users who have no access to the user name or password to use this machine. This item is not displayed when [Public User Access] is set to [Restrict] in the General Settings of Administrator Settings. If enhanced security mode has been enabled, [Public User Access] is not displayed. User Name Enter the user name. User Name List Select a user name from a displayed list. • If enhanced security mode has been enabled, [User Name List] is not displayed. • The user, who has set the use of this machine to suspend in User Authentication Settings, is not displayed in the [User Name List]. Password Enter the password. Server Name Indicates the name of the default server. Press [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers. Select the desired server. Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you to use this machine. Account Track Performs the account track procedure to use this machine. Account Name Enter the account name. Password Enter the password. When the account track input method is set to [Password Only] in Administrator Settings, the login screen displays only [Password]. The user can directly enter the password in the login screen from the keypad. For an all-number password, the user can log in without displaying the keyboard screen, simply by pressing [Login], or the [Access] key. • For a password containing alphabets, numbers and/or symbol characters, press [Password] and then enter the password. • After entering numbers from the keypad, press [Password] to enter alphabets and symbols in succession. Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you to use this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-10 4.5 The [Access] key 4 Using the machine during non-scheduled hours The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the use of the machine can be limited. This is referred to as Weekly Timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used. 0 From the [Password for Non-Business Hours] screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 Enter the password for non-business hours. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Using the keypad, enter the length of time to elapse before the machine enters Sleep mode again. 5 Press [OK]. The basic settings screen appears. dReference To configure Weekly Timer: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-11 4.6 The [Power Save] key 4 4.6 The [Power Save] key If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is referred to as Low Power or Sleep mode. The following describes the procedure for returning from Low Power or Sleep mode. 0 Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the warm-up process for returning to ready-for-copy state from Sleep mode is more time-consuming. 0 As the factory default, Low Power mode is set to restart after 15 minutes and Sleep mode after 30 minutes. In other words, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes. Likewise, it enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes has elapsed. 0 The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. % Press the [Power Save] key. The machine returns from Low Power mode when any other key on the control panel or the touch panel surface is pressed. dReference To enable Low Power mode: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-12 4.7 The [Accessibility] key 4 4.7 The [Accessibility] key This section describes the procedures for configuring settings for the control panel and adjusting the touch panel. 0 To return to the basic settings screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key, the [Reset] key or [Close]. 0 In the Enlarge Display screen, [Default Enlarge Display Settings] appears, enabling you to configure default settings for use in the Enlarge Display mode using the copy or fax/scan functions. % Press the [Accessibility] key. Page 1/2 Page 2/2 Settings Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of touch panel buttons when they do not respond correctly because they may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor. • The touch sensors are not aligned in the touch panel if pressing [Touch Panel Adjustment] does not activate any action. Press the [1] key on the keypad. • Press the four check point buttons ([+]) on the touch panel adjustment screen while listening on a buzzer sound each time. When the checking by pressing the check point buttons is completed successfully, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. Press the [Start] key. • The check point buttons ([+]) can be pressed in any order. • To perform adjustment again, press the [C] (Clear) key, and then press the four check point buttons ([+]) again. • To cancel the touch panel adjustment process, press the [Stop] or [Reset] key. • If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-13 4.7 The [Accessibility] key 4 Key Repeat Start/Interval Time Specify the length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down, and also specify the length of time for the value to change to the next number. The settings specified for Key Repeat Start/Interval Time are only applied in Enlarge Display mode. System Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the basic settings screen. Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen. Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings. Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen. Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. Message Display Time Specify the duration of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. Sound Setting Configure the settings for sounding associated with key operations. The following sound setting functions are available. To produce a sound, press [Yes], and then select the volume from [Low], [Medium] and [High]. To not produce a sound, press [No]. [Operation Confirmation Sound] • [Input Confirmation Sound]: A sound produced when a key in the control panel or a button in the touch panel is pressed for an entry • [Invalid Input Sound]: A sound produced for invalid button operation in the control panel or the touch panel • [Basic Sound]: A sound produced when the default value item is selected for an option subject to rotational switching [Successful Completion Sound] • [Completed Operation Sound]: A sound produced when the operation has completed normally • [Completed Transmission Sound]: A sound produced when a communications-related operation is completed normally [Completed Preparation Sound]: A sound produced when a device is ready [Caution Sound] • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 1)]: A sound produced when the replacement time is nearing for supplies or a replaceable part and a message appears in the touch panel • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 2)]: A sound produced for a user error • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 3)]: A sound produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appears or the User's Guide • [Severe Caution Sound]: A sound produced when an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires action by a service representative Default Enlarge Display Settings For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-14 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key 4 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode and enable machine operation using a screen with a layout with larger-size characters. For details on the Enlarge Display screen, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". 0 Press the [Enlarge Display] key to return to normal display. 0 If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, the login screen cannot be switched to the enlarged display mode. % Press the [Enlarge Display] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-15 4.9 The [Guidance] key 4 4.9 The [Guidance] key Press this key to view and check descriptions of various functions and operating procedures. When the [Guidance] key is pressed, the Guidance screen for the displayed screen appears. 0 From the Help main menu screen, you can find the target Guidance screen based on the function or purpose. 0 Refer to the left panel of the Guidance screen to check the position of the displayed Guidance screen in the menu structure. 0 Press [Close] in the Guidance screen to move up one level in the menu structure. Press [Exit] to exit Guidance mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Guidance] key was pressed. Press [To Menu] to display the Help main menu. 0 In the Main Menu and Guidance Menu screens, select items by pressing the button or by pressing the key in the keypad. 0 The Guidance screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed: Scanning, printing a proof copy, preview of a finished copy, operating in Enlarge Display mode, or operating in Accessibility mode 0 While the Guidance screen is displayed, the following keys on the operation panel are disabled: [Start], [C], [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], and [Enlarge Display] % Press the [Guidance] key. Settings Function Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by function type and name. Search by Operation Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by operation type. • With [Go to function] displayed, the function for the selected operation can be set. However, when the fax/scan function is used, for example, [Go to function] displayed on a Guidance screen for the copy function, for example, cannot be selected as it is a different function from the one in use. • Select [Copy] and press [Scan special original]; instructions and animation guidance are displayed to enable the user to view the procedure for placing an original. However, Start Guidance is not displayed in the animation guidance for placing an original. Function Map Check descriptions from a navigation destination of the current screen or the menu structure it belongs to. Other Functions Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function. Name and Function of Parts Check the description of the main unit and its options. Service/Admin. Information Check the name, extension number and E-mail address of the administrator.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-16 4.9 The [Guidance] key 4 Consumables Replace/ Processing Procedure Check procedures for replacing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste toner box, adding staples or discarding punch-hole scraps by viewing animations. Press the target button, and then press [Start Guidance]. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-17 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key 4 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad. % Press the [C] key. The value is deleted. Enter the correct value.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-18 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) Print a single proof copy for checking before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 0 When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 1 Load the original. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Press [Print] and then select the original direction. 5 Press the [Start] key. This prints one copy when the original has been loaded in the ADF. 6 When it has been loaded on the original glass, press the [Finish], then the [Start] key. A single proof copy is printed. 7 Check the proof copy. % If the proof copy is found all right, go to Step 10. To change the copy settings, go to Step 8. 8 Press [Change Setting] in the proof copy screen. After changing the copy settings in the Change Settings screen, press [OK] % "Number of Sets" in the proof copy screen indicates "the number of sets printed in the proof copy mode/the number of sets specified to be printed", and "Total # of Pages Printed" indicates "the number of sheets printed in the proof copy mode/the total number of sheets to be printed". % To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then press [Delete]. % If no operation is performed for the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy job for which proof copy has been completed is registered as a stored job and the basic settings screen appears again. Stored job registration is performed when the System Auto Reset function is activated or one minute after (if System Auto Reset is set to "OFF"). 9 Press the [Proof Copy] key to repeat proof copy. 10 Press [Print]. The number of copies yet to be printed is registered as a copy job.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-19 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) Check the finishing image of a copy in the touch panel before printing. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 0 When you scan the original using the Program Jobs function, scan all originals, press [Finish], and then preview the finishing state. 0 When you attempt to scan the original with an insert page specified, the machine scans the original first, and then the insert original. When this process is complete, you can preview the finishing state. 0 To use the Book Copy or Booklet function, no preview is available. Check the finishing state after printing. 0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527. 0 Fold and Center Staple & Fold is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher. 0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526. 1 Load the original. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Press [Preview on Screen] for the proof copy method and then select the original direction. 5 Press the [Start] key. The Preview (View Status) screen appears. 6 Check the preview image. % To change the settings, press [View Pages]. Go to Step 7. % To start printing, press the [Start] key. % To scan another original, press [Finish], load the original, and then press the [Start] key. 7 Change the settings, and then press [View Status]. Settings Prev. Page/ Next Page Switch from the current screen to either the previous or the next screen. Zoom Enlarge the preview image and check the details. Press [+] and [-] to change the zoom ratio from full size to 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the right and at the bottom side of the image. The finishing state cannot be displayed if you change the display size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-20 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 8 Press the [Start] key. Select this menu to start printing. Rotate Image Rotate the preview image 180 degrees in order to correct the orientation of the original if necessary. Pressing rotates the currently displayed page. Pressing [Rotate Pages] displays the Scanned Page List. Select the page to be rotated. Up to six scanned pages can be displayed. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the selection. View Finishing View the finishing settings using icons or in text on the preview screen, and check the finishing state. Change Setting Change the settings for the next original to be scanned. View Pages/View Status Switch between the View Status and View Pages tab in the Preview screen. Perform image rotation and setting changes on [View Pages] and stop scanning on [View Status]. Settings5 Copy Functionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-2 5 5 Copy Function You can configure the settings for multiple copy features by pressing buttons on the operation or touch panel. This chapter describes the functions that can be configured by pressing the buttons in the touch panel. Item Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. p. 5-3 Original Setting Configure the type and size of the original. p. 5-15 Quality/Density Configure the quality or density for the original to optimize copy quality. p. 5-18 Application Configure the application settings for making copies. p. 5-20 Left panel Job List Check jobs currently being performed and jobs waiting to be performed. p. 5-62 Check Job Check the current settings and the result of the settings. p. 5-64bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-3 5.1 Basic 5 5.1 Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. Item Color Specify the print color for making copies. p. 5-4 Paper Select the paper type to be printed on and paper tray. p. 5-5 Zoom Select the zoom ratio of the image to be copied. p. 5-7 Duplex/Combine Configure the 2-sided copy and combined copy settings. p. 5-8 Finishing program button Configure frequently used offset and finishing settings in advance. You can activate preferred finishing functions by simply pressing this button. p. 6-8 Finishing Press this button to select the settings for offsetting and finishing copies. p. 5-10 Separate Scan Select this item to divide a large original and scan it in a number of batches. p. 5-13 Auto Rotate OFF Select this item to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image. p. 5-14 Language Selection Display the Language Selection screen to specify the language to be displayed on the touch panel. This item is not displayed when two shortcut keys are configured. - Shortcut Key Allows you to arrange shortcut keys for the frequently used Application functions on the Basic screen. -bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-4 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.1 Color Select the print color for making copies. For the print color, you can select one from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [2 Color], [Black] and [Single Color]. % Press [Basic] ö [Color]. Settings Auto Color Automatically detects whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white, and selects the appropriate color setting (full color or black). Full Color Makes copies in full color, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white. 2 Color Prints all areas of the scanned original determined to be in color with the specified color, and prints all areas determined to be black in black. Black Prints the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white. Single Color Prints the copy in the specified single color, regardless of the color of the scanned original. When you specify a single color, the original is copied by converting the color differences (apparent color densities) and the gradation levels into density differences of the single color. Average Density Copies the original by only converting the gradation levels into density differences of the single color, regardless of the color differences in the original, bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-5 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.2 Paper Select the paper type and size to be printed, or to change the paper size and paper type settings specified for each paper tray. The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. 0 If you select [Transparency], specify [Black] for [Color] in advance. 0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time. 0 If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the Auto Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to Single Side Only is given priority to be selected with 1-sided printing.) When setting special paper in the paper tray, be sure to set the paper type. For details on special paper, refer to page 12-2. % Press [Basic] ö [Paper]. Settings Auto Automatically selects the paper size according to the original size. 1-4 Trays Allows you to specify the paper manually. # (Bypass Tray) L Large capacity unit (Optional) Change Tray Settings Specify the paper type and paper size for the selected paper tray. Paper Type Specify the paper type for the selected paper tray. Paper Size Specify the paper size for the selected paper tray. [Auto Detect]: Automatically detects the paper size. [12-1/4 e 18 w] (Only for Tray 1 and Tray 2): Enables 12-1/4 e 18 w to be selected. [Standard Size] (only for Bypass Tray): Specify a paper size to use the bypass tray as a paper tray dedicated to the paper size. [Custom Size] (only for Bypass Tray): Enter the paper size. [Wide Paper]: Select a paper size larger than the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-6 5.1 Basic 5 Configuring a custom size % [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Custom Size]. Configuring wide paper % [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Wide Paper]. Settings X/Y • North American model (inch): Configure the length [X] and width [Y] with pressing [+] or [-]. • European model (cm): Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper. Store Register custom paper sizes. memory 1 to 5 Select the memory button where the paper size is to be stored. Change Custom Size Name Rename memory button names. Settings Wide Paper Select the size of the paper to be loaded. Change Size X/Y Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper. Preset Paper Sizes Enables 12 e 18 w to be selected.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-7 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.3 Zoom The original image size in the original can be enlarged or reduced. 0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time. 0 If the auto zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper. % Press [Basic] ö [Zoom]. dReference To set image rotation: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Enlargement Rotation]. Settings Auto Automatically selects the most appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. Full Size Copies the original image in the size identical to the original (100%). Manual • Enter the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy. • Under "Set Individual Zoom", you can enter different zoom ratios for the X and Y directions. Set Zoom Enter the desired zoom and select the button to register the value with. "User Preset Zoom" indicates the registered zoom. Minimal Copies an original image slightly smaller than the original size or the specified size. The image in the original is centered on the paper without any cutoff. Select this setting when you want to copy the entire scope of the original within the paper used. -/+ Configure the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy without changing the aspect ratio. Fixed Zoom Select a preset zoom when copying from a fixed size original onto a fixed size paper. User Preset Zoom Select a registered copy zoom value. To change the registered zoom values, use [Set Zoom].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-8 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.4 Duplex/Combine Configure whether to scan one side or both sides of the originals and whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper. Multiple (2, 4 or 8) pages of original images can be reduced in size and printed on a single page. Using the Duplex/Combine function, you can save paper sheets for copying. % Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings 1-Sided > 1-Sided 2-Sided > 1-Sided 1-Sided > 2-Sided 2-Sided > 2-Sided Binding Position Configure the binding position of the original and copies to be output. Without setting the Binding Position, the resulting copy may not be what you intended. When [1- Sided > 1- Sided] is selected, the binding position cannot be set. Original Binding Position Select the original binding position from [LeftBind], [Right-Bind], [Top] and [Auto]. • If the binding position for the original is set to [Auto], the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. If the original length is more than 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. • If [Auto] is selected for the original binding position, the binding margin is set at the top or on the left.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-9 5.1 Basic 5 Binding Position Output Binding Position Select the output binding position from [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top] and [Auto]. • If the binding position for the copy is set to [Auto], the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. • If Output Binding Position is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the top or on the left. Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass. Without setting original direction, the resulting copy may not be what you intended. No Disables combined copy. 2in1 Copies images on two original pages on one sheet of paper. Portrait original pages Landscape original pages 4in1/8in1 4in1 Copies images of four original pages on one sheet of paper. 8in1 Copies images of eight original pages on one sheet of paper. Horizontal Specify the combine order of the original (Numbering Direction setting). Vertical Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-10 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.5 Finishing Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray. 0 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. 0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527. 0 The Fold/Bind is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher. 0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526. 0 "Staple" cannot be used together with "Offset". 0 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold or Tri-Fold function cannot be used together with any of "Offset", "Staple" or "Punch". % Press [Basic] ö [Finishing]. Settings Sort Prints the copied sets separately when a multi-page original is copied. Group Makes multiple copies of each page when you make multiple copies of a multipage original. 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-11 5.1 Basic 5 Offset Yes/No Specify whether to separate each set of copies from another set in the output tray when copying multiple sets of multi-page originals. When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is not installed: If the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. • 8-1/2 e 11, A4 or B5 paper is used • Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray • Auto paper selection is specified for the paper size setting When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed: The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Fold/Bind When the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed on the Finisher FS-526: Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Z-Fold To configure the Z folding setting, install the Z Folding Unit ZU-606. When the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed on the Finisher FS-527: Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Staple Staples copies in corner or at two points before they are output. Punch Punches holes in copies before they are output. Settings 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-12 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.6 Post Inserter When the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed on the Finisher FS-526, you can manually operate the Finisher FS-526 using the post inserter control panel. Reference - Only the lower tray can be used as the output tray. The upper tray is not available. Keys on control panel Position Setting Configure desired staple or hole-punch positions. Select Auto, and the machine automatically judges the staple or punch positions for the paper relative to the original direction loaded. • A staple or hole-punch position is set along the long side of the paper if the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. • Staple or hole-punch positions are set along the short side of the paper if the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm). • Staple or punching positions are set on the upper or left-side end. • Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. • If desired, press [Original Direction], and then select the original direction. Settings No. Name 1 Corner staple lamp 2 Center staple & fold lamp 3 [Finishing] key 4 2-hole lamp 5 3-hole lamp 6 [Select punch] key 7 [Start/stop] key 8 4-hole lamp 9 Tri-fold lamp 10 2 position staple lamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-13 5.1 Basic 5 Finishing using Post Inserter 1 Place paper in the lower tray of the Post Inserter, and align the lateral guide to the paper size. % Set the paper by placing it so that its top side faces the back of the machine. % To use the corner staple or 2-staple option, load the paper face up. % To perform Punch, load the paper face up. % To perform Bind, load the front side of the bound paper face down. % To perform Tri-Fold, load the outside of the tri-folded paper face down. 2 Press [Finishing] key and [Select punch] key, and select the desired finishing. % To configure Finishing settings, press [Finishing] key to turn the LED on. To configure punch settings, press [Select punch] key to turn the LED on. % Punch settings are available together with the corner staple or 2-staple option. 3 Press the [Start/stop] key. % If [Start/stop] key is pressed during operation, the operation will be stopped. 5.1.7 Separate Scan When the original contains pages exceeding the capacity of the ADF, you can divide the original into several batches to handle each lot as a single copy job. You can also use the copy function by switching between the ADF and the original glass for scanning the originals. 0 Do not load original sheets beyond the upper limit for the ADF. It would cause jamming and/or spoiling of the original or failure of the machine. 0 When making 2-sided or combined copies using the original glass, the machine can scan a number of original pages without enabling Separate Scan. 1 Load the original. 2 In the Basic tab, press [Separate Scan]. ABC Front Cover Front Cover ABC ABC ABCbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-14 5.1 Basic 5 3 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned. 4 Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key. % To change the scanning settings, press [Change Setting]. 5 Repeat Step 4 until all pages of the original are scanned. 6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish]. 7 Press the [Start] key. dReference To set the Separate Scan output method: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Separate Scan Output Method]. 5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF Select this setting to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image. 0 For some paper sizes or zoom values, part of the image may be cut off. % Press [Basic] ö [Auto Rotate OFF].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-15 5.2 Original Setting 5 5.2 Original Setting Configure the original status or original direction for outputting desired copies. % Press [Original Setting]. Settings Mixed Original Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time. Z-Folded Original Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Binding Position Specify the original binding position (page margin) to prevent the copy from being printed upside-down when scanning a 2-sided original, Auto Automatically configures the binding position of the original. • A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. • If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. Original Direction Specify the original direction to load into the ADF or place on the original glass when copying 2-sided originals or making 2-sided or combined copies. Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon a copy output when loading an original in the ADF.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-16 5.2 Original Setting 5 Copying mixed originals Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time. To copy onto paper of the same size as the original, select [Full Size] in the Zoom tab and select [Auto] on the Paper tab. To copy all original pages on paper of the same size, select [Auto] in the Zoom tab and select the desired paper size on the Paper tab. 0 When [1-Sided > 2-Sided] is selected together with Auto Paper, the back side becomes blank if its paper size is different from that of the front side. For example, if a single-sided original is copied in the order of 11 × 17 (A3) and 8-1/2 × 11 (A4), it results in copying of the front side (11 × 17 (A3)) / back side (blank) and of the front side (8-1/2 × 11 (A4)) / back side (blank). NOTICE Load all of the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest original page. 2 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and load them face up in the ADF. 3 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting]. 4 Press [Mixed Original]. % To cancel the setting, press [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used for the Mixed Original setting. Original Size Maximum Original Width 11 e 17 w (A3 w) 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) 8-1/2 e 14 w (B4 w) 8-1/2 e 11 w (A4 w) 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v (A5 v) 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w (A5 w) (B5 v) (B5 w) 11 e 17 w (A3 w) o o - - - - - - 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) o o - - - - - - 8-1/2 e 14 w (B4 w) o o o - - - o - 8-1/2 e 11 w (A4 w) o o o o o - o - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v (A5 v) - - o o o - o - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w (A5 w) - - - - - o - o (B5 v) o o o - - - o - (B5 w) - - o o o - o o o Possible to combine - Not possible to combinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-17 5.2 Original Setting 5 Copying Z-folded originals Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied. The length of the first page of the original is detected, and the subsequent pages are scanned as pages of the same size. NOTICE Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper jam may occur. 1 Load the original into the ADF. 2 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting]. 3 Press [Z-Folded Original]. % To cancel the setting, press [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-18 5.3 Quality/Density 5 5.3 Quality/Density Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality/density. % Press [Quality/Density]. Settings Original Type Select the original type (text and image type) to obtain better copy quality. Text Copies originals containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo [Photo Paper]: Select this setting to print photos from originals containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced. [Printed Photo]: Select this setting to copy printed originals containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Photo [Photo Paper]: Select this setting when the original photos are printed on photographic paper. Halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly an original state as possible. A smooth copy image is produced. [Printed Photo]: Select this setting to copy printed originals, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly an original state as possible. Map Select this setting to copy originals with a background color, originals containing pencil markings or fine colored lines such as maps. A sharp copy image is produced.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-19 5.3 Quality/Density 5 Original Type Dot Matrix Original Select this setting to copy originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read. Copied Paper Select this setting to copy images (originals) printed using this machine. Density Adjust copy density. Background Removal Adjust the density of the background area for originals with colored background (newsprints, recycle paper, etc.) or originals on thin paper showing text or images from the back. Select [Auto] for "Background Removal Level" to enable automatic background density adjustment for copying with the optimal background density. For "Background Removal", normally [Bleed Removal] is selected. However, when copying an original with colored background, select [Paper Discoloration Adj] to make adjustment for background removal for copying. Text Enhancement Adjust the text reproduction level for an original with a photo overlapping the text (background text) to clarify the text on the background. To emphasize the text on the background, press [Daker Text] to adjust the setting toward +. To emphasize the background image, press [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward -. [Text Enhancement] can be configured when an item other than [Photo] is selected. Glossy Makes copies with a glossy finish. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-20 5.4 Application 5 5.4 Application Configure the application settings for making copies. Item Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Inserts another sheet of paper or adds a cover page to the paper for copying. You can also scan multiple copies of the original with different settings. p. 5-21 Edit Color Inverts the contrast or gradation of the original or prints the original in the mirror image. It also adds a color in the background or adjust the quality of a color image. p. 5-29 Book Copy/Repeat Configure the settings for a book or catalog. An image on a single sheet of original can be repeatedly copied or divided and enlarged in parts to produce copies of the respective parts. p. 5-33 Page Margin Select the binding margin (blank area) of the paper used for copying. p. 5-37 Image Adjust Configure the layout for the image when the paper is larger than the original. p. 5-39 Booklet Automatically arranges the page order of the scanned original and makes 2-sided 2 in 1 copies to produce a page layout for a centerbound book, such as a magazine. p. 5-40 Erase Erases unnecessary outside portion of the original body text or erases the area outside the original placed on the original glass. p. 5-41 Stamp/Composition Prints the date/time, page number or a stamp printed on copies. This function also allows you to embed information for preventing unauthorized copying in a document. p. 5-43 Card Copy Copies the contents of the front and back sides of a card-size original, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card, on one sheet. p. 5-59 Save in User Box Saves the scanned original data in a User Box. p. 5-60bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-21 5.4 Application 5 5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert OHP Interleave Prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together because of the heat produced during copying by having paper (interleaves) inserted between the transparencies. 0 Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black. 0 Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies. 0 The number of copies is fixed to one. You cannot change. 0 The finishing function cannot be changed. 0 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. 0 Do not use a transparency that has been through the machine even once. It may lead to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. (Even if a transparency has been discharged without printing, it cannot be reused.) 1 Load the original. 2 Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black]. 3 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. Load the interleave paper into the desired paper tray. 4 Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and press [OK]. 5 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [OHP Interleave]. dReference Setting Black for Color Settings: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black]. Settings Interleave Paper Select the paper tray loaded with paper with a transparency interleaf. Transparency Indicates the paper size of the loaded transparency. EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGHbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-22 5.4 Application 5 Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the front and back covers. 0 Use paper of the same size for the body text and cover sheets, and ensure the same orientation of paper for both purposes. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Cover Sheet]. dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings None Disables copying of the front/back cover and blank sheet insertion. Front (Copy) For 1-sided copy: Copies the first page of the original onto paper for the front cover sheet. For 2-sided copy: Copies the second page of the original onto the back of the paper for the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Adds paper for the front cover sheet as the first page of the copy. Back (Copy) For 1-sided copy: Copies the last page of the original onto the back cover page. For 2-sided copy: Copies the last two pages of the original the 2-sided copy mode onto both sides of the paper for the back cover when copying an original with an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Add paper for the back cover sheet to the last page of the copy. Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front/back cover page or blank cover pages. You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Front(Blank)] or [Back(Blank)] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-23 5.4 Application 5 Insert Sheet A different sheet of paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted as specified pages in the copies. You can select from two options: [Copy] and [Blank] to enable or disable copying to the inserted sheet. 0 You can specify up to 30 positions for insert sheets. 0 Use paper of the same size for the sheets to be inserted and for the original copies, and ensure the same orientation of paper for both. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Sheet]. Settings P --- Specify where to insert sheets of a different paper type. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order. Insert Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted. You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Blank] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed. Copy Copies the original with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When setting the specified page to "2" For 1-sided copy: Inserts the specified paper as the second page of the copies, and copies the second page of the original onto it. For 2-sided copy: Leaves the back side of the first page of the copy blank, inserts the specified paper for the second page of the copy, and makes a 2-sided copy of the second and third pages of the original onto the inserted sheet. 6 6 4 4 5 2 2 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-24 5.4 Application 5 dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Insert Image A multi-page original scanned on the original glass can be inserted at the pre-set location in an original first scanned with the ADF. 0 With the Insert Image function, the inserted original is added after the specified page. 0 You can specify up to 30 positions for the original to be inserted. 0 If the document scanned on the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the remaining pages of the inserted original are printed at the end of the original. 0 The original on the original glass is scanned with the same settings as for the original scanned in the ADF. 0 If the original scanned on the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages will not be printed. 0 If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified location. 0 If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the copy. 1 Load the original into the ADF. Blank Select this option to insert the specified paper sheet after the page you have specified. When setting the specified page to "3" For 1-sided copy: Inserts the specified paper as the fourth page of the copy. For 2-sided copy: Leaves the back side of the second page of the copy blank, and inserts the specified paper for the third page of the copy. Settings 6 6 4 4 5 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 2 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT A B 4 3 B 2 1 A 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-25 5.4 Application 5 2 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Image]. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass. 5 Press the [Start] key. % To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 4 and 5 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 6 Press [Finish]. 7 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins. Settings P --- Specify the position to insert the page scanned through the original glass. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-26 5.4 Application 5 Chapters When making 2-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. 0 You can set up to 30 positions for the first page of chapters. 0 Enable the Chapters function to set [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. For a 2-sided original, select [2-Sided >2- Sided]. 0 Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for text copies have the same size and orientation. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters]. dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings P --- Specify the first page of the chapters. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order. Chapter Paper Specify the paper tray for paper to be inserted for the first page of the chapter. Copy Insert Makes copies of the first pages of the chapters on paper of a different type from that for the text pages. None Copies all pages with the same type of paper. 3 7 7 8 6 2 6 4 4 5 3 3 3 7 7 8 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-27 5.4 Application 5 Program Jobs When the originals to be copied include different types of materials such as a 1-sided original for full size copying and a 2-sided original for enlarged copying among other things, you can use this setting for scanning various originals with different settings and then copy them all in a single copying job. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 0 Up to 100 types of originals can be scanned. 0 When configuring a program job, the [Group] setting cannot be selected in the Finishing screen. Instead, select [Sort]. 1 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Program Jobs]. 2 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. 3 Press [Fix]. % Press [Retry] to delete the scanned job. Press [Change Setting] to configure the copy settings. % When the original has been loaded on the original glass, press [Finish]. 4 Load the next original and press [Change Setting]. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-28 5.4 Application 5 5 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. % Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all originals have been scanned. 6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish]. 7 Press [Yes]. 8 Specify finish settings as needed. 9 Press [Start] or the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-29 5.4 Application 5 5.4.2 Edit Color Neg./Pos. Reverse Use this function to enable the original to be copied with the density and gradations of the image inversed. The images in the original are copied and output reversed like negative film of photographs. 0 If a single color is selected, the images are reversed relative to the selected color. 0 If a background color is selected, colors are reversed relative to the selected base color and the color of the images. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Neg./Pos. Reverse]. % To cancel the Neg./Pos. Reverse function, press [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again. dReference To set Single Color: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Single Color]. To Set Background Color: Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-30 5.4 Application 5 Mirror Image Copy originals as mirror images. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Mirror Image]. Settings Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-31 5.4 Application 5 Background Color Color the blank area of the original with a specified background color. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. Color Adjustment Adjust the image quality to fit an image based on the color-copied original. 1 Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Color Adjust]. Settings Select Color Select a background color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-32 5.4 Application 5 2 Configure respective functions. % Press [Sample Copy] to see how it will appear with the currently specified color quality adjustment settings. Settings Brightness Adjust the brightness of the copied image. Contrast Adjust the copy density balance. Saturation Adjust how vivid colors should be for full color copies. Red Adjust how vivid red colors should be for full color copies. Green Adjust how vivid green colors should be for full color copies. Blue Adjust how vivid blue colors should be for full color copies. Hue Adjust the hue for full color copies. The hue refers to a color trend relative to discrete colors such as red, blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can attain more reddish or bluish tone, for example. Copy Density Adjust copy density (lighter or darker). Sharpness Adjust the sharpness to emphasize the edges of text so that copied text can be read more easily. You can make an overly sharp original image softer or a blurry image clearer. Color Balance Adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) for full-color copies. Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in the copy.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-33 5.4 Application 5 5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat Book Copy Divides or does not divide page spreads (such as a book or catalog) into left and right pages to copy data. This function enables copying with the ADF open by placing the original on the Original Glass. If necessary, you can place an original image at the center of the paper to copy. 0 Place the original on the original glass. 0 If [Book Copy] is selected, [Image Adjust] is set to [Centering] and [Erase] is set to [Non-Image Area Erase] automatically. For details on [Centering], refer to page 5-39. For details on [Non-Image Area Erase], refer to page 5-41. The automatically set [Centering] or [Non-Image Area Erase] can be cancelled. 0 When [Book Spread] or [Separation] is selected, pressing the [Start] key starts printing. 0 When [Front and Back Cover] is selected, the scanning operation starts with the front cover followed by scanning of the back cover, and ends with scanning of all two-page spreads of the body text in the order of the page numbers. 0 When [Front Cover] is selected, all two-page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 0 When [Front and Back Cover] or [Front Cover] is selected, wait until all pages in the original are scanned and then press [Finish] and then the [Start] key to start printing. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Book Copy]. Settings Book Spread Copies both pages of a two-page spread original as a one page original. Separation Copies the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers. Front Cover Copies the front cover, the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers, and the back cover in this order. Front and Back Cover Copies the front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover in the original page order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-34 5.4 Application 5 Image Repeat An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. Specify the original and paper sizes or the zoom to automatically calculate the number of images to be copied accordingly. Alternatively, specify the desired number of repetitions. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Image Repeat]. Frame Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow around the book. Frame Configure the width of the area around the entire frame to be erased. Top, Right, Bottom, Left Configure the width of the top, right side, bottom and left side of the frame to be erased. None Select this settings to not erase the frame. Center Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow at the center of the book. Binding Position Select the binding position of the original. To indicate it, select [Separation], [Front Cover], and [Front and Back Cover]. Settings With Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the copy area of the sheet is filled with the copied image. If the entire image does not fit into the copy area, the extra range is not copied. Without Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the sheet is filled with the copied image. However, some parts of the image may be lost. Auto Detect Automatically detects the area to be scanned. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-35 5.4 Application 5 Poster Mode This function enables enlarged copy of the original image to a size exceeding the paper size that can be loaded in the machine, such as the 34 e 44 (A0) or 24 e 36 (B0) size. Specify the original size and the output size (enlarged copy size) to output enlarged copies of divided sections of the original onto separate sheets of paper respectively. Create an enlarged copy of the specified finished size by joining those copies of sections. To create an 34 e 44-size (A0-size) poster, create copies of sections on eight 11 e 17-size (A3-size) sheets and join them together. 0 Place the original on the original glass. 0 In Poster Mode, the number of copies is set to 1. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Poster Mode]. Set Range Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, or the reading range must be specified, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. 2/4/8 Repeat 2 Repeat 4 Repeat 8 Repeat Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original as many times as specified. Note, however, that an image that does not fit within the size of the paper used is copied with partial cutoff. [Repeat Interval Settings] can be configured only for [2 Repeat]. Repeat Interval Settings Specify the clearance between copied images. Settings Image Size Select the finished image size. Custom Size Enter the finished image size. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-36 5.4 Application 5 Booklet Original A catalog with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of the original catalog. 0 This function is available if a saddle stitcher is installed in the optional finisher. NOTICE Load a catalog with the staples removed. 1 Load the original. % To use the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page. Paper Size • North American model(inch): Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 inch. • European model(cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. Zoom Enter the zoom to output a copy of the finished size. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Settings 7 2 2 1 8 2 2 7 7 5 4 4 3 6 5 4 4 3 6 Staples + 2 7 8 1 4 5 6 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-37 5.4 Application 5 % To use the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top. 2 Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Booklet Original]. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish] and the [Start] key. 5.4.4 Page Margin Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When scanning a 2-sided original, you can specify the paper binding position (binding margin for the paper) to prevent the copy from being printed upside-down. Left Top Right 0 You can specify the binding position without creating a binding margin. 0 For 2-sided copy, you need to set the paper binding position and the original direction. Otherwise, the original image may be copied up-side-down. 0 If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 0 If part of the image is lost when copied with the specified binding margin settings, reduce the zoom and perform copying. % Press [Application] ö [Page Margin]. 3 3 4 6 6 5 1 1 2 8 8 7 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 AB DE GH 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF 2 1 ABC DEF 4 4 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHIbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-38 5.4 Application 5 dReference To set the zoom: Press [Basic] ö [Zoom]. Settings Margin Position Select an option from [Auto], [Left], [Top] and [Right]. When Auto is selected, the binding position is automatically set. • This function automatically determines the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. • The binding position is set on the upper or left-side end. • Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. If the document is loaded in any other orientation, this setting fails. Image Shift Adjust the image position according to the binding margin. Change Back Shift Adjust the image position on the back side of the paper in the 2-sided copy mode. Adjust Value • North American model (inch): Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 inch. • European model (cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-39 5.4 Application 5 5.4.5 Image Adjust If the paper is larger than the original, you can enlarge the original and copy it into the center of the paper. Full Size Center Zoom Centering % Press [Application] ö [Image Adjust]. Settings Full Size Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. Place the original on the original glass. Center Zoom Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. However, some parts of the image may be lost. Place the original on the original glass. Centering Copies the original image at the center of the paper without enlarging it. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-40 5.4 Application 5 5.4.6 Booklet The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce 2-sided 2 in 1 copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. 0 Center Staple & Fold or Half-Fold is available if the Saddle Stitcher is installed in the optional Finisher. 0 Generally, a multiple of 4 pages is required with a 1-sided original, and a multiple of 2 pages is required with a 2-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. 0 If a booklet is selected with the Auto Paper Select enabled, the zoom is automatically set at 64.7% (70.7%). % Press [Application] ö [Booklet]. Settings Left Bind/Right Bind Select the output binding position for copies to be output. Center Staple & Fold Staples copies at two places along the center, then folds the copies in half before feeding them out. Half-Fold Feeds out a copied sheet by folding it in two. No This setting feeds out a copied sheet without Center Staple & Fold or HalfFold. Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the front and back covers. 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 3 6 3 5 4 8 1 8 1 7 REPORT 2 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 6 6 6 4 5 1 8 1 8 2 REPORT 7 Right binding Left bindingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-41 5.4 Application 5 dReference To set to an appropriate zoom: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet]. 5.4.7 Erase Frame Erase Copies can be produced by erasing shadows of punched holes, unnecessary areas around the original text, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. All four sides around the original can be erased in the same width or in a different width for each side. % Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Frame Erase]. Settings Frame Erases the four sides of the original in the same width. Top Right Bottom Left Erases each frame side in a different width. +/- • North American model (inch): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 1/16 inch and 2 inch. • European model (cm): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 0.1 mm and 50.0 mm. The erasing width can also be entered using the keypad. None Sets the erasing width to 0 inch (0 mm). A A:1/16 inch to 2 inch (0.1 mm to 50.0 mm) Abizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-42 5.4 Application 5 Non-Image Area Erase This function enables copying with the ADF open while having an original that cannot be loaded in the ADF placed at a desired position on the original glass. The original is automatically detected and the area outside the original text is erased. Erase methods include "Bevel" and "Rectangular". "Bevel" is used when the background of the original is thin and "Rectangular" is used when it is dark. You can place the original on any position without opening or closing the ADF so that you can make copies promptly. In addition, toner consumption will be reduced as the area outside the original text is erased. 0 If erasing is not performed as desired, set "Erase Operation" under "Erase Adjustment" in Administrator Settings. 0 The size of the original automatically detected is 3/8 inch e 3/8 inch (10 mm e 10 mm) or larger. If the detection fails, a blank sheet of paper is output. 0 You cannot make copies with the ADF closed. 0 The original image may be defected at its top or end. % Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Non-Image Area Erase]. dReference To set Erase Operation: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Erase Adjustment]. Rectangular erasing Bevel erasingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-43 5.4 Application 5 5.4.8 Stamp/Composition Add date and time, page number, stamp, image, or header or footer to make copies. Item Date/Time Adds date and time to copies. Page Number Adds page numbers or chapter numbers to copies. Stamp Adds preset or registered stamps to copies. Copy Security Adds a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying in a document when copying. This function also allows you to copy a text with copy inhibit information or password embedded. Using this function, you can prevent original information from being leaked. Stamp Repeat Repeats copying of a stamp or the date and time onto the paper. Header/Footer Adds date and time to the top or bottom of the paper to print copies. Watermark Adds a watermark (watery text) to the center of the copied pages. Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images. Registered Overlay Saves an image of the scanned original as a registered overlay in the hard disk and later overlay the registered image on the copy of another original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-44 5.4 Application 5 Date/Time You can select the print position and notation format to print the date and time. Specify whether to print on all pages or only on the first page. 0 The date/time stamp cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. 0 The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Date/Time]. dReference To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Settings Date Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. Time Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. When [None] is selected, the time is not printed. Pages Select to print the date/time on all pages or only on the first page. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm). Text Details Set the text color, size and type.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-45 5.4 Application 5 Page Number You can select the print position and notation format to print page numbers and chapter numbers. Page and chapter numbers are printed on all pages. 0 Page numbers cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Page Number]. Settings Starting Page Number • Set [Page Number] between -99999 and 99999, and set [Chapter] between -100 and 100. • Press [*] to switch over the signs (+ and -) of the setting. • If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "-1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. • The entered chapter number is printed if [1-1, 1-2...] is selected under "Page Number Type". Starting Chapter Number Page Number Type Select the type (format) of the page.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-46 5.4 Application 5 dReference To configure the settings for the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions: Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. To configure the settings for the Chapters function: Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters]. To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Insert Sheet Setting Set this parameter when using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions together. Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover: Prints on the front and back covers. Print on Back Cover Only: Prints a page number on the back cover but not on the front cover. Page number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy. Do not print Page Number: Disables printing on the front or back cover. Page number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy. Insert Sheet (Copy) Print page #: Prints on inserted pages. Do Not Print #: Counts but not prints on inserted pages. Skip the Page(s): Disables counting and printing on inserted pages. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print #: Counts but not prints on inserted pages. Skip the Page(s): Disables counting and printing on inserted pages. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm). Text Details Set the text color, size and type. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-47 5.4 Application 5 Stamp You can select the print position and notation format to print the stamp. Select printing on all pages or only on the first page. 0 A stamp refers to text with printing contents fixed and preset. You can also select a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility. 0 Stamps cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp]. dReference To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Settings Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Pages Select to print the stamp on all pages or only on the first page. Text Size Select the character size used for the stamp. Text Color Select the text color for the stamp. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-48 5.4 Application 5 Copy Protect This function allows you to print a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date, in the background without particular distinction. If you copy a document with Copy Protect printed, a text is highlighted on the entire sheet of paper to be printed, enabling you to know that the copy is not authorized. 0 The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected copy protection text formats appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight text lines. 0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. 0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security]ö [Copy Protect]. Settings Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps. Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time Format, the time is not printed. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number. Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine. For details on setting for the serial number, contact your service representative. Distribution Control Number Prints the distribution control number. Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999. Detail Settings Configure the settings for Text/Background Color, Density, Copy Protect Text, Text Size, Pattern Overwrite and Background Pattern. ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCDbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-49 5.4 Application 5 dReference To delete a registered stamp: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Delete Registered Stamp]. Copy Guard This function prints a document, embedding a Copy Guard pattern in a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date. If an attempt is made to copy copy-guarded sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Copy Guard pattern, stops copying, and discards the currently running job. 0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps. 0 The Copy Guard text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected Copy Guards appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to six text lines. 0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together. 0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected. 0 A Copy Guard cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film. % [Application] ö [Stamp/Compositon] ö [Copy Security] ö [Copy Guard] Position Change the angle. The angle can be changed when there are no more than four lines in the selected copy protection text. Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target copy protection text and press [Up] or [Down]. To add a space to the copy protection text, press [Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that appears beside the specified copy protection text type, and then press [Insert]. To delete the copy protection text, press [Delete], and then press the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. Settings ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD NGbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-50 5.4 Application 5 dReference To specify and detect a Copy Guard: Select Utility/Counter ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Copy Guard]. Password Copy This function prints a document, embedding a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date, and a password for Password Copy. If an attempt is made to copy password-copied sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Password Copy pattern and prompts you to enter the password. When the correct password is entered, copying will start. 0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps. 0 A Password Copy is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected Password Copy texts appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to six text lines. 0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together. 0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected. 0 A Password Copy cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film. 0 If you fail to enter a password three times, the currently processed copy job will be erased. 0 If a password is detected on copies with Zoom, 2 Color, Grayscale, Color Adjust, Colored Paper, Envelope, or Transparency specified, the currently processed copy job will be erased. 0 If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned, you will need to enter a password for each original. Settings Copy Guard Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Copy Guard Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper. ABCD 1234 1234 1234 Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD NG Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD 12bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-51 5.4 Application 5 % Select [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security] ö [Password Copy]. dReference To specify and detect a Password Copy: Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Copy]. Stamp Repeat You can print a stamp, the date and time, or other specified items on all pages of the copy. 0 The printing contents of the Stamp Repeat function are printed on all pages. 0 The selected Stamp appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight text lines. 0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. 0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. Settings Password Enter the password to be embedded in paper. Stamp Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Password Copy Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-52 5.4 Application 5 % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp Repeat]. dReference To delete a registered stamp: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Delete Registered Stamp]. Settings Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps. Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time Format, the time is not printed. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number. Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine. For details on setting for the serial number, contact your service representative. Distribution Control Number Prints the distribution control number. Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999. Detail Settings Select the Text Color, Density, Text Size and Pattern Overwrite. Position Change the angle as required when there are no more than four lines in the selected repeating stamp. Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target Stamp Repeat and press [Up] or [Down]. To add a space to repeated stamps, press [Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that appears beside the specified Stamp Repeat, and then press [Insert]. To delete the Stamp Repeat text, press [Delete], and then press the button for the Stamp Repeat text to be deleted.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-53 5.4 Application 5 Header/Footer This setting enables printing the date/time and text at the top or the bottom of the paper. The date/time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. The header and footer can contain predetermined contents, but you can also temporarily change the contents. 0 In order to use the Header/Footer function, a header/footer must be registered in advance in Administrator Settings. If no header/footer is registered in Administrator Settings, the [Header/Footer] menu does not appear. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Header/Footer]. dReference To register a header/footer: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Header/Footer Settings]. Settings Recall Header/Footer Select a header/footer to be used. Check/Change Temporarily Check or temporarily change the contents of the registered header/footer. Header Settings Select to enable or disable printing of a header/footer. To print a header/footer, configure the following settings: Text: Enter the text for the header/footer. Date/Time: Select the type of date and time notation. Other: Select to print or not to print the distribution control number, job number, or serial number. Footer Settings Pages Select to print the header/footer on all pages or only on the first page. Text Details Select the Text Color, Text Size and Text Type. Reset Reset the settings to the initial contents.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-54 5.4 Application 5 Watermark You can print a watermark (light text) at the center of the paper. Select fixed preset text to be printed such as "Invalid Copy" and "Private". Copying with a watermark enables explicit indication of the use of the copied paper. It also helps prevent unauthorized copy from the copied paper. 0 The watermark is printed on all pages at an angle of 45 degrees. It is printed once per page. 0 In case other settings affect the watermark printing to cause partial loss, the Watermark function is canceled upon copying. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Watermark]. Settings Watermark Type Select a watermark from the eight types available. The watermark selected is printed over the original image. Text Color Select the watermark color from [Black], [Magenta] and [Cyan]. The watermark is printed in the selected color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-55 5.4 Application 5 Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images. For example, if you set Overlay to copy three original pages, two pages are output, including "a merged image of the first and second pages" and "a merged images of the first and the third pages". The Overlay function is useful for overlay of text, pictures or figures not prepared in other Stamp/Composition functions on the original. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Overlay]. Settings Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Selecting [1st Page Only] prints only on the second page of the original. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Density Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). Color Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-56 5.4 Application 5 Registered Overlay This function enables storing of an image from the scanned original as a registered overlay on the hard disk for later use in copying another original. It is useful to register frequently used overlay images. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Registered Overlay]. Composition Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and increases the brightness of the image. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. Background Composition (Original) Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. Back Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-57 5.4 Application 5 Settings Recall Overlay Image Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. • You cannot select an overlay image when no overlay has been registered. Thumbnail View Display Name In the screen view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. Detail Settings Density: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). Color: Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta]. Composition: Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and increases the brightness of the image. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. Background Composition(Original) Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. Back Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Image Details Check the "Name", "Registered Date", "Image Size" and "Color" of the overlay image. To confirm the enlarged overlay image, press [Preview]. Register Overlay Image New Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered. Load the overlay image original on the original glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay image registered. Overwrite Select an overlay image to use for overwrite and press [Overwrite]. Load the overlay image original on the original glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay image overwritten. Delete Select an overlay image to be deleted and press [Delete]. Detail Settings Density: Specify the density of an overlay to be registered between 20% and 100%. Color: Select the color for the overlay image to be registered from [Auto Color], [Full Color] and [Black]. Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-58 5.4 Application 5 dReference To prohibit changing the overlay registration: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Change Registered Overly].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-59 5.4 Application 5 5.4.9 Card Copy Separately scans the contents of the front and back sides of a card, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card, and copies them together on one sheet. You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. Using the card copy function, you can save the number of sheets to be used. 0 A card must be placed in the erect mode on the original glass. 0 The card copy function and the auto paper function cannot be selected at the same time. 0 For some zoom values, part of the image may be cut off. % Select [Application] ö [Card Copy]. dReference To specify the default of Card Copy: Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Card Copy]. Settings Original Size Press [X] and [Y], and enter the size of the card to be copied. Also select the pre-specified size from [size1] to [size4]. Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card. Zoom You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. A A B Bbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-60 5.4 Application 5 5.4.10 Save in User Box This function enables saving of data from the scanned originals on the hard disk (in the User Box) built in the machine. Documents saved in User Boxes can be printed when necessary. For details on using documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". % Press [Application] ö [Save in User Box]. Settings User Box Select the destination User Box. Document Name Specify a document name for the read original. A name automatically assigned to the document appears. You can change the file name. Save & Print [Yes]: Select to copy the scanned original and save it in the specified User Box. [No]: Select to save the data of the scanned original in the specified User Box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-61 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5 Left panel display In the left panel of the basic settings screen, you can view the job list and the job status information. You can also view the result of the settings being configured. dReference To configure settings displayed as the default in the left panel: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Left Panel Display Default]. To prohibit other users from deleting jobs or to give permission to do so: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Delete Other User Jobs]. To prohibit or permit change if the print priority of jobs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Changing Job Priority]. To hide the file name and destination in the job log: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Hide Personal Information]. To delete all job logs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Initialize] ö [Job History]. Job List Check Job Settings Job List Lists jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed. If the Left Panel Display Default is set to "Status Display" in User Settings, the job status is displayed. Delete To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Job Details Opens the Job List screen. Check Job Displays the result of the settings being configured. Check Details Check or change the current copy settings.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-62 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5.1 Job List From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed. 0 If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. 0 If an Administrator Settings parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. 0 When there is a job being printed, another job can be registered. Up to 251 jobs can be registered in total. 0 If the authentication method is changed in Administrator Settings and all management data is cleared, the jobs in the [Job History] are deleted. % Press [Job List] ö [Job Details] ö [Print]. Settings Print Opens the screen for checking print jobs. Send Opens the screen for checking fax and scan transmission jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Receive Opens the screen for checking fax reception jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Save Opens the screen for saving jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-63 5.5 Left panel display 5 Current Jobs Lists the jobs currently processed. Check the current status. Delete Deletes a job. Increase Priority (Displayed for the list of print jobs in process) The currently processed print job is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the currently processed print job cannot be interrupted because it contains Fold or Staple, the job given priority is executed after the currently processed print job has been completed. Release Held Job (Displayed for the list of print jobs in process) Select to switch to the held job list and change the settings of, print, or delete a held job. The held job list contains jobs that could not be printed because, for example, system auto reset was activated during the proof copy. • If desired, press [Change Settings] to change the copy settings. • For confirmation, press the [Proof Copy] key to print a copy from a stored job. Check Job Set. Check job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed, and held jobs. Current Jobs Detail Check the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in process. To delete the job, press [Delete] in the Detail screen. Job History Lists completed jobs. • This list includes jobs that failed because of an error. • You can check the job logs and results. • [Scanned Image] in the left panel displays the first page of the selected job with a thumbnail. To display thumbnails in [Scanned Image], set [Job History Thumbnail Display] in Administrator Settings to [ON]. For details, refer to page 7-51. Deleted Jobs Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished. Finished Jobs Displays only jobs that were completed normally. All Jobs Displays all jobs. Detail Check the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Job History list. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-64 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5.2 Check Job From the Check Job Settings screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. 1 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details]. 2 Check the copy settings. To change the copy settings, press the relevant button. 3 After checking the settings, press [Close].6 User Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-2 6 6 User Settings User Settings are for setting items that a user can adjust as appropriate. The contents of these setting items depend upon how the Administrator settings are configured. User Settings cannot be initialized all at once. To initialize all settings, either manually reset them one by one or contact your service representative. Settings System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user. Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. Scan/Fax Settings Configure setting for fax and scan operations. Printer Settings Configure setting is for the printer operations. Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in. Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified for registered users. Change Icon Change the icons specified for registered users. Register Authentication Information Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the current login user. Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Configure settings to print data from a cellular phone or PDA.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-3 6.1 System Settings 6 6.1 System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [System Settings]. Settings Language Selection Select the language for display in the touch panel. Measurement Unit Settings Select the units for the values displayed in the touch panel. Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the trays to be selected automatically when the Auto Paper Select function is enabled. Also configure the priority for the auto tray switch operation to switch paper trays when it is enabled. • Configure "Auto Paper Selection Setting" to use paper types other than plain paper as plain paper in a regular auto paper selection mode. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Specify the action to be taken when the matching paper is not loaded into the specified paper tray. • [Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)] Printing stops. • [Switch Trays (Tray Priority)] Whether the matching paper is loaded into the specified paper tray is determined first. And if not, another tray that has the matching paper loaded (if any) is selected. Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Also select whether to print lists in 1-Sided or 2- Sided mode. Post Inserter Settings Specify the paper tray, paper type, or paper size when using the Post Inserter. This button appears only when the Post Inserter is installed. Auto Color Level Adjust. Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white original when the Auto Color setting is selected. Power Save Settings Refer to page 7-3. Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. Output Settings Refer to page 7-4. AE Level Adjustment Refer to page 7-9.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-4 6.1 System Settings 6 Auto Paper Select for Small Original Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the document placed on the original glass is too small to be detected in Auto Paper mode. Copy on Small Size Prints on 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper. • If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper is not loaded in the tray, a message that instructs you to load 5- 1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper in the bypass tray appears. Copy on Letter (Copy on A4) Prints on 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) paper. Prohibit Copy Starts printing when a paper tray is selected manually and the [Start] key is pressed. Blank Page Print Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-26. Page Number Print Position Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position. Select Keyboard Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel. Factory default Language Selection English Measurement Unit Settings This value varies depending on the area. Auto Tray Selection Settings Tray Priority Tray 1 ö Tray 2 ö Tray 3 ö Tray 4 ö LCT LCT is displayed when the optional LCT is installed. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists • Tray 1 • 1-Sided Post Inserter Settings Paper Tray: F1 Paper Type: Plain Paper Paper size: Auto Detect Paper Type Plain paper Paper Size Auto Detect Auto Color Level Adjust. Standard (3) Low Power Mode Settings 15 min. Sleep Mode Settings 30 min. Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print Fax: Batch Print Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2 • Print: Tray 2 • Print Reports: Tray 1 • Fax: Tray 1 [Output Tray] is displayed when the Finisher FS-526, Finisher FS-527, or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. [Tray 3] is displayed if the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. AE Level Adjustment Standard (2) Auto Paper Select for Small Original Prohibit Copy Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print Page Number Print Position Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-5 6.1 System Settings 6 dReference To enable Auto Paper: Press [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Auto Paper]. To enable Auto Color: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Auto Color]. To configure Background Removal to Auto: Press [Quality/Density] ö [Background Removal] ö [Auto]. Select Keyboard Local Keyboard Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-6 6.2 Custom Display Settings 6 6.2 Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings]. Settings Copier Settings Default Tab Select either the standard Basic tab or the Quick Copy tab as the basic settings screen in Copy mode. Shortcut Key 1 Allocate shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions to be added to the basic settings screen. Pressing a shortcut key displays the desired setting screen. • When the optional image controller is installed, only one shortcut key can be enabled. Shortcut Key 2 Quick Settings 1 Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on the basic settings screen. The registered setting condition can be invoked by only pressing the corresponding easy setting key. Quick Settings 2 Quick Settings 3 Quick Settings 4 Default Tab Density Settings Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the basic settings screen to adjust the copy density. • If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified. Scan/Fax Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". User Box Settings Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". Copy Screen Configure whether to display the [Next Box Job], [Next Scan/Fax Job], or [Next Copy Job] button or messages when you program the next job during the printing operation. FAX Active Screen This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Color Selection Settings Select the color used for indicating that the button is selected. Left Pane Display Default Left Panel Display Default Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the contents of the current Copy settings as the default display of the left panel. Job Display Setting Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the progress of the current job in process, when the default display of the left panel set to "Job List".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-7 6.2 Custom Display Settings 6 Search Option Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default Default Tab Basic Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2/Quick settings 1/Quick settings 2/Quick settings 3/Quick settings 4 OFF Default Tab Density Settings OFF Default Tab (Fax/Scan Settings) Address Book Program Default (Fax/Scan Settings) PAGE1 Address Book Index Default (Fax/Scan Settings) Favorites Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2 (Fax/Scan Settings) OFF Default Address Book (Fax/Scan Settings) Index Default Address Type (Fax/Scan Settings) Group Default Tab (User Box Settings) Public Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2 (User Box Settings) OFF Copy Operating Screen No Color Selection Settings Green Left Panel Display Default Job List Job Display Setting List Display Uppercase and lowercase letters Differentiate Search Option Screen OFF Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-8 6.3 Copier Settings 6 6.3 Copier Settings Configure the settings used by the copy functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings]. Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Configure whether to automatically specify Booklet when Center Staple and Fold is selected. This item is displayed if the saddle stitcher is installed in the finisher. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Configure whether the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when Combine or Booklet is selected in Auto Paper mode. • Select the recommended zoom ratios for the following zoom settings: 2 in 1, Booklet: 64.7% (70.7%) 4 in 1: 50.0% 8 in 1: 32.3% (35.3%) Auto Sort/Group Selection Configure whether to output the copied pages automatically in Sort mode when copying multiple-page original using the ADF. Default Copy Settings Configure the initial values for the Copy function to be displayed when the power in turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. Current Setting The current settings are used as the default settings. Factory Default The factory settings are used as the default settings. Default Enlarge Display Settings This setting is for the enlarged display screen operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". When AMS Direction is Incorrect Configure whether to print or discard the job when the original orientation does not match that of paper in Auto Zoom mode. Separate Scan Output Method Configure the output for divided original loaded in the ADF or for multiple pages of the original scanned on the original glass. Page Print Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned. Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned. Enlargement Rotation Configure whether to rotate and print a large-size original image when the original orientation does not match that of paper. Auto Zoom (Platen) Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side This item is displayed when user access is allowed in Administrator settings while the Finisher FS-526 is installed. For details, refer to page 7-43.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-9 6.3 Copier Settings 6 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold/Tri-Fold for all pages together or for specific pages when handling a job containing multiple pages. When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected. If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets are printed without being folded. This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed in the Finisher FS-526. To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative. Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3) Tri-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:1) Half-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page when handling a job containing multiple pages. When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected. If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets are printed without being folded. This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative. Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3) Print Jobs During Copy Operation Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Automatic Image Rotation Finishing Program Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen. To display the button, register the contents of the finishing program. Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen. This item is set if the finisher is installed. Card Shot Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Factory default Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort/Group Selection Yes Default Copy Settings Factory Default When AMS Direction is Incorrect Print Separate Scan Output Method Page Print Enlargement Rotation Allow Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2 Tri-Fold Print Side Inside Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets Half-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-10 6.3 Copier Settings 6 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Accept Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom Is Set Finishing Program ON Card Shot Layout: Top/Bottom Zoom: Full Size Store Original Size: X: 3-1/2 inch (89.0 mm) Y: 21 inch (51.0 mm) Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-11 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings 6 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-12 6.5 Printer Settings 6 6.5 Printer Settings This setting is for the printer operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-13 6.6 Change Password 6 6.6 Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in. 0 A public user cannot use this function. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Password]. 2 Enter the previous password, and then press [OK]. 3 Enter a new password. 4 Press [Password Confirmation], and then enter the new password again. 5 Press [OK]. The new password is registered.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-14 6.7 Change E-Mail Address 6 6.7 Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified as registered user information. 0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address. 0 Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-50. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change E-Mail Address]. 2 Press [E-mail Address]. 3 Change the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-15 6.8 Change Icon 6 6.8 Change Icon Change the icon specified as registered user information. 0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Icon]. 2 Select the icon and press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-16 6.9 Register Authentication Information 6 6.9 Register Authentication Information Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information about the registered users. You can register or delete authentication information when performing the following operations. 0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow]. 0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User Authentication Settings] ö [User Registration] ö [Function Permission] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow]. 0 Log in as a registered user. 1 Select Utility/Counter ö [User Settings] ö [Register Authentication Settings]. 2 Press [Edit]. To delete authentication information, press [Delete]. For biometric authentication For IC card authenticationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-17 6.9 Register Authentication Information 6 3 Register authentication information. For biometric authentication, place your finger on the Authentication Unit to scan the finger vein pattern. Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each scanning. After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press [Authentication Test]. If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [Register]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. For IC card authentication, place your IC card on the Authentication Unit, and press [OK]. 4 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-18 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting 6 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Configure settings to print data in a cellular phone or PDA through this machine. For details, refer to the "User's Guide Box Operations" and "User's Guide Print Operations".7 Administrator Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-2 7 7 Administrator Settings Administrator Settings are used only by the administrator to adjust the settings. Logging on to Administrator Settings requires the administrator password. Settings System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. Administrator/Machine Settings Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. One-Touch/User Box Registration Configure settings for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. User Authentication/Account Track Configure the authentication settings to restrict the functions of this machine. Network Settings Configure settings for the software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine. Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. Printer Settings Configure settings for the print operations. Fax Settings Configure settings for the fax and network fax operations. System Connection Configure network settings. Security Settings Configure settings to restrict the functions of this machine for processing secret data. License Settings Enable an optional i-Option function. OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-3 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1 System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. 7.1.1 Power Save Settings Configure the settings for the power-saving mode. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings]. Settings Low Power Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the lower power mode when this machine is not being operated. Sleep Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the sleep mode when this machine is not being operated. Power Save Key Configure the type of the power save function to be started when you press the [Power Save] key. Low Power Provides power-saving effect higher than normal. Sleep Although this machine conserves more energy in the sleep mode than in the power save mode, the machine must warm-up when the sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than the power save mode. Enter Power Save Mode Configure settings for switching to the power save mode after printing documents from computers or receiving faxes. Normal Enters the power save mode when the time specified in Low Power Mode Settings has elapsed. Immediately Enters the power save mode in a short time. Factory default Low Power Mode Settings 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings 30 minutes Power Save Key Lower Enter Power Save Mode Immediatelybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-4 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.2 Output Settings Configure the settings for the output functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Output Settings]. Settings Print/Fax Output Settings This setting is for the print and fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and " User's Guide [Print Operations]". Output Tray Settings Configure an output tray given priority for outputting by function. This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. Shift Output Each Job Select whether to shift the output paper for each job. This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. Factory default Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print Fax: Batch Print Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2 • Print: Tray 2 • Print Reports: Tray 1 • Fax: Tray 1 [Tray 3] is displayed when the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. Shift Output Each Job Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-5 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.3 Date/Time Settings Configure the current date and time and the time zone. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Date/Time Settings]. dReference To cancel the current settings: Press the [C] key. Settings Year Configure the current date and time. Monthly Daily Hour Minute Time Zone Configure the UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) related time zone. Factory default Time Zone +00:00bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-6 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time Configure daylight saving time settings. 0 This function is available when this machine is connected to the network where UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) is specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö